JP6500179B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols is disposed, and in order to perform processing necessary for control of pachinko gaming, etc., various substrates including an arithmetic processing substrate and an effect control substrate are provided.
Among various types of substrates constituting the gaming machine, the effect control substrate controls image display on the display device to which the player pays most attention when playing a game. The effect control board (sub board) determines the effect contents (drawing contents) for the gaming state at that time based on the instruction (command) from the game control board (main board), and performs the effect (Patent Document 1 reference).
In addition, a game control board and an effect control board respectively constitute a control device, and they become a game control device and an effect control device.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-45495

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is a limit in improving the interest of the game .

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game .

The invention according to claim 1 is a game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A game control device for producing a variable display game based on a command transmitted from the game control means;
The effect control means is
In the effect of the variable display game, it is possible to execute at least a predetermined advance effect by a combination of video and audio,
The preliminary announcement effect is constituted by a plurality of sections,
As a clocking means for managing the execution of the advance presentation,
A first clocking means comprising a counter that counts the remaining time of the time value of each section of the preliminary rendering effect;
The second clocking means comprising a counter for clocking a delay time for delaying the start of the audio output corresponding to each section of the preliminary presentation effect ;
Updating the second clock means prior to the first clock means;
When the time of the second time counting means is up, it becomes possible to start voice output corresponding to each section of the notice effect,
It is characterized in that the second clock means is shared by the video and the audio constituting the preview effect.
Here, the “rendering means” is, for example, a display device, but is not limited to the display device.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a reverse view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing a control system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a block diagram of VDP in an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows input processing. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control command transmission processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control command output processing. It is a flowchart which shows command data output processing. It is a flowchart which shows payment command transmission processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a random number update process 1; 5 is a flowchart showing random number update processing 2; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize mouth switch / error monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows an error check process. It is a flow chart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure starting opening switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows count switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows a special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure usual processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change start processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 fluctuation design start processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows stop symbol information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows special drawing information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the second half fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing (special figure 1) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing (special figure 2) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows a process in special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing during a special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows processing under special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows processing under special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows a special figure usual processing shift setting processing 2 (when time saving end). It is a flow chart which shows processing transition setting processing 1 during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing during special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing transition setting processing 2 during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end setting processing 1. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot end setting process 2; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3. It is a flow chart which shows common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart which shows gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the common drawing normal processing transfer setting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a process shift setting process during common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows a process shift setting process during a common drawing display. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart which shows a process transfer setting process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows a power transmission operation shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a routine charge residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing shift setting processing per common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing per common drawing. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a general drawing process shift setting process 2; It is a flowchart which shows segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an intrinsic | native information signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows CPU intrinsic | native information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening signal editing processing. It is a flowchart which shows symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command setting process. It is a flow chart which shows design change control processing. It is a flowchart which shows distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the power on reset process of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows reception command range check processing. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern corresponding symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization processing 1 classified by reception command. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization processing 1 classified by reception command. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization processing 1 classified by reception command. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization processing 1 classified by reception command. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 reservation information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization processing 2 classified by reception command. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization processing 2 classified by reception command. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern classification processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a random number lottery process A. 7 is a flowchart showing a random number lottery process B. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number lottery process C. It is a flow chart which shows notice production setting processing 1. 6 is a flowchart showing a preview rendering effect setting process 2; 6 is a flowchart showing a preview rendering effect setting process 2; It is a flowchart which shows the transmission start process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows the inter-sub reception task process. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission data edit process between sub. 15 is a flowchart illustrating inter-sub ack response task processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production | generation setting processing between sub. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows customer waiting display edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a background edit process. It is a flow chart which shows background information update judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a moving image index setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a background moving image data edit process. It is a flow chart which shows background still picture data edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a background off data edit process. It is a flow chart which shows background notice edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows notice information update judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows notice information update judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows notice display data edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows design editing processing. It is a flow chart which shows design information development processing. It is a flow chart which shows real symbol display edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a next symbol display edit process. 5 is a flowchart showing a preliminary announcement editing process 1; It is a flow chart which shows pending edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 reservation display edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows pending display pattern edit processing. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a preliminary editing process 2; FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating inter-subset interlocked notice editing processing. It is a flow chart which shows reduction symbol edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows 4th symbol edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows 4th symbol edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit round edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation parameter update process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation parameter update process. It is a flowchart which shows sound control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a sound output process. It is a flowchart which shows a sound effect output process. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an inter-sub reception interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving packet analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving packet analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission interruption processing between sub. It is a figure which shows the example of a packet structure of communication between subs. It is a figure explaining an implementation probability table. It is a figure explaining the concrete operation | movement of the presentation by communication between subs. It is a figure explaining the concrete operation | movement of the presentation by communication between subs. It is a figure explaining the concrete operation | movement of the presentation by communication between subs. It is a figure explaining the concrete operation | movement of the presentation by communication between subs. It is a figure explaining the concrete operation | movement of the presentation by communication between subs. It is a figure explaining the concrete operation | movement of the presentation by communication between subs. It is a figure showing an example of a notice operation table of a self-opportunity. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice operation table of another machine.

Hereinafter, a form example at the time of applying to a pachinko machine as Example 1 of the present invention is explained with reference to drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.
The pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the island on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by being pivotally supported by the hinge 3 on the machine frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the machine frame 2 And a front frame 4 which can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

Further, a glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to cover the front upper side so as to be openable and closable. In addition, a game area 22 described later of the game board 20 can be viewed from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted, and a reference numeral is omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be openable and closable.
Here, the front frame 4 is called by the name of a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes called by the name of a front frame, but in the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are explained.
Below the glass frame 5, an operation panel 6 is provided.
Usually, a CR unit (card-type ball rental control unit) as a gaming medium lending device may be provided side by side with the pachinko machine 1, but illustration is omitted here. However, in FIG. 4, the CR unit is illustrated as the card unit 551, and the card unit connection board 54 that relays the transmission of signals and the like with the card unit 551 is also shown in FIG. 4.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is a plate-like base (so-called veneer) having a game nail implanted on the front surface thereof, and the substantially circular area on the front surface is surrounded by the guide rails 21. 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area for performing out or safe determination (determination as to whether or not a prize has been made) while dropping the game ball dropped from above from above, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and becomes effectively safe. Is configured such that a predetermined number of gaming balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (i.e., discharged as a winning ball).
In addition, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) of the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at an edge of the opening and closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Further, the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds the game ball before being discharged as a winning ball or a rental ball. The upper plate 7 is provided with a push button type effect button 9 operated by the player.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 capable of transferring the gaming ball of the upper plate 7 by the operation of the player, and a firing operation handle 11 for performing a firing operation of the gaming ball.
Moreover, what is shown by code | symbol 12a, 12b in FIG. 1 is a speaker which outputs an effect sound etc. FIG. Among them, reference numeral 12 a is an upper speaker provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12 b is a lower speaker provided at the left end of the operation panel 6 (the left side of the lower plate 10).

Further, in FIG. 1, reference numeral 13 denotes a decoration lamp using an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the front surface of the glass frame 5 as a light source, and reference numeral 14 denotes upper left and right sides It is a moving light provided on the front. Although not shown, the moving light 14 includes an LED as a light source and a motor as a driving source. Here, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light 14 constitute a decoration LED 301 shown in FIG.
If the decoration mechanism is divided according to the concept of the board and frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light 14 correspond to the effect mechanism on the frame side, and constitute the frame decoration device 43 shown in FIG. The moving light 14 also constitutes a frame effect device 45 shown in FIG.

B. Front Structure of the Game Board In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 denotes a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, the game area 22 is formed by the substantially circular area on the front of the game board being surrounded by the guide rails 21. ing.
In the game area 22, as shown in FIG. 2, the out ball inlet 23, the center case 24, the first start winning opening 25, the second starting winning opening 26 as a regular electric role (Puden), the fluctuation winning device 27, a general winning opening 28-31, a common view starting gate 32, a large number of game nails (not shown), etc. are provided. Further, outside the gaming area 22 of the gaming board 20, a collective display device 35 is provided. A game ball which has jumped to the upper part of the game area 22 flows down while hitting it, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

The center case 24 is a member surrounding the front periphery of the display portion 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 4) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown, the center case 24 includes lamps using an LED for effect or decoration as a light emission source, or a motorized character (for example, enhancing effect effects in cooperation with effect indication on the display device 41 An article having a movable part operated by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is provided.
Note that lamps for effecting or decoration are also provided to portions other than the center case 24 of the gaming board 20 (may be outside the gaming area 22). The lamps provided for the effect or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to the effect mechanism on the board side, and the board decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 6) is also provided on the center case 24. The provided motorized role corresponds to the effect mechanism on the board side, and constitutes a board effect device 44 (shown in FIG. 6). In addition, the electrically operated combination which constitutes board production device 44 may be provided in places other than center case 24 of game board 20.

The display device 41 (rendering means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is generally referred to as a variable display device. In addition, as a name of the display device 41, as a name of a member having the same function, for example, a special symbol display device, a special view display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, an identification information variation display device There are various types, but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special view) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special views. For example, a special figure is displayed in vertical three columns on the left side, center and right side, and a special figure consisting of numbers, characters, etc. is displayed in a stopped state (stopped display) in each column, or a fluctuation state (eg, vertically) It is possible to display (i.e., change display) in a scrolling state).
In addition, on the display unit, an image for presentation or information notification such as a background image or a character image separately from the above-mentioned special view, or an image corresponding to a so-called common drawing can be displayed. Note that the special view is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common drawing is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the per flat figure (not the big hit). .

The start winning openings 25 and 26 are winning openings which function as the start winning openings of the special drawing as described later, and are arranged vertically in this example as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26 has opening and closing members 26a on the left and right sides, and when these opening and closing members 26a are opened in a reverse C shape, winning is possible, and as shown in FIG. If closed, it is impossible to win. The start winning openings 25, 26 are disposed below the central portion of the center case 24.
The second start winning opening 26 is also referred to as a normal electric winning combination (general power), and corresponds to a normal fluctuation winning device.
The variable winning device 27 is a device having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 27b (a so-called attacker). The large winning opening 27a is released on the condition that it becomes a big hit, which will be described later, and the game ball can be won.

As described above, the display 41a (screen) of the display device 41 also displays an image of a common drawing separately from the special drawing, and the common drawing game will be described as follows. Therefore, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
When the game ball passes through the drawing start gate 32, the display 41a, etc. (You may arrange your own drawing indicator separately from the display device 41). (Hereinafter referred to as a common drawing variation display game) is performed, and if the stopped common drawing is a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a benefit called per common drawing is provided.
When it comes to a hit, a game in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 is temporarily held for a predetermined opening time is performed in the open state in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a is opened reversely. It becomes easy to win, and accordingly, the number of times the special display of the variable display game is implemented increases and the possibility of becoming a big hit increases.
In addition, when the game ball is further awarded to the common drawing start gate 32 during the variable display game of the common drawing, the display of the common drawing start memory is executed by the display of the collective display device 35 described later. The game is stored up to one piece, and after the end of the floating display game of the common drawing, the floating display game of the common drawing is repeated based on the storage. In addition, it is easy to hit a common figure if the probability of the common drawing is high.
In addition, the reservation display of the common drawing start memory displayed by the display of the collective display unit 35 is the common drawing start memory. Apart from the batch display device 35, a unique spread map start memory indicator may be arranged in the game area 22 for displaying the decoration map start memory. Here, the time reduction will be described as follows: It is a thing.
Short time is an abbreviation of "time reduction", and after the big hit ends, the fluctuation time of the special figure or popular figure is shortened than usual, and time efficiency is improved, and the probability per common figure is raised to improve the ordinary electric character (Pu) The number of times the constant special game variation display game is implemented by providing support for winning on the starting opening by opening the (second starting winning opening 26) (including making the open time of the public turn longer than usual). It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the balls (number of balls).

Next, the collective display unit 35 displays so-called generic drawings and special drawings, and also displays pending storage of special drawings and generic drawings (in some cases, referred to as special drawings reserve display and popular diagrams reserve display), games The display of the state is performed, for example, a plurality of displays using an LED as a light source (for example, a display consisting of one small lamp, or a display of, for example, 7 segments capable of displaying numbers etc. as this special drawing) Components). Note that the display of start memory storage (in some cases, simply referred to as start memory display) is a display for notifying of the number of start memory memories etc. that are suspended with the variable display game not yet executed. Is displayed by lighting of a lamp or the like for each start memory. That is, if there are three starting memories, this is done by lighting three lamps or displaying three figures.
It is to be noted that while the display shown by the display unit of the collective display unit 35 is the special view or the general view (the formal special view or the general view), the display unit of the variable display unit 41 described above The display of the special drawing or the popular drawing to be performed is a dummy display for presentation for the player. For this reason, the player refers to the dummy display when speaking of a special drawing or a drawing as seen from the player. In addition, below, when emphasizing that it is this dummy display, it describes, for example as "the decoration special figure."
As described above, this batch display device 35 is not intended for the player, but is used for inspection of the game board 20 or the like. For example, the display of the start memory of the special view for the player (special view suspension display) is performed by, for example, the display unit of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps (light emitting units) provided on the game board 20.

C. Configuration of Pachinko Machine Back Side Next, FIG. 3 is a view showing the entire back side configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.
The main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 are the storage tank 51, the guide path 52a, the payout unit 53, the card unit connection board 54, the external information terminal board 55, the payout control device 200, the game control device 100, and the effect control device 300, and a power supply device 500.

The storage tank 51 stores the balls before being dispensed in advance, and the shortage of the number of balls of the storage tank 51 is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown), and when it is insufficient, it is called a chute of island facility The ball is supplied from the device. The ball in the storage tank 51 is guided by the guide path 52a and discharged to the above-mentioned upper tray 7 by a dispensing unit (not shown) incorporating a dispensing motor 222 (shown in FIG. 4). The payout unit is capable of discharging the game balls of the number of balls according to the amount of rotation of the payout motor 222, for example, and the gaming balls to be paid out toward the upper tray 12 by this payout unit 4).
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when sending various information (including unique ID) of the pachinko machine 1 to the management apparatus 140 of the hole.
The unique ID is a concept representing individual identification information (a main board unique ID) that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 and individual identification information (a payout unique ID) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201, as described later. The reason for outputting these to the outside of the gaming machine is to check the unique ID outside to determine the legitimacy of the gaming machine. The management device 140 described above corresponds to an external device of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), and has a function of determining the legitimacy of the pachinko machine 1 based on the unique ID outside.
The external device having the function of determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine is not limited to the management device 140. For example, the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4) may have a function of determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine. It is also good. In that case, the unique ID of the pachinko machine 1 is sent to the card unit 551 from the external information terminal board 55 described above.
Further, the determination of the legitimacy of the gaming machine may be performed by only the management device 140, by both the management device 140 and the card unit 551, or by only the card unit 551.

Here, the above-mentioned unique ID corresponds to individual identification information capable of individually (uniquely) identifying that it is an arithmetic processing unit (a gaming microcomputer 101 described later) in the gaming control device 100, but in the payout control device 200 Individual identification information capable of individually (uniquely) identifying that it is the arithmetic processing unit is also stored in the arithmetic processing unit (a dispensing microcomputer 201 described later).
In the first embodiment, therefore, the individual identification information capable of identifying the gaming microcomputer 101 will be distinguished as appropriate from the main board unique ID, and the individual identification information capable of identifying the payout microcomputer 201 from the payout unique ID. .
Further, individual identification information capable of identifying the payout microcomputer 201 is referred to as payout individual identification information, as a concept to distinguish the individual identification information capable of identifying the gaming microcomputer 101 from the individual identification information. The same applies to the other embodiments described later.
In addition, usually, when simply referred to as a unique ID, it refers to a main substrate unique ID without distinction.
Also, in the inventive concept, the unique ID is referred to as "individual identification information", but in general cases such as ordinary site level, the individual identification information is often referred to as a unique ID. In Example 1, individual identification information may be described as a unique ID, or may be described or illustrated as unique information or unique identification information in balance with the unique ID in the specification and the drawings.

The payout control device 200 performs control necessary for the payout of the game ball (both for the prize ball payout and the rental ball payout), and a circuit board for realizing the control function is accommodated in a predetermined case. There is. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of the winning balls to discharge the predetermined number of gaming balls to the upper plate 7 as the winning balls based on the payout control command transmitted from the game control device 100 as shown in FIG. Further, the payout control device 200 performs a control of the ball payout for discharging the predetermined number of game balls to the upper tray 7 as a rental ball based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4).
The game control apparatus 100 controls solenoids and the like disposed on the game board 20, sends control information (commands) to other control devices, and generally manages and controls the progress of the game (see FIG. A substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case, which will be described in detail later.

The effect control device 300 controls the above-described variable display device, decoration lamp, effect device, and speakers 12a and 12b based on a command transmitted from the game control device 100, and this control function is provided in a predetermined case. A circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board 54 (see FIG. 3 and also in FIG. 4) is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (the same as the card unit 551 below) side for lending a ball. is there. If the above-mentioned wiring connection with the card unit connection board 54 is not made, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that the game ball can not be released.

  Generally, in the case of model exchange of pachinko machines, etc., replace the entire pachinko machine except CR unit, or leave the frame side of the pachinko machine (including the payout control device), and the game board side (game board and game control) In some cases, only major control devices (such as devices) may be replaced. However, if it is 4 yen for lent balls, those with 4 yen will be used, but for example, if it is only for lent balls 1 yen, the game board side and the frame side will use the ones for lent balls 1 yen It is assumed that

D. Configuration of Control System Next, a control system of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. In the drawings and the following description, "SW" means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it becomes difficult to be illustrated, so it may be appropriately shortened (not shown).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device 400 and a power supply device 500 as main components of a control system.

(Game control related)
First, the configuration of the game control apparatus 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
Among the signals shown by the arrows in FIG. 4, "main ID" is a main board unique ID, "external information" is a gaming machine status signal, and "winning ball signal" is a winning ball from the payout control device. Ball number signal to be paid out, "discharge command" is a discharge command command from the game control device, "various signals" is a payout abnormal status signal issued from the payout control device, shoot ball out switch signal, overflow switch signal, glass frame The open switch signal, the front frame open switch signal and the like are respectively shown.
Also, the "external information" and the "winning ball signal" are collectively referred to as "external · winning ball".
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main substrate) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and includes a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal 102. Details of the gaming microcomputer 101 will be described later.
The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device.
Also, the gaming microcomputer 101 has a function as a gaming arithmetic processing device (arithmetic processing device), and corresponds to a first arithmetic processing device of the present invention.
In the present embodiment, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes start winning game storage means, prefetch command generation means, and pending number command generation means.
The inspection device connection terminal 102 is configured to include, for example, a photo coupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the gaming microcomputer 101 to the inspection device is connected.

In the game control apparatus 100, the first start opening switch 120 (the start opening 1SW in FIG. 4), the second start opening switch 121 (the start opening 2SW in FIG. 4), the gate switch 122, the winning opening switch 123, the count switch 124, Detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125, the vibration sensor switch 126, the glass frame open detection switch 211 (glass frame open detection SW), and the front frame open detection switch 212 (front frame open detection SW) are input.
Here, the first starting opening switch 120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls winning in the first starting winning opening 25, and the second starting opening switch 121 is the second starting winning opening It is a sensor for winning ball detection which detects the game ball which won 26 in one by one.
The count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball that has won a prize at the winning opening of the variable winning device 27. Further, the winning opening switches 123 are similar sensors provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning openings, n in total are provided one by one each. It should be noted that one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings instead of providing one sensor for each of the general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor for detecting the gaming balls passing through the common view starting gate 32 one by one.
The above sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124 for detecting these gaming balls are proximity switches in this example, and are circuits for outputting detection signals of negative logic such as high level 11V and low level 7V. It is configured.

Further, the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 are sensors provided on the back surface of the game board 20 or the like for detecting fraud by magnetism or vibration.
Furthermore, the glass frame open detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame open detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
In addition, although the proximity I / F which processes the signal from each said sensor 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126 is provided in the game control apparatus 100, the detail is later mentioned using FIG. Do.

Here, in the game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as later-described solenoids 132 and 133 driven by the game control apparatus 100, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 500 is Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 is a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V DC. Unit 501, a backup power supply unit 502 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 101 at the time of a power failure, a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence of power failure and recovery A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal, and a RAM clear switch 504 that initializes a RAM and the like inside the gaming microcomputer 101 are provided.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, It may be configured to be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 20 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, thus providing the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 on a substrate different from the power supply device 500 or the main substrate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost by eliminating the target of replacement at the time of model change.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 101 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal (in this example, turned on) And outputs a reset signal after a predetermined time. Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

The initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504, and the initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on, and the user in the gaming microcomputer 101 Information stored in a RAM area such as a work RAM and the like and a similar RAM area in the payout control device 200 is initialized.
In this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 and the payout microcomputer 201. The reset signal resets the entire control system.

Next, the game control device 100 includes a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a shooting test device 131 (connected at the time of a test in a test engine), a general power solenoid 132, a special winning opening solenoid 133 and a collective display device 35. It is connected.
From the game control apparatus 100, the unique ID of the game control apparatus 100 via the external information terminal board 55, more specifically, individual identification information (main board unique ID) capable of identifying the gaming microcomputer 101 and the external information are managed as an external device. It is output to the device 140.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control apparatus 100 by a cable, and relays the external information and the unique ID (main board unique ID) of the game control apparatus 100 to the management apparatus 140 as an external apparatus. .
The management device 140 collects information (for example, external information and the like) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in a game arcade, and performs processing such as calculation processing of information necessary for sales and total display.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal for notifying the signal input to the game control apparatus 100 to the outside, a big hit signal for notifying a big hit generated in the course of the game progress, a starting opening serving as a condition for rotating the symbol Starting opening signal to notify winning, symbol rotation number start, or symbol fixed number signal to notify symbol rotation by using symbol rotation stop as a trigger, that the gaming state is an advantageous state for the player (so-called positive change state , A bonus status signal indicating a time saving status, etc., which is a signal to be notified to the outside, and these are generically called a gaming machine status signal.
Note that the bonus status signal is a signal that is output during the "big hit status + player's preferred status" period since it occurs after the big hit status ends.
Further, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication. On the other hand, a payout abnormality status signal, a shoot ball out switch signal, and an overflow switch signal are output from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, the test shot testing device 131 and the like connected to the game control device 100 will be described.
The test shooting test device 131 is used by the accrediting organization to perform a test shooting test of a gaming machine. The general-purpose solenoid 132 is a solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing member of the second start winning opening 26, the large winning opening solenoid 133 is a solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing member of the variable winning device 27, and the collective display unit 35 is a so-called common view. The display of the special view and the display of the special view, the display of the start memory of the special view and the drawing, and the display of the game state are further performed.
In addition, data (for example, effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by parallel communication.
Here, in the game control device 100, when the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 respectively detect winnings on the starting openings 25 and 26 and a detection signal is input, the special figure starting winning number is 4 While storing in a range of these and holding it, a pre-reading command about holding information is generated by extracting a random number based on holding of the starting winning combination and transmitted to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing. In addition, when the memory of the start winning is held, a special figure hold number command related to the hold number is generated and similarly transmitted to the effect control device 300.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device
Start winning storage means for storing the number of start winnings based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening as the number of holdings within a predetermined range;
Prefetch command generation means for generating a prefetch command related to stored information by extracting a random number based on the storage when the start winning storage means stores the startup winning combination;
Hold number command generation means for generating a hold number command related to the hold number when the start winning memory means stores the start winning case;
A game machine characterized by comprising.

Further, in the first embodiment, since there are two starting openings (starting openings 25 and 26), two types of display of starting memory (special drawing starting memory) of the special drawing (special drawing 1 holding display and special drawing 2 holding display) The game is performed, and two types of variable display games (a first variable display game and a second variable display game) are executed as the special view variable display game. Then, the prefetch command and the number-of-holds command are separately generated based on the winning of the game balls to the starting openings 25 and 26, respectively. For example, it is individually generated corresponding to each starting port 25 and 26, such as the prefetch holding information of the special view 1, the prefetch holding information of the special view 2, and the pending number command of the special views 1 and 2.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
There are a plurality of start-up winning openings where game balls can be won,
The start winning storage means is
The number of start winnings based on the winning of each game ball to each of the plurality of starting winning openings is stored separately as holding 1 and holding 2,
The pre-read command generation unit
When the start winning storage means stores the respective start winnings corresponding to each of the plurality of start winning openings, by extracting random numbers based on the storage, a prefetch command concerning stored information is generated separately for each start winning opening ,
The pending number command generation unit
A game machine characterized by generating a number-of-holds command concerning number-of-holds 1 and number-of-holds 2 separately for each starting winning opening when the starting winning storing means stores each starting winning.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern command and the symbol command to be combined are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, but when the later symbol command is missed, the following control is performed. To be done.
That is, it is determined whether or not the time from the end of the previous symbol fluctuation to the current reception of the fluctuation pattern command is within a prescribed time (for example, one second) when the effect control device 300 receives the fluctuation pattern command sent earlier. If it is determined that the time from the end of the last symbol change to the current reception of the change pattern command is determined to be within the specified time, processing of starting the change of the symbol is performed even if the symbol command sent later is missed. If it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol fluctuation to the current reception of the fluctuation pattern command exceeds the prescribed time, processing for not starting the fluctuation of the symbol is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the special figure production which does not give the stress to the player as much as possible. When the stop command comes after that, the fluctuation stop or the stop continues and the next set of commands are transmitted to the production control device 300 normally. At the point of time (group is established), the correct rendering is performed based on the regular command information.

(Regarding effect control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, and a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41. A sound source LSI or the like that controls the output of various melodies, sound effects, etc. is included, but the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 analyzes a control command (8-bit data signal) from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect content, and controls the content of the output image of the display device 41. It instructs the reproduction sound to drive the speakers 12a and 12b to output sound effects and the like, and executes the processing such as the drive control of the decoration LED 301 described above. Also, upon receiving an instruction of error notification from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 outputs a signal to the error notification LED 302 to turn it on.
Here, in the command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control device 100 to the effect control device 300, in addition to the single command (for example, the stop command), the single effect does not start, and the effect is exhibited in combination For example, it is "variation pattern command + symbol designation command" at the start of the special figure fluctuation, and the details of the type of command will be described later.

In addition to the above, there is a probability information command to explain the main commands. This is a flag that is prepared corresponding to the probability fluctuation determination flag (see step S934 described later) and reflects the probability state at that time.
In addition, even if the effect control device 300 receives, for example, the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, the screen of the display device 41 does not immediately change with only that command, and the internal for displaying the screen Parameters are simply changed. Thereafter, when a command (such as a variable system or a customer waiting demo command) that changes the screen is received, it is reflected as a probability state at that time.
In addition, since it is decided that the big hit is low probability, there is also a case where the internal parameter is forcibly rewritten to low probability when the big hit system command is received without receiving the probability information command.
Examples of the information that can be found by the probability information command include the following.
・ “There is a low probability and time reduction (so-called 100 rotation time reduction”)
・ "There is a high probability, time is short (so-called in the process of change)"
・ "Low probability, no time saving"
Here, the "probability information" in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only "whether or not it is a probability change" but also information as to "whether it is time-saving or not". There are four types of gaming machine states: "low probability, no time saving", "low probability with time saving", "high probability with time saving", and "high probability without time saving". In the present embodiment, three types (except “high probability and no time reduction”) of the above are used, and are transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 at the timing when each state changes.
The command communication may be a parallel communication method or a serial communication method. In this embodiment, a parallel communication method is adopted as command communication.

(Payout control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 and the devices connected to the payout control device 200 will be described.
The payout control device 200 is a payout microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a payout microcomputer) 201 that controls the payout of a game ball (a prize ball payout or a rental ball payout), an error number display 202, an error release switch 203, and an inspection device. A connection terminal 204 is provided. Details of the payout microcomputer 201 will be described later.
The payout microcomputer 201 has a function as a payout arithmetic processing device (arithmetic processing device), and corresponds to a second arithmetic processing device of the present invention.
The inspection device connection terminal 204 is configured to include, for example, a photo coupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various information related to the payout obtained from the payout microcomputer 201 to the inspection device is connected. The error number indicator 202 lights up a specific number according to the content of the error when there is an error in the processing of the dispensing control. The error release switch 203 outputs a signal for releasing an error when it is operated, for example, when there is an error in the process of the dispensing control and the process is stopped.

The devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch 213, a radio wave detection sensor 214, a payout ball detection switch 215, and a chute ball disconnection switch 216.
The overflow switch 213 is a switch that detects that the gaming balls on the lower plate 10 are excessive, the radio wave detection sensor 214 is a sensor that detects abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and the payout ball detection switch 215 is a payout unit 53 (FIG. 3). A switch for detecting one game ball (a prize ball or a lent ball) to be paid out toward the upper tray 7, and a shoot ball out switch 216 detects that there is no game ball in the chute for supplying the game ball to the storage tank 51 It is a switch.

Further, as devices connected to the output side of the payout control device 200, there are a payout motor 222, a card unit connection board 54, a emission control device 400, and an external information terminal board 55.
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 of the payout unit 53 in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100, and performs control to pay out the winning balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 based on a BRQ signal (loan request signal) or the like from the card unit (CR unit) 551 connected to the card unit connection substrate 54 to dispense a rental ball. Control to make it happen.
In addition, an operation panel substrate 552 is connected to the card unit connection substrate 54, and the operation panel substrate 552 is provided with a ball lending LED provided on the pachinko machine 1, a balance display, a ball lending switch, and a return switch Not shown) and the like are connected. The operation panel substrate 552 receives signals from the card unit (CR unit) 551 such as a ball lendable LED and a balance indicator, and sends operation signals from the ball lend switch and return switch to the card unit (CR unit) 551 to lend The control necessary to pay out the ball is performed.
Although not shown, backup power is also supplied to the RAM area of the payout control device 200 from the power supply device 500 at the time of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 sends a winning ball signal (ball number information paid out as a winning ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device through the external information terminal board 55. While outputting, the unique ID of the payout control device 200, specifically, individual identification information (dispense unique ID) capable of identifying the payout microcomputer 201 is outputted to the management device 140 via the external information terminal board 55.
When the card unit 551 determines the legitimacy of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal board 55.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the payout control device 200 by a cable, and relays when transmitting the prize ball signal and the unique ID (payment unique ID) of the payout control device 200 to the management device 140 as an external device. .

  The launch control device 400 receives the supply of necessary power from the delivery control device 200 and receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device 400 controls a launch motor 401 that launches game balls according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and the launch control device 400 receives signals from the touch switch 402 and the launch stop switch 403. The touch switch 402 detects whether or not the player is touching the firing operation handle 11, and the firing stop switch 403 is for temporarily stopping the firing of the game ball, and is operated by the player It is.

Next, the detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus that controls the game in an integrated manner, corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically includes a circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control apparatus 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a game microcomputer (ie, a game microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port, an output unit 152 having an output port, etc. It comprises a data bus 153 connecting the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151 and the output unit 152, and the like.

The CPU unit 150 includes a gaming microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC), and an inverter for logically inverting a signal (start winning detection signal) from a proximity I / F 163 described later and inputting the signal to the gaming microcomputer 101. The circuit includes an inversion circuit 112, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit 113 that generates a clock serving as a reference of an operation clock or timer interrupt of a CPU and a random number generation circuit.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 101B, and a random access memory (RAM) 101C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 101B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 101C stores a working area of the CPU 101A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C.

The CPU 101A executes a game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and drive signals for the solenoids 72 and 73 and the collective display device 35 described later. The control of the entire pachinko machine 1 is performed.
In addition, although not shown, the microcomputer 101 for gaming uses a big hit random number for a special figure variation display game, a big hit random number for determining a big hit symbol, a random decision random number for a common figure variation display game, etc. And a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and an update timing of the random number generation circuit. And a clock generator for generating

Here, in the electronic components such as the game control apparatus 100 and later-described solenoids 72 and 73 driven by the game control apparatus 100, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 500 is Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 is a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V DC. A section 501 and a backup power supply section 502 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 101 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch notify the game control apparatus 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It includes a control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate substrate or with the game control device 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. However, since the game board 20 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are thus mounted on a board different from the power supply 500 or the main board. By providing it, it can be removed from the target of replacement at the time of model change, and the cost can be reduced.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 101 (particularly the built-in RAM 101C) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 501 and changes the power failure monitoring signal (for example, turns on) as detecting the occurrence of a power failure if it falls below 17 V, for example. At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) is turned on, and is stored in the RAM 101C in the gaming microcomputer 101 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Force initialization. In the case of this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101. The reset signal resets the entire control system.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control apparatus 100 is provided with a first input port 161 and a second input port 162 as input ports. The input unit 151 includes a first start port switch 120, a second start port switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, a magnetic sensor switch 125, a vibration sensor switch 126, and a glass frame open detection switch 127. A detection signal from the front frame open detection switch 128 is input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts detection signals input from the switches 120 to 124 into positive logic signals of 0V-5V. In the proximity I / F 163, when the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the proximity switches (the above switches 120 to 124) are incorrectly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wires are An abnormal state as disconnected and floating can be detected, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. The proximity I / F 163 is also supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC in order to enable the above signal level conversion function. ing.

Here, all outputs (except the abnormality detection signal) of the proximity I / F 163 are supplied to the second input port 162 and read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153, and relayed from the gaming control apparatus 100 as a main board. It is supplied to the test injection test apparatus 131 via the substrate 170.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, detection signals of the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 are inputted to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the reversing circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 162. Is configured as. The inverting circuit 112 is provided on the assumption that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input to the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 and negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) is detected as an effective level. Because it is designed to

  Further, detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 are also input to the second input port 162. The data held by the second input port 162 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 101 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 162 You can (like any other port). The enable signal of the first input port 161 is CE2.

  On the other hand, signals from the glass frame open detection switch 127 and the front frame open detection switch 128 and signals from the payout control device 200 are input to the first input port 161. These signals are supplied from the first input port 161 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. Signals from the payout control device 200 include a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a chute ball disconnection switch signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the gaming balls have been stored in the lower tray 10 by a predetermined amount or more (that the game balls are full).

  Further, the input unit 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 164 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 500 to the gaming microcomputer 101 etc. 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Among the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are temporarily input to the first input port 161 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise is removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101, and each port of the output unit 152 (ports 171, 172, 175, 176, 177). Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 170 without passing through the output unit 152, thereby turning off the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for outputting to the test injection test device. Is configured as.
In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be able to be output to the test shot testing apparatus via the relay substrate 170. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input ports 161 and 162 of the input unit 151. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 immediately before the reset signal RST is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 151 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 101 is reset.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 sets the first port 171, the second port 172, the third port 175, the fourth port 176, and the fifth port 177 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. Prepare. Note that data is transmitted from the skill control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by parallel communication via the ports 171 and 172.
The first port 171 is a 4-bit data signal (for example, a prize ball payout command or data) output to the payout control device 200, a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data signal, and a buffer A data strobe signal SSTB to be output to the effect control device 300 via 173 is generated.
The second port 172 generates an 8-bit data signal to be output to the effect control device 300.
Note that the buffer 173 can not input signals from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100, that is, in order to secure one-way communication, the data strobe signal SSTB from the first port 171 and the It is a unidirectional buffer that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the 2 port 172. A similar buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first port 171 to the payout control device 200.

The third port 175 opens and closes data of a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 72 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 and opening and closing data of a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 73 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 26a of the second start winning opening 26. These are output ports for outputting on / off data of digit lines to which cathode terminals of LEDs of the batch display device 35 are connected.
The fourth port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the batch display device 35.
The fifth port 177 is an output port for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4). The information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collecting terminal installed in a game arcade or the management device 140. In addition, the external information terminal board 55 has a built-in photo relay 55a, and through this photo relay 55a, the external information, the unique ID (main board unique ID) of the game control apparatus 100, the unique ID of the payout control apparatus 200 ( The payout unique ID) is transmitted to the management device 140 as an external device. It should be noted that since there is a polarity in the photocoupler, it is necessary to be careful about the connection, but using the photorelay 55a as described above has the advantage that the polarity becomes unnecessary and it is convenient.
When the card unit 551 determines the legitimacy of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal board 55.

  The output unit 152 outputs data indicating special design information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) connected to the data bus 153 and a signal indicating the probability of a big hit through the relay board 170. The buffer 174 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 174 is a component not mounted on the game control apparatus 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as the start port SW, which is output from the proximity I / F 163, is supplied to the direct shot test apparatus through the relay substrate 170 without passing through the buffer 174.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information. The error signal indicating that it can not be controlled is supplied from the data bus 153 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay substrate 170. Note that the relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a plurality of drive circuits (a first driver 178 a to a fourth driver 178 d). The first driver 178a receives open / close data signals of the special winning opening solenoid 72 and the common electric solenoid 73 output from the third port 175, and generates and outputs respective solenoid drive signals. The second driver 178 b outputs an on / off driving signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 35 output from the third port 175. The third driver 178 c outputs an on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 35 output from the fourth port 176. The fourth driver 178 d outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth port 177 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

  Note that DC 32 V is supplied from the power supply device 500 as the power supply voltage to the first driver 178 a so that the solenoids 72 and 73 operating at 32 V can be driven. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the third driver 178 c that drives the segment line. Further, since the second driver 178b for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V. In the collective display unit 35, a current flows into the anode terminal of a predetermined LED via the segment line by the third driver 178c outputting 12 V, and the cathode terminal of the predetermined LED by the second driver 178b outputting the ground potential. When the current is drawn through the segment line from the power supply voltage, the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and the predetermined LED is lit. Also, the fourth driver 178 d is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal.

  Furthermore, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 180. The photocoupler 179 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can exchange data with the inspection device 180 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no port such as the input port 161 or 162 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 constitutes communication means, effect control means, effect frequency counting means, and execution determination means.
The effect control device 300 is an image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 consisting of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 101 and commands from the 1st CPU 311 And a sound source LSI 313 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects and the like from the speakers 12a and 12b.
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) for exclusively performing video control under the control of the 1st CPU 311 is disposed, including two CPUs, and VDP is a command from the 2nd CPU 312 Although the image processing for displaying the image on the display device 41 may be performed according to the data or the data, in the present embodiment, only the high-performance 1st CPU 311 is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost.
A configuration may be adopted in which two main control microcomputers (1st CPU) and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) that exclusively performs video control under the control of the 1st CPU are disposed.

The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 is connected to a PROM (programmable read only memory) 321 storing a program to be executed by the CPU and an RTC (real time clock) 325, and to a VDP 312.
The RTC 325 is a clock element for clocking time and can be adjusted to the actual time by setting, and the clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses a signal from the RTC 325, for example, It is possible to control effects such as event announcements and special effects of game arcades regarding time.
On the other hand, an image ROM 322 storing character images and video data is connected to the VDP 312, and an audio ROM 323 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 313. In the image ROM 322, a plurality of moving pictures (movies) are stored as video data.
The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a control command (an 8-bit data signal outputted from the second port 172) from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control apparatus 100, determines the contents of the effect, and displays The contents of the output video are instructed, the reproduction sound instruction to the sound source LSI 313, and the processes such as the drive control of the decoration devices 42 and 43 and the rendering devices 44 and 45 described above are executed.

For example, when the variable display game is executed, a command (for example, a change pattern command to be described later) including data of a combination of stop symbols (result mode) and data of a reach system (or change time) from the game control device 100 The main control microcomputer 311 receives this and selects a variation mode that satisfies the stop mode and the variation time, and the display device 41 is selected via the VDP 312. The special figure variation display game is controlled such that a predetermined special figure is variably displayed and finally a combination of specific symbols (resulting aspect) is derived and displayed.
In addition, although an aspect such as a variation display of a special figure that is actually implemented under the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by a command from the game control device 100, the condition of the condition given by the command In the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 finally selects an aspect by random number extraction or the like (a configuration in which the effect control device 300 selects an aspect, given a certain degree of discretion) There is.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the pseudo random number is updated at least once at each control cycle of the main process using the rand function, and the random number seed value is updated each time the rand function is recalculated. The random number is generated based on the generation sequence designated by the seed value.

Here, a RAM 311 a for providing a work area of the main control microcomputer 311 is provided inside the chip. The RAM 311a for providing a work area may be provided outside the chip.
Although not particularly limited, data transmission / reception is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 by serial method, and data between the main control microcomputer 311 and VDP 312 is parallel data. Transmission and reception are performed. In general, by transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.
The VDP 312 includes an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 312a used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing an image. A signal conversion circuit 312 c for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in a low amplitude signal transmission (LVDS) system is provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20. Furthermore, the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT for notifying is input. Further, between the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313, an interrogation (call) signal CTS and a response (response) signal RTS are exchanged in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

Also, an interface chip (command I / F) for receiving a command (an 8-bit data signal output from the second port 172) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control device 100 to the effect control device 300 ) 331 is provided. The control command from the above-mentioned gaming microcomputer 101, such as a decoration special drawing reservation number command, a special drawing type / pattern information command, a fluctuation pattern random number command, a customer waiting demo command, a fluctuation pattern command, and the like via this command I / F 331 The main control microcomputer 311 receives a fanfare command and the like.
The command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control apparatus 100 is stored in the RAM 311a which is built in the main control microcomputer 311 and provides a work area as necessary.
In this case, the command is stored in an area such as the command storage area of the RAM 311a. Specifically, in the case where, of the commands sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, for example, a variation pattern command and a symbol command as a set are sequentially sent, these commands are command storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 311a. The main control microcomputer 311 executes effect processing by being read from the command storage area when a set is established. The command storage area may be divided into a first command storage area and a second command storage area.
In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command sent earlier is received, the effect control device 300 sets the storage area related to the effect of the RAM 311a of the main control microcomputer 311 to a default value (for example, the symbol stop state at the off symbol). Is supposed to be done.
The above-mentioned “storage area for effect” is an area for setting a default value, which is separate from the command storage area.

In addition, in order to receive and analyze commands transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the RAM 311a which is incorporated in the main control microcomputer 311 and provides a work area has a reception command buffer (described below If necessary, a reception buffer may be briefly described) and an analysis data storage area.
The reception buffer stores reception commands in order, and a ring buffer type is used.
Here, the ring buffer is an area for temporarily storing data controlled so that a certain memory area looks like a ring-shaped memory area, and by using such a ring buffer, It is possible to separately perform the transmission process and the reception process, and is also effective for preventing the data from being missed and avoiding the traffic jam of the command reception process.
On the other hand, in the analysis data storage area, among the commands stored in the reception buffer, a predetermined number of commands are stored by copying, and the first-in-first-out (FIFO (first-in-first-out)) type is used to perform first-in first-out processing. It is done.
Here, FIFO is one of methods related to storage and retrieval of data, and is a method (first-in first-out) in which data stored first is retrieved first.
The use of the FIFO is advantageous in that high-speed communication processing can be performed, and communication and data reading can be performed asynchronously.
The reception command buffer corresponds to reception buffer means, and the analysis data storage area corresponds to analysis data storage means.
Since the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the LEDs of the above-mentioned panel decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls the above-mentioned frame decoration device 43, and A panel effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 that drives and controls the motors and solenoids of the rendering device 44, and a frame effect motor control circuit 335 that drives and controls the motors of the frame effect device 45 described above (for example, a motor that operates the moving light 14). Is provided. The control circuits 332 to 335 are connected to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via the address / data bus 340. Note that a light emission source other than the LED may be used as a light emission source of the panel decoration device 42 or the frame decoration device 43.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, the effect button SW 46 built in the effect button 9 provided in the glass frame 5 and the on / off state of the effect motor SW 47 for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44. To the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and an amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 12a provided on the glass frame 5 and the operation panel 6 An amplifier circuit 337b for driving the provided lower speaker 12b is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a direct current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel and DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, the DC18V for driving the LED and the speakers 12a and 12b described above and their DC voltages It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24 V, which is used to light the power supply monitor lamp. Furthermore, when using an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311, to generate 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. The DC-DC converter of FIG. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312, sound source LSI 313, the above control circuits 332 to 335, and amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, and these are reset Make it Further, in this embodiment, the general control port of the main control microcomputer 311 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 312. Thus, the cooperation between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is provided with the wireless module 360, and the wireless module 360 is configured by the CPU 360a, the ROM 360b, and the RAM 360c. The wireless module 360 is supplied with predetermined power from the power supply device 500.
The wireless module 360 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311, and wireless communication (inter-sub communication described later) between its own game machine (pachinko machine 1) and another game machine 370 in accordance with an instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 Communicate information about the status of each other's gaming machines, control transmission and exchange of images and characters, etc., and synchronize images or characters related to each other on the display device of each gaming machine. Display while synchronizing. The CPU 360a performs processing such as control of wireless communication and transmission of images and characters, the ROM 360b stores a program executed by the CPU 360a, and the RAM 360c is used as a work area.
The wireless module 360 corresponds to communication means.

The setting switch 371 is disposed on a gaming machine number (for example, one gaming island) different for each gaming machine so that the gaming machine of the transmission source and the transmission destination can be specified when exchanging data among a plurality of gaming machines. If there are ten gaming machines, it is possible to operate No. 1 to 10 (if it is n, n) from the left by the attendant of the gaming shop. For example, the setting switch is to display the same image or character on all the gaming machines arranged on the island by the inter-sub communication described above, or to display the image or character having a mutual relationship in synchronization or in synchronization. It becomes possible by the operation of 371. In addition, by using the gaming machine number described above, it is possible to perform the effect only between two specific gaming machines.
The gaming machine number may be defined based on, for example, the unique ID set in the wireless module, but in this case, since the value of the unique ID of the wireless module is almost random, the arrangement of gaming machines is specified If it is difficult to play, and you want to perform effects such as group notices flowing sequentially from the gaming machine on the left end of the island, a gaming machine or management device serving as a master for managing location information of each gaming machine Needs to be provided, which takes time and effort.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the presentation stand can be specified and effects can be performed by the manual setting by the setting switch 371 that can simply identify the gaming machines on the island in order. It is also easy to control.
Further, as the application of the setting switch 371, the control contents of the wireless module 360 may be mode set in a plurality of stages instead of the location information setting, and may be switched and selected in accordance with the sales form of the game arcade.

  In the case of this example, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board. Then, as described above, the effect control device 300 (sub control board) that controls the display device 41 controls speakers, lamps, movable parts for decoration, and the like, and the game control device 100 will be described later. The main board indirectly controls the movable portion and the like by sending control commands to the sub control board. For this reason, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same regardless of the model, and by installing the game program for each model in the gaming machine microcomputer 101, the main board is technically modelized. And even if different brands can be shared.

Next, the configuration of a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The VDP 312 includes a CPU I / F 601, a data transfer circuit 602, a CG bus I / F 603, a compressed data decompression circuit 604, a drawing circuit 605, a first VRAM 606, a second VRAM 607, and a display circuit 608. Necessary circuits are connected via 611.
The VDP 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 via the CPU I / F 601 and to the image ROM 322 via the CG bus I / F 603. Then, the VDP 312 basically generates image data for each frame to be displayed on the display device 41 according to an instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, and outputs the image data to the display circuit 608 display device 42. The first VRAM 606 is mainly used as a RAM for a frame buffer, specifically, for example, a RAM for a frame buffer and a Z buffer (in the case of three dimensions, an amount in the Z-axis direction). On the other hand, the second VRAM 607 is mainly used as a drawing material RAM for storing material data.

The data of the image ROM 322 is stored in the second VRAM 607 via the CG bus I / F 603. The compressed data is expanded by the compressed data expansion circuit 604, stored in the second VRAM 607, and also stored in the first VRAM 606 as necessary.
The drawing circuit 605 mainly processes the drawing material stored in the second VRAM 607 (for example, processes such as various effects, enlargement, reduction, etc.), and also displays the display position and order (for example, from the far side of the screen to the near side) Control the display order of the image data, etc.), create image data of one frame, and store it in the first VRAM 606.

The display circuit 608 includes a scaler 608 a and an LVDS I / F 608 b.
Then, the display circuit 608 outputs the RGB data to the display device 41 with the signal level of the LVDS specification at the setting timing of the interlace mode or the non-interlace mode, with the image data of one frame stored in the first VRAM 606. Note that the display area of the image data can be enlarged and displayed (for example, VGA → XGA) by the scaler 608 a. For example, in the case of VGA, the image size is 640 × 480, and in the case of XGA, the image size is 1024 × 768.
The data transfer circuit 602 has a data transfer function between the main control microcomputer 311 and the first VRAM 606, between the main control microcomputer 311 and the drawing circuit 605, between the CG bus I / F 603 and the first VRAM 606, and the like.

E. Outline of Game Next, the outline of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and the flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), a customer wait state (during demo) is set, and a command instructing display of a customer wait screen is a buffer of the game control apparatus 100 (for example, similar The function is transmitted from the buffer 173 to the effect control device 300 in FIG. 5, and the customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device.

  Then, when the game ball driven into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21 wins the special prize start winning opening 25 or 26 (that is, when there is a special figure start prize), the special figure variation display A command to instruct the game control device 100 is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a display (a so-called change display) in which a special figure (one consisting of numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) ) Is performed, and a special view variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a special view change display game) is performed.

And if the stop result mode of this variable display game (combination of special figures derived from the variable display) is a special result mode (for example, Zoromes such as "3, 3, 3"), a bonus called a big hit is It is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored under the condition that there is a start winning, and the extracted and stored random number value and a preset determination value are compared and determined at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, it is determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit, and the above-mentioned variable display game is started according to this determination.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode (for example, Zoro eyes of "7, 7, 7") among the special result modes, the jackpot becomes the big hit and after the big hit game The game state shifts from the normal mode to the positive change mode (after a special award period described later). In this definite variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the big shot probability of the special figure). Also, in some cases, so-called time-saving (to shorten the variable display time of a special figure or the like to make the frequency of the variable display game more likely to hit) may be performed.

  When the jackpot becomes the big hit and shifts to the big hit state, the big winning opening of the variable winning device 27 goes through a specified time (for example, a period during which a fanfare period (a period for outputting a sound effect for producing a big hit, etc.)) Within a range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, a release operation (jackpot round) which is temporarily opened only for a period of up to 10 wins. Then, this release operation is repeated for a prescribed number of rounds. In addition, in this big hit state, a command for instructing the display of a big hit screen for producing a big hit state or notifying the player of a big hit round number etc. is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the production control apparatus 300, and the display unit In 41a, such a big hit display is performed.

In addition, the period (the fanfare period, the period of the big hit round where the big winning opening is opened, the interval period between the big hit round and the next big hit round, the ending period) during this big hit state is the special prize period It corresponds to
Also, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, 15 round big hit is usually the big hit of the main, but it may be configured to generate the 16R big hit as the premier, or any other configuration. Also, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as so-called suddenness (a sudden positive change in which the probability of big hit changes via a big hit with few balls out).

In addition, when the game ball is further awarded to the start winning hole 25 or 26 during the variable display game or the big hit of the special view, the display of the start memory of the special view is performed on the display portion 41a etc. After the variable display game or the big hit state is finished, the variable display game of the above-mentioned special figure is repeated or returns to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, it shifts to a big hit state, and if the variable display game ends with release and start memory is stored, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with release without start memory For example, the game returns to the customer waiting state, and if the big hit is finished and the starting memory is stored, the variable display game is executed again, and if the big hit is ended and the starting memory is not stored, it returns to the customer waiting state.

In the present embodiment, for example, two types of display of special drawing start storage (special drawing start storage) are performed (special drawing 1 suspension display and special drawing 2 suspension display), and two types of special drawing variation display games are performed. The variable display game (first variable display game and second variable display game) is executed. That is, when the special figure start winning (first start winning) occurs when the gaming ball enters the first starting winning opening 25, a first variation display game is performed by the variation display of the special figure 1 on the display device 41. Then, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special view variation display game or the like, one first start storage (start storage corresponding to the special view 1 suspension display) is stored, On the other hand, after the end of the special figure variation display game, the first variation display game is performed by the variation display of the special figure 1 on the display device 41.
In addition, when there is a special drawing start winning (second starting winning) by the game ball entering the second starting winning opening 26, the second fluctuation display game by the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is played on the display device 41. Then, when the gaming ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any special view variation display game or the like, one second start storage (start storage corresponding to the special view 2 suspension display) is stored, On the other hand, the second variation display game is performed by the variation display of the special view 2 on the display device 41 after the end of the special view variation display game or the like.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is executed first according to a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is played preferentially (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially digested), or two types of variable display games alternate. There may be an aspect to be performed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the common drawing start gate 32 during the game, a fluctuation display game of common drawing by the variable display of the common drawing (hereinafter referred to as a common drawing fluctuation display game) is performed on the display unit 41a etc. . Then, if the common drawing variation display game result (stopped common drawing) is a predetermined mode (specific display manner), a benefit called per common drawing is granted.
When it comes to this common drawing, a game is performed in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 is temporarily held in the reverse C shape for a predetermined opening time. As a result, it becomes easy for the game ball to get a start winning, and accordingly, the number of times the variable display game of the special figure is performed increases and the possibility of becoming a big hit increases.
Further, when the game ball is further awarded to the common drawing start gate 32 during the variable display game of the common drawing, the batch display device 35 executes the hold display of the common drawing start memory, and for example, up to four are stored. After the end of the variable display game of the common drawing, the variable display game of the common drawing is repeated based on the memory.

Next, the external output of the unique ID will be briefly described. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the system is reset, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 (for example, stored in the HW parameter ROM) is read Serial communication type (or parallel communication type) may be made by the operation of the game program, relayed by the external information terminal board 55, and transmitted to the external management apparatus 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included) . This makes it possible to send the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 to the gaming shop side.
Also, the unique ID is transferred to the outside (here, the inspection device connection terminal 102 in FIG. 4) in response to an external request. Then, for example, by connecting the inspection device to the inspection device connection terminal 102, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 is read out by the inspection organization.
On the other hand, the payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) capable of identifying the payout microcomputer 201 of the payout control device 200 is converted into a serial communication format (or may be a parallel communication format) by the operation of the payout program in the payout control device 200. It is relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management apparatus 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). As a result, the payout unique ID stored in the payout microcomputer 201 can be sent to the game store side.

Next, the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be briefly described. When executing the variable display game, the data of the combination (resulting aspect) of the stop symbols from the game control device 100 and reach are A command (for example, a fluctuation pattern command described later) including data of a system (or fluctuation time) is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 selects the fluctuation mode satisfying the stop mode and the fluctuation time. The control of the special view variation display game is performed in which a predetermined special figure is variably displayed on the display device 41 and a combination (result mode) of a specific symbol is finally derived and displayed.
In this case, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is a command that does not start the effect by itself and exerts the effect in a group. There is a symbol specification command. In addition, there is also a command (for example, a customer wait command) that exerts an effect alone, and many commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 for effect.

When a sub-interlocking notification system command is simultaneously transmitted from one gaming machine (notice executing gaming machine) in the same group of sub-sub communication to another gaming machine as a sub-interference notice command, the inter-sub interlocking notification system command In the case of the content instructing the execution of the aspect A, in other gaming machines, the execution probability with respect to the notice aspect A in the past regarding the presence or absence of the execution of the notice between sub based on the execution probability of the notice aspect A set in each platform. Based on a random number based on random numbers. Then, when it is determined to execute, by inserting a notice mode A (for example, a tiger character) in the midst of the effect of another gaming machine and displaying it repeatedly, the effect of the gaming machine (notice execution gaming machine) and Synchronization takes place.
In addition, in a gaming machine that has performed an effect based on an inter-subset interlocking notification system command instructed from a gaming machine (preliminary execution gaming machine) in the same group of sub-sub communication, the number of executions of the next notice mode A is Update by +1 and prepare for the next inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command.

In this case, in the other gaming machines that have received the inter-subset interlocking notification system command, the presence or absence of the execution of the inter-subsectoral notice is determined by lottery using random numbers based on the execution probability for the previous notice mode A set in each platform. Since it is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the announcement of the inter-announcement notice by the instruction from the other units, and it is possible to cause the appearance of the announcement of the inter-subscription announcement at an appropriate frequency.
That is, in accordance with the number of times of execution of the sub-intermediate announcement effect performed in the past, the number of executions of the inter-interval advance announcement effect can be appropriately limited.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid losing the reliability of the advance notice and the like, and it is possible to eliminate the possibility of lowering the interest of the game.

F. Operation of Control System Next, control contents of the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
First of all, it is as follows if the concept of the main composition used for explanation of the following flow charts is clarified.
As described above, the special display and the general drawing are displayed on the collective display unit 35. The special drawing in the following description of the control processing means this special drawing (this special drawing), so it will be described in detail on the premise of the above. Note that the special view controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the command from the game control device 100 is a special view for effect displayed on the display device 41.
(A) Display Device of Special Drawing In the case of referring to the special drawing in the following flow chart, this refers to the "this special drawing" displayed on the collective display device 35. In addition, when referring to a dummy display for effect for a player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decorative special drawing".
The device that displays the special drawing in this way is the collective display device 35, but as the name of the area in the collective display device 35 to display this special drawing, there are, for example, special symbol display devices and special drawing display devices It may be called a special symbol display device in order to distinguish it from a common drawing display device.
(B) Display Device of Common Diagram In the case of the common flowchart in the following flow chart, it refers to the "general broadcast" displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, in the case of pointing to a dummy display for effect for a player displayed on the display device 41, for example, it is referred to as "decoral drawing".
The device that displays the common drawing in this way is the collective display device 35, but as the name of the area in the collective display device 35 to display the general drawing, there are, for example, ordinary symbol display devices and common drawing display devices In order to distinguish with a special figure display device, it may be called an ordinary symbol display device.
However, in the present embodiment, such a display of a common drawing is not displayed on the display device 41. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays a common drawing (here decoration common drawing) display. In the description of the gaming machine, the apparatus may be described including a device for displaying a "demonstration drawing" if necessary.
(C) Universal Power Device The device corresponding to Universal Power is the second start winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric power part (normal power).
However, there are cases where a common electric power station is referred to as a normal fluctuation winning device, and in the description of the flowchart, for example, it may be particularly referred to as an ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 26).
In addition, for example, at the time of high probability or time, etc., the start winning support is performed by the opening and closing member 26a of the second start winning opening 26 as the ordinary electric role (general power) open. It may be simply referred to as Puden Support.
(D) Special map storage In the following flowchart, special map storage (sometimes simply referred to as "pending"), special map storage, or startup of a special map is referred to as "this special display displayed on batch display device 35. "Point to figure memory". In addition, when referring to a dummy display for effect for a player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decoration of special drawing" or "storage of special drawing".
The winning openings that function as the start winning openings of the special drawing are the starting winning openings 25 and 26.
(E) General-Pipe Memory In the case of referring to the general-diagram holding, the general drawing memory, or the general drawing start-up memory in the following flow chart, this indicates the "general general drawing memory" displayed on the collective display device 35. In addition, when referring to the dummy display for effect for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decorative display of drawing" or "memory of decorative drawing".
However, in the present embodiment, the display 41 does not display the start storage display of such a common drawing. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays starting memory (here decoration common drawing memory) display of common drawing. In the description of the gaming machine, the apparatus may be described including a device for displaying "memory of decoration drawing" if necessary.
(F) Fluctuation winning device The fluctuation winning device 27 is a device having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 27b (a so-called attacker). The fluctuation winning device 27 may be called a special fluctuation winning device to distinguish it from the normal fluctuation winning device.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, main processing of the game control apparatus 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main processing is started based on that the gaming microcomputer 101 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 resets the game control device 100 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period at power on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. Also at the time of power recovery from a power failure, the reset signal is similarly turned on and then released, and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. In addition, when the operator intends to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control apparatus 100, the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 500 is turned on. There is a need.

Then, when the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, a process (step S1) for prohibiting an interrupt is performed first, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step S2) for setting a vector address of a jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs Stack pointer setting processing (step S3) to set the stack pointer which is the start address of the area to save the value of the register etc. when the event occurs (step S3) .
Next, in step S5, the process is stopped for a predetermined delay time (for example, 4 msec) in order to wait for the program of the payout substrate (delivery control device 200) to be normally activated. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, and the payout control device 200 avoids dropping the command. be able to.

When the delay time has elapsed, after the access of RWM (read / write memory) is permitted, the off signal (a signal corresponding to “0” of the binary signal: set to no output) is output to all output ports. (Steps S6 and S7).
Here, in the present embodiment, RWM refers to the RAM 101C, but the present invention is not limited to the RAM, and may be used as the RWM including a readable / writable storage element such as an EEPROM.
In addition, since each output port is set to be off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S7 is provided here just in case. .
Then, in step S8, a serial port ((a port installed in advance in the gaming microcomputer 101) is not used in this embodiment because parallel communication is performed with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300)) Perform processing to set it to not.
Here, setting the serial port not to be used is to use this serial port when outputting the unique ID to the outside (for example, the management apparatus 140), so that it is temporarily not used here It is. In addition, since it may be necessary to perform serial communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, in this case, the serial port is set to be used in step S8.

Next, it is determined whether the initialization switch in the power supply device 500 is on (step S9). This is to determine whether or not the initialization switch is on according to the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is on, the process proceeds to step S25, and if it is not on, the process proceeds to step S10.
When the initialization switch is turned on to start the gaming microcomputer 101, the process proceeds to step S25, in which the blackout inspection area 1 and the blackout inspection area 2 of the RWM are all performed in step S11 and step S13 described later. This is the case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal, or the case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S16 described later. Therefore, in step S25, processing such as initializing data in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 (except for the access prohibited area) is performed.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S10, and it is checked whether the value of blackout inspection area 1 of RWM is normal interruption inspection area check data 1, and if the check result is not normal in step S11. If it judges, it will jump to step S25. On the other hand, if the check result in step S11 is normal, it is checked in step S12 whether the value of the blackout inspection area 2 of the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data 2 or not. If the check result is not normal at step S13, the process jumps to step S25. If the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S14.
As described above, when all the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are normal, it is determined that the power failure is restored, and the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if not normally stored), the process jumps to step S25, assuming that the power is normally on.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in step S25 described later. In these steps S10 and S12, it is determined whether or not a power failure recovery is in progress based on a plurality of check data 1 and 2 as described above. Therefore, the determination as to whether or not a power failure recovery is in progress can be made with high reliability.

Next, in step S14, the checksum of the data of RWM is calculated, and in step S15, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power shutoff to determine whether the value is normal (matched) (step S16). If the checksum is not normal (that is, if the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S25. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S17.
In step S17, all power failure inspection areas are cleared, in step S18, the checksum area is cleared, and in step S19, the areas relating to error and fraud monitoring are reset. In this way, the process (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is performed.

Next, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the gaming state is in the high probability state (step S20). Here, when it is determined that the probability is not high (step S20; NO), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.
If it is determined in step S20 that there is a high probability (step S20; YES), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area in step S21, and the high probability provided in, for example, the collective display device 35 in step S22. The on data of the notification LED (not shown) is saved in the segment area. As a result, the process corresponding to the current high probability state is performed, and for example, the high probability notification LED provided on the batch display device 35 is turned on to display a notification of the high probability state.
Next, in step S23, a command (power failure recovery command) at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special map game processing number is transmitted. After this step S23, the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, or S16 to step S25, first, all work areas before the access prohibited area in the RWM used by the CPU are cleared (step S25), The entire work area after the access prohibited area is cleared (step S26), and the initial value at power on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). Then, the output timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) of the external information (security signal) related to RWM clear is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S28). Further, processing for transmitting a command at the time of power on (power on command) to the effect control device 300 is performed (step S29).
When the power on command is transmitted, the other control device receives this power on command, and, for example, in the case of the effect control device 300, performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the frame effect device to the initial position. , An effect to notify that RWM clear has been made. After step S29, the process proceeds to step S24.

Now, when the process proceeds from step S23 or step S29 to step S24, in step S24, CTC (Counter / Timer) generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 101 (clock generator). Circuit) Performs processing to activate a circuit.
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator has a divider circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process of step S24, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S30). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 101A. Then, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) Save as an initial value (start value) of a random number (performing random number) for determining a hit of a common drawing in a predetermined area of RWM (step S31).
The random number generation circuit generates a part of the random numbers of the special drawing and the common drawing in hardware. However, the initial values of these random numbers are set as software by the process of step S33 described later. The random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers (start value By doing this, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.
In addition, as a random number related to the special figure, big hit random number (random number for deciding whether or not to be big hit), big hit symbol random number 1 and 2 (random number for big hit stop symbol determination), fluctuation pattern random number (Li's There are a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including presence or absence etc., a stop symbol random number (random number for determination of a stop symbol of deviation), and the like. Further, as a random number related to the common drawing, for example, there is a random number per common drawing (random number for determining whether or not to be common drawing). Among them, the random numbers (hard random numbers) targeted in steps S30 and S33 are, for example, a big hit random number, a random number per block, and a big hit symbol random number 1 and 2. In addition, when there are two types of special views, the random numbers relating to the special views may be common to the special views 1 and 2 or may be separately provided.

Then, in step S32, an interrupt is permitted, and in the next step S33, an initial value random number update process is performed. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the initial value of the hard random number so that it is difficult to intentionally aim for a big hit etc. by measuring the timing of firing the gaming ball. This is for breaking the regularity of random numbers by updating the values of various initial value random numbers.
In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing in the above-described step S33. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt as in this embodiment. There is no problem in releasing the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed, but only in the main process, and the main process is simplified accordingly. It has the advantage of being
Next, in step S34, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, twice) is set, and it is determined in the next step S35 whether the power failure monitoring signal is on or not. The process proceeds to step S36, and if not turned on, the process returns to step S33. Steps S33 to S35 are repeated during normal operation.

Then, in step S36, it is determined whether or not the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues by the number of checks, and it is finally determined that the power failure occurs if the determination result is affirmative, and the procedure proceeds to step S37. If the result is negative, the process returns to step S35 because it can not be determined that a power failure has occurred.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S37. However, in the configuration of this example, since the on state of the power failure monitoring signal is checked a plurality of times in step S36, the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and instantaneously turned on due to noise or the like although power failure does not actually occur. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not misjudged as the occurrence of a power failure.

Then, in step S37, the interrupt is inhibited, and all outputs are turned off in the next step S38 (off data is output to all output ports), and then power failure information setting processing is executed in steps S39 and S40. Do. In the power failure information setting process, the aforementioned power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 in step S39, and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 in step S40.
After passing through step S40, in step S41, a process is performed to calculate a checksum at the time of power shutoff of RWM, and then the checksum calculated in step S42 is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Next, after prohibiting the access to the RWM in step S43, the process waits (the reset waiting state for waiting for the reset signal from the control signal generation unit 503 described above).
As described above, by saving check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be determined when the power is turned on again.
The above-described power failure process in steps S37 to S43 is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (step S41) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step S51, the start address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address, and at step S52, the number of repetitions is set. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of RWM being used. Next, in step S53, "0" is set as the calculated value, and in step S54, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculated address is updated by "+1", and in step S56, the repeat number is updated by "-1" to check whether the calculation is completed or not. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the determination result of step S57 is NO, the process returns to step S54 and the routine is repeated. Then, when the number of repetitions = the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, the process exits from step S57 to YES and the routine is ended.
In this way, calculation of the checksum at the time of power shutoff of the RWM is performed.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
Next, the initial value random number updating process (step S33) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial random number per hit (step S61), the process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial initial random number 1 (step S62) A process (step S63) of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial value random number 2 is sequentially performed.
Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number 1" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1, and is updated in the range of 0 to 200. The "big hit symbol initial value random number 2" is an initial value random number of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 2, and is updated in the range of 0 to 200. is there. In addition, “the initial hit random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the common drawing change game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. is there. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control apparatus 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
The timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S24 and S32 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle.

In this timer interrupt process, first, at step S71, the saving of the register and the inhibition of the interrupt are executed as necessary. In the register save, for example, a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register to the RWM is performed. In the Z80-based microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the process can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.
Next, in step S72, an input process is performed. In this input process, the detection signal of each of the above-mentioned sensors (starting opening switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning opening switch 123, count switch 124, etc.) is read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined every timer interrupt cycle, and when the output value of the same level continues more than the prescribed number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor Read as a definite value of the signal. When it is read that one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is turned on.

Next, in step S73, an output process of setting and outputting the output data set in each step to be described later to the corresponding output port is executed, and then in step S74, each set control device (effect control device 300, A process (command transmission process) of transmitting a signal (command) to the payout control device 200) is executed.
Thereafter, in steps S75 and S76, random number updating processes 1 and 2 are respectively executed. Here, soft random numbers related to the special drawing and soft random numbers related to the common drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to the special figure, for example, big hit symbol random number 1 and 2 (random number for big hit stop symbol determination), fluctuation pattern random number (random number which decides fluctuation pattern including presence and absence of reach action etc), stop symbol random number ( There is a random number) for determining the stop symbol of the outset. Here, the update of the random number is performed by increasing the random number, for example, by one. Therefore, each time the timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains the at-randomness.

  In the present example, there are three types of fluctuation pattern random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. Among them, fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the latter half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a distribution of detailed effects from the reach system (for example, plus 1 frame) The special pattern is a random number for performing special pattern stop or minus special frame at one frame), and fluctuation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the form of the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation before the start of reach) is there. Moreover, although the said fluctuation | variation pattern random number may determine all the fluctuation | variation aspects directly, in this example, the production | presentation control apparatus 300 determines a specific aspect. For example, only the fluctuation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the effect control device 300 determines a specific fluctuation mode based on the determined fluctuation time and the reach system.

  Next, in step S77, a winning opening switch monitoring process and an error monitoring process are executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (starting opening switches 120 and 121, winning opening switch 123, and count switch 124 in the special view) set as described above, and the input flag of the count switch 124 is set, for example. If it has been done, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to carry out 15 prize ball payouts is executed. The error monitoring process also includes undetected errors of the above-mentioned sensors, excessive discharge of winning balls, open state of the glass frame 5, and incorrect winnings other than during the opening of the special winning opening 27a and the public battery 26 Is a process to monitor the

Next, in step S78, a special drawing game process is performed. In this special view game process, overall control of the entire special view variable display game is performed. That is, when the variation start condition (the start condition of the variation display game) is established, the process of determining the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination of the stop symbols of the special figure (result mode), and the process of setting the variation mode of the special figure Is performed (details will be described later).
Here, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, when there is a starting opening winning in the customer waiting state and the fluctuation display game is started, the fluctuation display game is ended by losing and the start memory is stored and the fluctuation display game is executed again There are three types when the jackpot is over, there is a starting memory, and the variable display game is executed again.
Further, in the special view game process, a process of setting various output data related to the variable view game of the special view is also performed. That is, in accordance with the gaming state of the variable display game of the special view, for example, the content (command data) of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is set.

Next, in step S79, processing for the variable display game of the common drawing is performed. That is, processing of setting the content of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is performed in accordance with the state of the variable display game of the common drawing.
Next, in step S80, a segment LED editing process is performed. This is the display of the special view of the batch display device 35, the special view symbol determined in the special view game process of step S78, the symbol of the common view figure determined in the common view game process of step S79, and other information. Display (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, a magnet fraud monitoring process is performed. This is to check the detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 to determine whether there is an abnormality. For example, when the input flag of the magnetic sensor switch 125 is set, a magnetic error occurs. Then, predetermined processing (such as transmission of an error notification command) is executed.

Next, in step S82, an external information editing process is performed. This is to edit data to be output from the game control apparatus 100 to the outside. This data is output data to the payout control device 200 and the external information terminal board 55 (including a unique ID as well as a jackpot signal and a prize ball signal).
After that, in order to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S83, the register saved in step S84 is restored, the interrupt is permitted in step S85, and the processing interrupted at the interrupt is restored (return ).

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 161, is read (step S91). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S92).
Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93). Thereafter, in step S94, parameters are prepared for reading the state of the signal taken into the input port 2, ie, the second input port 162, and then the process proceeds to the switch reading process (step S95). Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the switch reading process (step S95) in the above-described input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken in at the input port designated by the parameter prepared at the previous step S94, that is, the second input port 162 is read (step S101). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S102). Subsequently, the read state of the input port 2 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S103). Then, it waits for the delay time (for example, 0.1 ms) to the second reading to elapse (step S104).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the second input port 162 is performed (step S105). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S106). Subsequently, the read state of the input port 2 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 2 (step S107). Then, the bit changed in the first and second readings, that is, the signal is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S108). Specifically, of the states of the input port 2 read, a definite bit pattern is created in which bits having the same state as the first and second times are “1” and different bits are “0”.

Then, the logical product of the decided bit pattern and the port input state 2 (the state of the input port 2) is taken, and this is taken as the decided bit (step S109). Next, among the states of the input port 2 read, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state as the first and second times is “0” and the different bit is “1” (step S110). Then, the logical product of the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is taken, and it is set as the previous held bit (step S111). Thereafter, the current determination bit and the previous holding bit are combined and saved in the RWM as the current determination state (step S112). In addition, the exclusive OR of the present and the last determined state is taken, and saved in the RWM as a rising edge, and the switch reading process is ended (step S113).
When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch read changes the signal by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous read. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. In addition, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for a time more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, in order to slow down the design of the electric circuit for extending the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch It is necessary to design the ball flow path of the
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, the processable amount within the interrupt due to extending the timer interrupt cycle It is possible to balance the increase with the ease of structural design and the like, and to avoid the problems as described above.

[Output processing]
Next, an output process (step S73) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, first, all the output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 5) for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display (LED) 35 are turned off (step S121). Subsequently, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display unit (LED) 35 is updated ((+1) update in the range of 0 to 3) (step S122), and the value corresponds to the value of the digit counter The output data of the digit line of the LED is loaded (step S123). Next, the data output to the solenoid, test terminal, digit data output port 175 (see FIG. 5) is synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the solenoid, test terminal, digit data output port 175 (step S124).
Thereafter, output data of the segment line is acquired from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S125), and the acquired segment output data is output to the port 176 for segment output (step S126).

Subsequently, data to be output to the external information terminal substrate 55 is loaded and synthesized, and is output to the port 177 for external information output (step S127). Next, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal to be output to the test injection test device are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S128). Thereafter, the output data 4 to 6 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S129).
Next, the output data 7 to 8 of the test signal to be output to the test injection test device are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S130). Further, the output data 9 to 10 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S131). Furthermore, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay substrate 170 (step S132). End the output process of.

Command transmission processing
Next, command transmission processing (step S74) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The command transmission process includes an effect control command transmission process (step S141) to the effect control device 300 and a payout command transmission process (step S142) to the payout control device 200. The details of these will be described later.

[Production control command transmission processing]
First, the effect control command transmission process (step S141) in the above-described command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect control command transmission process, first, the value of the write counter "+1" when setting the transmission command to RWM is compared with the value of the read counter "+1" when reading the transmission command from RWM Then, it is checked whether a command is set (step S151). Specifically, if the write counter value and the read counter value are the same, it is determined that there is no setting command, and if the write counter value and the read counter value do not match, the unsent command It is determined that is set (step S152).

  If it is determined in step S152 that there is no setting command (step S152; NO), the process is omitted from the effect control command transmission processing, and the command is set in the determination of step S152 (step S152; YES) If it is determined, the read counter is updated (+1) in the next step S153. Then, the command is loaded from the command transmission area (MODE (upper byte)) corresponding to the value of the read counter (step S154). Then, the area where the acquired command is contained is reset (step S155). Further, the command is loaded from the command transmission area (ACTION (lower byte)) corresponding to the value of the read counter (step S156). Then, the area where the acquired command is contained is reset (step S157). After that, it transfers to production control command output processing (step S158).

[Production control command output processing]
Next, an effect control command output process (step S158) in the effect control command transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect control command output process, first, the off time of the strobe signal indicating that the effect control command (MODE) is being output is prepared (step S161), and the command data output process (step S162) is executed. Thereafter, the effect control command (ACTION) is output (step S163), and the off time of the strobe signal indicating that the effect control command (ACTION) is being output is prepared (step S164), and then the command data output process (step S165) is performed. Run.

[Command data output process]
Next, command data output processing (steps S162 and S165) in the above-described effect control command output processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the command data output process, first, in order to prevent the state immediately before the port from being lost, the port state holding data of the output port 171 including the strobe signal of the effect control command output is loaded (step S171). Then, an effect control command is output to the output port 172 (step S172), and the signal except for the strobe signal is held in the previous state to the output port 171 and the strobe signal is off (for example, low level indicating data reading invalid) Are added and output (ie, the strobe in the OFF state is output) (step S173). Then, in the next step S174, it is determined whether the time for which the strobe signal should be turned off (off time: strobe off period) has ended. Here, if it is determined that the off time has not ended (step S174; NO), the process returns to step S172 and the above process is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S174 that the off time has ended (step S174; YES), the process proceeds to step S175 to set the time of the on state of the strobe signal (for example, high level indicating data read enable) (ie, strobe) Set the ON time). Subsequently, an effect control command is output (step S176), and on the register holding the loaded data, the strobe in the on state (high level) is held while the signal except the strobe signal of the output port 171 is held in the previous state. A signal is output (that is, an on-state strobe is output) (step S177).
Then, in the next step S178, it is determined whether or not the time for which the strobe signal should be turned on (on time: in other words, the strobe on period) has ended. Here, if it is determined that the on-time has not ended (step S178; NO), the process returns to step S176 and the above process is repeated. If it is determined in step S178 that the on-time has ended (step S178; YES), the process proceeds to step S179, and the signal excluding the strobe signal of the output port 171 is immediately prior to the state on the register holding the loaded data. The strobe signal in the OFF state is set while holding in the OFF state, and the strobe signal in the OFF state is output (strobe output in the OFF state) (step S179), and the command data output process is completed.
The reason that the effect control command is output again in step S176 is that, when a power failure occurs during the loop processing of steps S176 to S178, it is avoided that the effect control command being output is not output after power failure recovery. It is for. Also, it is possible to prevent the command code from being changed by noise. In addition, it is also possible to loop only the respective processes in steps S174 and S178.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S142) in the above-described command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count number other than "0" in the winning number counter area provided for each winning opening (step S181). Here, when it is determined that there is no count number (step S182; NO), the process proceeds to step S183, the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated, and the counting number of all winning number counter areas is checked. Is determined (step S184). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (Step S184; YES), the command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S184 that all checks have not been completed (step S184; NO), the process returns to step S181 to repeat the above process.

  If it is determined in step S182 that there is a count number (step S182; YES), the process proceeds to step S185, and the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1). Thereafter, a payout number counter area, that is, a payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the winning opening is acquired (step S186). Then, the off time of the strobe signal (strobe off time) (for example, the time for maintaining the low level) indicating whether the reading of data is valid or invalid is set (step S187). Then, in the next step S188, the payout command (negative logic data) acquired in step S186 and the off-state (low level) strobe signal are output to the port 171 (see FIG. 5).

After that, it is determined whether the off time set in step S187 has elapsed (step S189), and if it has not elapsed (step S189; NO), the process returns to step S188, and if it has elapsed (step S189; YES) The process proceeds to step S190. In step S190, the strobe signal is set to the on state (high level), and the remaining output time of negative logic data is set.
Then, in the next step S191, a payout command (negative logic data) is continuously output and a strobe signal in the on state (high level) is output to the port 171. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining output time of the negative logic data set in step S190 has elapsed (step S192), and if it has not elapsed (step S192; NO), the process returns to step S191, and if it has elapsed (step S192) In step S192, the process proceeds to step S193.

  In step S193, the negative logic payout command data is inverted to generate positive logic payout command data. Then, the on-remaining time (time of high level) of the strobe signal is set (step S194). Then, in the next step S195, the dispensing command (positive logic data) generated in step S193 and the on-state (high level) strobe signal are output to the port 171. After that, it is determined whether or not the on-time set in step S194 has elapsed (step S196), and if it has not elapsed (step S196; NO), the process returns to step S195, and if it has elapsed (step S196; YES) To step S197.

  In step S197, the strobe signal is set to the off state (low level) and the remaining output time of the positive logic data is set. Then, in the next step S198, a payout command (data of positive logic) is continuously output and a strobe signal in an off state (low level) is output to the port 131. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining output time of the primary logic data set in step S197 has elapsed (step S199), and if it has not elapsed (step S199; NO), the process returns to step S198 and it has elapsed (step S199) In step S199; YES), the process proceeds to step S200. In step S200, the payout command data of the positive logic is saved as port status holding data in the port status holding data area of the RWM, and the command transmission process is ended.

  As described above, by outputting the negative logical payout command data and then outputting the positive logical payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares the negative logical payout command data and the positive logical payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not the correct command has been received. For example, it logically inverts the negative logic payout command data received earlier and compares it with the positive logic payout command data received later, and if it is not the same, determines that it is a command reception error and resends the command. By requesting the game control device 100 to receive an accurate command.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, random number update processing 1 (step S75) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number updating process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number 1 and the hit random number and the big hit symbol random number 2 which are targets of the initial value random number updating process of FIG.
In the random number updating process 1, first, the value of the soft random number status register indicating the updated state of the random number is read, and the random number makes one revolution to check whether there is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211) . Here, if there is no random number waiting for initial value setting, the random number updating process 1 is ended (step S212; NO). On the other hand, when there is a random number waiting for initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S213 (step S212; YES).

  In step S213, it is checked whether or not the random number per hit is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. Here, if it is not waiting for initial value setting, the process jumps to step S217 (step S214; NO). On the other hand, if the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S215 (step S214; YES). In step S215, the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value of the random number per map, and in step S216, the loaded initial value random number is set in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value. In other words, the next initial value of the random number per hit (generally initial value random number) is set in the register that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S217.

  In step S217, it is checked whether or not the jackpot symbol random number 1 is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. Here, if it is not waiting for initial value setting, the process jumps to step S221 (step S218; NO). On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S219 (step S218; YES). In step S219, the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value of the big hit symbol random number 1, and in the subsequent step S220, the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 loaded in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value is set. Do. That is, the next initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number 1) of big hit symbol random number 1 is set in the register which holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S221.

In step S221, it is checked whether or not the jackpot symbol random number 2 is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. Here, if it is not waiting for the initial value setting, the random number updating process 1 is ended (step S222; NO).
On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S223 (step S222; YES). In step S223, the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value of the big hit symbol random number 2, and in the subsequent step S224, the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 loaded in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value is set. Do. That is, the next initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number 2) of big hit symbol random number 2 is set in the register which holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region). After passing through step S224, the random number updating process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, random number update processing 2 (step S76) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
In the present embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random number update process 2 in FIG. It targets and switches the update target each time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by the random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Are configured to

  In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S233). At this time, in the table to be referred to, there is stored an upper limit value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made one round.

Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing or the like of a DRAM provided in a Z80-based microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. Is read (step S234). The randomness can be given to the random number by using the value of the R register. After the step S234, the mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the R register when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the R register are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number.
When the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the R register is updated, and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the R register Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

Next, it is checked whether the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S236). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S 237; YES), the process proceeds to step S 238 and “1” is set to the value left by masking the value of the R register by the mask value (hereinafter referred to as the masked value). Is the addition value (high order), and "0" is the addition value (low order), and the process proceeds to step S240.
The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is to avoid the case where the masked value may become “0” and adding “0” later does not change from the value before addition.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number lower order or a 1-byte random number (step S 237; NO), the process branches to step S 239 to set “0” as an addition value (upper) and mask value “1”. The result of addition is used as the addition value (lower order) to proceed to step S240.

In the next step S240, it is checked whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. Here, if it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S 242 (step S 241; NO). On the other hand, if the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S243 (step S241; YES). In step S 242, “0” is set as a random number value (high order), and the mask value added with “1” is updated as the value of the random number area (low order) to be updated.
If the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated in step S243 is taken as a random number value, and the process proceeds to step S244.

Next, in step S244, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps S238 and S239 to the random number value is calculated to obtain a new random number value, and whether this random number value exceeds the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S233. It determines (step S245).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit judgment value, the upper limit judgment value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step S246), and then the process proceeds to step S247. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit judgment value, the calculated random value is used as the current random value, and the process jumps from step S246 and proceeds to step S247.
In step S247, the lower order of the random value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the low-order area of 2-byte random numbers. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S248). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S249; YES), the high order of the random number value is the high side of the random number area (Step S250). Here, it saves in the upper area of 2-byte random numbers. After the step S250, the random number updating process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S249; NO), step S250 is jumped, the process is not performed, and the random number update process 2 is ended.

As described above, the CPU 101A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. In addition, as the fluctuation pattern, as described later, the fluctuation pattern of “no reach”, “normal reach”, “special (SP) 1-A reach”, “special (SP) 1-B reach”, “special ( SP) Fluctuation patterns (reach) in various reach states such as 2-A reach, Special (SP) 2-B reach, Special (SP) 3-A reach, Special (SP) 3-B reach Variation mode) is defined.
Therefore, the CPU 101A determines the reach fluctuation mode for determining the reach fluctuation mode in the reach state among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of gaming balls to the start winning opening 25 and the starting area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26. The random number update means (random number change pattern random number) is updated.

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S77) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch / error monitoring processing is processing for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (change in signal) from switches provided in various winning openings, and monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, a fraud monitoring table for the winning opening switch in the special winning opening is prepared (step S261). As a winning opening switch in the special winning opening, there is a count switch 124. Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process is performed (step S262). This monitors the winning (for example, big hit) of the game ball on the big winning opening 27a and also monitors the winning for the incorrect big winning opening 27a other than the big hit.
Next, the fraud monitoring table of the winning opening switch in Puden is prepared (step S263). As a winning opening switch in the universal electric power station, there is a second starting opening switch 121 for detecting a winning on the second starting winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric role (general electric power).
Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process is performed (step S264). This monitors the winning of the regular game ball on the second starting winning opening 26 as a normal electric role (general power) and monitors the winning on the incorrect second starting winning opening 26. Next, a prize monitoring table (for example, a list showing switches not requiring fraud monitoring) of the prize opening switches not requiring fraud monitoring is prepared (step S265). As a winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, for example, there is a first starting opening switch 120 and a winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28-31.
For the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, fraud monitoring is not performed, but since the winning detection process is performed, a prize monitoring table is prepared for the process in step S265, and the number of prizes is updated in the next step. The counter updating process (step S266) is performed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

After the winning number counter update process (step S266), an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose errors should be monitored is to be the target of the current monitoring. The update is performed (“+1” update in the range of 0 to 3) to prepare (step S 267). Subsequently, the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S268).
The types of errors for monitoring the gaming machine include the following, which correspond to errors for monitoring the shoot ball out switch and the overflow switch from the payout control device 200, abnormalities in the payout control device, and the like.
(A) When 0: Switch error (such as connector disconnection or switch failure)
(B) 1: Shoot ball out error (c) 2: Overflow error (d) 3: Dispense error Next, perform an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 (step S269). ), And then prepare the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 (step S270).
Types of error monitoring defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) At 0 and 2: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) At the time of 1, 3: Front frame open (play slot open)
Then, the error scan counter for monitoring the opening of the front frame and the play space is loaded, converted to the gaming machine error monitoring table 2, and prepared (step S271). Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is performed (step S272), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S262 and S264) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The prize monitoring process is a process performed on the count switch 124 of the special prize port or the second starting port switch 121 in the universal power system, and here, in addition to the detection of the prize, the fraud is monitored. The special winning opening (special variation winning device 27) and the Fuden (normal variation winning device 26) are likely to be illegitimately forced to open the opening and closing member to put in the game ball and pay out the prize ball.
In the fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the target is checked (step S 281), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (step S 282). If it is not during the fraud monitoring period, the process jumps to step S296, and the processes after step S296 are performed.
On the other hand, if it is during the fraud monitoring period, it is checked whether there is an input on the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring (the counting switch 124 of the big winning opening or the second start opening switch 121 in the common charge) (step S283). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (step S284; NO), the process jumps to step S298. If it is determined that there is an input (step S284; YES), the process proceeds to step S285 to update the target number of illegal prizes (+1) ( And the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings after the addition exceeds the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (for example, 5). The determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is because it is not determined that the signal is incorrect when it is a prize or when the signal is noisy, that is, it is not easily determined as an error although it is not incorrect. Here, if it is determined that the determination number is not exceeded (step S287; NO), the process jumps to step S296. If it is determined that the determination number is exceeded (step S287; YES), the process proceeds to step S288.
In step S 288, the number of incorrect winnings is fixed to the number of incorrect occurrence determinations, and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target incorrect winning notification timer area in the next step S 289. (Step S290) Further, an incorrect winning occurrence flag is set as an incorrect flag (step S291).

Next, the set fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S 292), and if it does not match (step S 293; NO), the process proceeds to step S 294 to set the set fraud flag to the target fraud flag area. After saving (step S294), command setting processing is performed in step S295, and the fraud & prize monitoring processing is ended.
Therefore, if the fraud has occurred as described above, the fraud notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the fraud notification is performed.
On the other hand, if YES in step S293, that is, if the set fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area, it can be determined that it is the same as the state already taught to the effect control device 300, step S294, The fraud & prize monitoring process is terminated without performing the process of step S295. This is because the command is transmitted only when the flag changes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S 282 that fraud monitoring is not being performed and the process branches to step S 296 or if it is determined in step S 287 that the determination number is not exceeded (step S 287; NO), the process proceeds to step S 296. Prepare a prize monitoring table of the prize opening switch to be illegitimately monitored (the count switch 124 for the big prize opening or the second starting opening switch 121 in the common station). Thereafter, the processing for updating the number-of-winnings counter, that is, processing S297 for counting the number of winnings as a target for winning balls discharge, is executed, and then the target incorrect prize notification timer has already timed out or timed up after updating (-1). The check is made (step S298), and the check result is determined in step S299.
If the target incorrect prize notification timer has not timed out after time-up or (-1) update, the determination in step S299 becomes NO, and the process returns and the routine is repeated.

  If the target incorrect prize notification timer has already been timed up or updated after (-1) update, the process proceeds to step S300, and it is determined whether it is the notification end timing (instant end of notification). If it is determined that the notification end timing is not reached (step S300; NO), the process jumps to step S302, and if it is determined that the notification end timing is reached (step S300; YES), the process proceeds to step S301 to reset the target number of illegal prizes. It progresses to S302. In step S302, a target incorrect prize cancellation command is prepared, and in the subsequent step S303, an incorrect prize cancellation flag is set as an incorrect flag, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S292, and the processing from step S292 is executed thereafter. Therefore, at this time, a wrong prize cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the unfair notice is canceled.

[Winning number counter update processing]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S266) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S297) in the fraud & prize monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S311). Next, it is checked whether there is an input (more exactly, a change in the input) of the detection signal from the winning opening switch to be monitored (step S312). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (S313; NO), the process jumps to step S318, and if it is determined that there is an input (S313; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded in the next step S314.

Then, in step S315, the target winning number counter is updated (+1) to check whether it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S316; NO), the process proceeds to step S317 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area, and then the process proceeds to step S318.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S316 that a counter overflow has occurred (S316; YES), the process skips step S317 and jumps to step S318. Since the maximum number of memories (for example, 255 for 1-byte size and 65535 for 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the provided number-of-winnings counter area, the value will return to "0" if it is exceeded and pay You will lose a lot of information on the number of winning balls. In order to avoid that, in step S315, the contents of the area are not updated immediately, and it is determined that (+1) outside the area is checked whether it becomes “0” before performing the update.
In step S318, it is determined whether the monitoring process of all the switches has ended, and if it has ended (step S318; YES), the input number counter updating process has ended, and if it has not ended (step S318; In the case of NO), the process returns to step S312 and the above process is repeated.

[Error check process]
Next, an error check process (steps S269 and S272) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to an error scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose errors should be monitored as a target of the current monitoring. Is acquired (step S321).
The information defined on the prepared gaming machine error monitoring table is as follows.
(B) Address of error monitoring table (There are only a few minutes of errors to monitor)
(B) Data for determining switch status (c) Error notification command (d) Error notification end command (e) Error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value (f) Error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value (g) Address of switch status area H) Address of error monitoring timer area (i) Address of error flag area

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked (step S322), and it is determined whether the switch is on (step S323). If the switch is on (step S323; YES), an error may occur, so the process proceeds to step S324 to set an error occurrence flag as an error flag.
For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table, in the case of out of shoot ball, it is detected by the shoot ball out switch 216 that there is no gaming ball in the chute supplying the gaming ball to the storage tank If it is turned on, step S323 becomes YES. If YES, an error occurrence flag is set in step S324.

Next, the target error notification command is prepared (step S325), and then the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S326). Next, the value of the target switch state area is compared with the current switch state (step S 327), and it is determined whether the two coincide (step S 328).
If the result of step S328 is NO (mismatch), it is determined that no error treatment is necessary, the current switch state is saved in the switch state area in step S329, and the target error monitoring timer is subsequently cleared (step S329) Step S330).
On the other hand, if the determination result in step S328 is YES (coincidence), the target error monitoring timer is updated (incremented) by "1" in step S334 in order to determine the timer whether or not the error processing is necessary. It is checked whether the timer comparison value (the reference value for which it is judged that the action to the error is necessary) has been reached. If the monitoring timer comparison value is reached, the error monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by “−1” in step S336, and the process proceeds to step S337 to compare the set error flag with the value of the target error flag area.
Here, when it is determined in step S335 that the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that an error occurrence or cancellation state has been determined. However, there is also a possibility that the occurrence of an error is determined when an error has already occurred, or that the release of an error is determined when an error has not occurred. Then, by comparing the set error flag with the value of the target error flag area, it is checked whether the currently determined error state is the same as the state of the current error flag.

  If the result of the determination in step S338 is YES (the error flag is the same), it means that the status of the error has not changed, so it is determined that no action is necessary, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S338 is NO (if the error flags are not the same), it means that it has changed to a new error state, and thus the process proceeds to step S339 to set the set error flag to the target error flag area. Save and proceed to step S340. That is, the value of the target error flag area is changed to that of the error state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S340. In step S340, command setting processing is performed, and a command corresponding to the error state decided this time is set. As a result, the action corresponding to the current error state is performed, and for example, if the shoot ball is out, an error display notifying that is notified or the notification is canceled.

On the other hand, if the target switch acquired this time in step S323 is not turned on, there is no possibility that an error will occur, and contrary to the above, an error may be canceled. The process branches to step S331 to set an error release flag as an error flag. Next, the target error notification end command is prepared (step S332), and then the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S333), and the process proceeds to step S327, and the processing after step S327 is performed. Therefore, at this time, processing corresponding to the error cancellation is performed.
In this way, if an error occurs, the corresponding error flag is set to set a treatment command, and if the error is eliminated, the corresponding error flag is erased to set the cancellation command. In particular, in this error check process, not only the occurrence of an error is monitored, but also the release is also monitored to make the process common.
In addition, such an error check process is the same also about errors, such as glass frame opening and front frame opening, for example.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the special figure game process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special view game processing, the monitoring of the input of the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121, the control of the entire processing related to the special view fluctuation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.
In the special view game process, first, in step S 351, a starting opening switch monitoring process is performed to monitor winning of the first starting opening switch 120 and the second starting opening switch 121.
In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 25 and the normal variation winning device 26 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the figure variation display game.
Next, in step S352, count switch monitoring processing is performed. This is to monitor the count number of the count switch 124 provided in the special variation winning device 27.

Next, in step S353, it is checked whether the special figure game processing timer has already timed up or has timed out after -1 updating of the timer, and if timed up, the determination in next step S354 becomes YES The process proceeds to step S355, and if the time is not up, the determination at step S354 is NO, and the process jumps to step S366.
The special figure game processing timer is such that a timer value is set to a predetermined value in each processing (steps S359 to S365: processing number = 0 to processing number = 6) after branching by the processing number described later. It is set to be the timing to execute step S359 and subsequent steps when the special view game processing timer has timed out. Accordingly, when it is time to execute step S355 or later at the time when step S353 is executed, the determination result of step S354 becomes affirmative, and step S355 or later (including steps S366 to S369) is executed. . When it is not time to execute steps S355 to S365 when step S353 is executed, the determination result of step S354 is negative, and only steps S366 to S369 are executed.

Then, in steps S355 to S357, the special figure game sequence branch table is set to branch by the process number described later, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired, and the return after the branch process ends. Save the address to the stack area.
Next, in step S358, the process branches according to the process number. That is, the process number 0 goes to step S359 (special process normal process), the process number 1 goes to step S360 (special figure changing process), the process number 2 goes to step S361 (special figure display process), the process number 3 The process proceeds to step S 362 (fanfare / interval process), to step S 363 (processing for large winning opening open) with process number 4, to step S 364 (big winning opening remaining ball processing) with process number 5, step S 365 (processing number 6) Go to the jackpot end process). The customer waiting state (during demo) is the process number 0.

  And in step S359 (special figure usual processing), when the number of special figure reservation (number of special figure start memory which is on hold by special figure fluctuation display game non-execution) is zero and the special figure fluctuation display game is not under execution A process for displaying the customer waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. Further, in the special view normal processing, processing for starting the next special view variation display game (special view variation start processing) is performed. In this special view fluctuation start process, the start memory of special view 1 and special view 2 is monitored, and if there is any special view start storage, the corresponding change display (first or second change display) is started. Setting (setting of a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300, etc.) is executed, and the process number is set to 1, and the process returns. When the number of special drawing reservations is zero and the next special drawing variation display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the processing number remains 0).

Further, in step S360 (processing during special figure fluctuation), processing for fluctuating and displaying the special figure is performed until the fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation start process has elapsed. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, a process of transmitting a command (pattern stop command) for stopping the symbol of the special figure to the effect control device 300 is executed, and the process number is returned as 2. If the set fluctuation time has not passed yet, the process returns as it is (the process number remains at 1).
Further, in step S 361 (process during special image display), a process for displaying the variation display result of the special image for a predetermined time (1 second to 2 seconds) is performed. When the display for the predetermined time is completed, the processing number is set to 3 if it is a big hit, and it is returned to 0 if it is not. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns as it is (the process number is kept at 2).

In step S 362 (fanfare / interval process), the fanfare process for outputting a fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12 a or the like immediately after the big hit is performed, and an interval period is displayed in the big hit interval period. The processing is performed, and the processing number is set to 4 at the timing when opening the special winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started.
In addition, step S363 (processing during the big winning opening opening) is processing while the large winning opening 27a of the fluctuation winning device 27 is open. When the special winning opening is ended, the processing number is set to 5.

Also, in step S364 (big winning opening remaining ball processing), processing is performed to wait for a certain period of time in order to reliably count the gaming balls that have entered the big winning opening 27a during the end of the big winning opening opening. After the lapse, the processing number is set to 3 when the big hit round remains, and the processing number is returned as 6 when the big hit round is not left.
In step S365 (big hit end process), a process for executing the special view routine process S359 is performed after the big hit ends, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, when any one of the above processes corresponding to the process number is completed, the process proceeds to step S366, and a table for controlling display (display of this special view 1) on the batch display unit 35 of special view 1 In the next step S367, control processing (symbol variation control processing) for variation display of the present special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S368, and a table for controlling the display (display of the special figure 2) on the batch display device 35 of the special figure 2 is prepared, and in the next step S369 Control processing (symbol variation control processing) is performed, and then the process returns.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the starting opening switch monitoring process (step S351) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the starting winning opening 25 (first starting opening) (step S371), the special view starting opening switch common processing (step S372) is performed. The details of the special view starting opening switch common processing in step S372 will be described later together with the special view starting opening switch common processing in step S377.

Next, it is checked whether or not the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 26) is in operation, that is, the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is activated and the gaming ball can be won. (Step S373) If it is determined that the ordinary motor-operated combination is in operation (Step S373; YES), the process proceeds to Step S376, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S 373 that the normal motorized combination is not in operation (step S 373; NO), whether the number of incorrect winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is equal to or more than the determined number of fraud occurrences Is checked (step S 374), and a process (step S 375) is performed to determine whether the number of incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number determined to be incorrect.
The game ball can not be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, it is determined whether the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) of determinations of fraud occurrence.

If it is determined in step S 375 that the number of incorrect winnings is not more than the number determined as incorrect (step S 375; NO), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the normal fluctuation winning device 26 (starting opening 2) (step S 376) The special view starting opening switch common processing (step S377) is performed, and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.
Also in the case where it is determined in step S 375 that the number of incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number determined as incorrect (step S 375; YES), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the special view starting port switch common processing (steps S372 and S377) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when the first starting opening switch 120 and the second starting opening switch 121 are input.
In the special view starting port switch common processing, first, whether or not there is an input in the starting port switch to be monitored (for example, the first starting port switch 120 etc.) of the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121 If it is determined (step S381) that there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S382; NO), the special view start port switch common processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S382 that there is an input to the monitored starting opening switch (step S383; YES), the starting opening winning flag of the starting opening switch to be monitored is saved (step S383). The extracted big hit random number is loaded in the hard random number latch register (extracts the big hit random number) (step S 384).

Subsequently, information regarding the number of winnings on the start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120 etc.) to be monitored among the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is outside the pachinko machine 1 The number of times of output to the management device 140 (the number of times of starting opening signal output) (number of times more times of output must be performed) is loaded (step S 385). Then, the number of times of starting opening signal output loaded is updated (+1), it is checked whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step S386), and if it is determined that the number of outputs does not overflow (NO in step S387), after updating Is saved in the start opening signal output frequency area of the RWM (step S388), and the process proceeds to step S389. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S387 that the number of times of output overflows (step S387; YES), the process proceeds to step S389.
Then, in step S 389, among the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, the update target special image hold corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the first start port switch 120 etc.) It is checked whether the number of start-up storages is less than the upper limit value (step S389), and a process (step S390) is performed to determine whether the number of to-be-held special views is less than the upper limit value.

If it is determined in step S390 that the number of special map reservations is less than the upper limit (step S390; YES), the process of updating (+1) the number of special map reservations to be updated (for example, the number of special diagram 1 reservations) After performing step S391), prepare the decoration special drawing reservation number command (MODE) of the target starting opening switch (step S392), and further, the decoration special drawing reservation number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special drawing reservation number After preparation (step S393), command setting processing (step S394) is performed.
Next, processing is performed to calculate the address of the random number save area corresponding to the number of to-be-held maps (step S395). Subsequently, the big hit random number is saved in the random number save area of RWM (step S396), and then the big hit symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is loaded (big hit symbol random number is extracted) and prepared (step S397) The corresponding jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number save area of RWM, and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the register (step S 398).

Next, the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded (extraction of the fluctuation pattern random number 1), the loaded value is saved in the RWM fluctuation pattern random number 1 save area (step S399), and then the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number 2 is Load (extract variation pattern random number 2), save the loaded value in the RWM variation pattern random number 2 save area (step S400), and load the corresponding variation pattern random number 3 (extract variation pattern random number 3) Then, the loaded value is saved in the RWM fluctuation pattern random number 3 save area (step S401).
Here, the RWM extracts various random numbers based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning opening 25 and the start area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26, and the start storage means capable of storing the extracted various random numbers as start storage. I
Next, the special figure holding information determination process (step S402) is performed, and the special figure starting port switch common process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S390 that the number of special drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step S390; NO), is the input of the start port switch related to step S382 an input of the first start port switch 120? If not (step S403) and it is determined that it is an input of the first starting opening switch 120 (step S404; YES), it prepares a decoration special drawing reserve number command (hold overflow command) (step S405), The command setting process (step S406) is performed, and the special view starting port switch common process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S404 that the input is not the input of the first start port switch 120 (step S404; NO), the special view start port switch common processing is ended.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special view hold information determination process (step S402) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

In the special view reserve information determination process, first, in step S411, it is checked whether a condition for performing the prefetch effect is satisfied. The conditions under which the pre-reading effect may be performed are as follows.
· Special figure 1: Normal fluctuation winning device 26 is supported (during general power support), and other than big hit · Special figure 2: No condition When such conditions are met, the result related information corresponding to the starting memory concerned Prefetching processing is performed to make a determination.
The check result in step S411 is determined in step S412. If the condition for performing the pre-reading effect is not satisfied, the routine is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the conditions for performing the pre-reading effect are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S413 to perform the jackpot determination process. In the big hit determination process, a big hit is determined based on whether or not the random number extracted at the timing of the start winning is within the range of the big hit, and in the case of the big hit determination, the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag area.

Next, in step S414, it is determined whether the big hit determination result is a big hit or not. If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S415 to set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch. The jackpot symbol random number is checked, and the corresponding jackpot information table is acquired and set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S418.
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol random number check table includes the following.
· Judgment value of random number (represents distribution rate)
The address of the jackpot information table corresponding to the determination value. Further, the information defined on the jackpot information table includes the following.
・ Design information ・ Starting opening winning combination design command

On the other hand, if the determination result of step S414 is NO (not a big hit), the process branches to step S417 to set an outlier information table, and then the process proceeds to step S418. For example, the start opening winning a prize production design command is defined in the departure information table.
When the process proceeds from step S416 or step S417 to step S418, in step S418, symbol information is acquired from the set information table and saved in a symbol information (for work) area. Next, the process proceeds to step S419, where the starting opening winning effect design symbol command is acquired from the set information table and saved in the winning effect symbol command area.
Next, after preparing the starting opening winning flag of the starting opening switch to be monitored among the first starting opening switch 120 and the second starting opening switch 121 (step S420), the target starting opening winning effect command setting table is prepared Then (step S421), a special figure information setting process (step S422) is performed to set the special figure information set for the starting opening to be monitored.
Subsequently, of the variation modes in the special figure variation display game, after performing the second half variation pattern setting process (step S 423) for setting the second half variation pattern, the variation pattern setting process (A) Step S424) is performed.
In addition, each of the special figure information setting process in step S422, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S423, and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S424 is the special figure information setting process in special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 etc. The second half variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 43) and the variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 44) are the same, and the details thereof will be described later.

Then, while calculating and preparing the starting opening winning combination rendering command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (step S425), prepare the value of the second half fluctuation number as the starting opening winning decoration command (ACTION) (step S426), A command setting process (step S427) is performed. Subsequently, the starting-up opening winning effect symbol command is loaded from the winning effect symbol command area and prepared (step S428), the command setting process (step S429) is performed, and the special image holding information determination process is ended.
That is, the starting opening winning a prize production command is prepared in step S425 and S426, the starting opening winning a prize production design command is prepared in step S428, the decision result (pre-reading result) of the result related information which corresponds to starting memory The effect control device 300 can be notified prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage, and in particular, by changing the display mode of the special view suspension displayed on the display device 41 As a result, the player can be notified of the related information before the start timing of the special view variation display game.

[Count switch monitoring process]
Next, the count switch monitoring process (step S352) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the count switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 27 is open (step S451), and it is determined that the special winning opening is open (step S452; YES) Then, it is checked whether or not there is an input of the count switch 124 (step S453), and if it is determined that there is an input of the count switch 124 (step S454; YES), the numerical value of the special winning opening counter is updated (+1) The process (step S455) is performed.

  Subsequently, it is checked whether or not the count number of the special winning opening counter has reached the upper limit value (step S456), and it is determined that the special winning opening count number has reached the upper limit (step S457; YES). The game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step S458), and the count switch monitoring process is ended.

  Also, in step S452, is it determined that the special winning opening is not open (step S452; NO), or is it determined in step S454 that there is no input of the count switch 124 (step S454; NO) Or) If it is determined in step S457 that the special winning opening count has not reached the upper limit (step S457; NO), the count switch monitoring process is ended.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special view routine processing (step S359) in the special view game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special view routine processing, first, it is checked whether the second special view reservation number (second start memory number) is 0 or not (step S461).
Then, if it is determined that the second special drawing reservation number is 0 (step S462; YES), it is checked whether the first start storage number (the first special drawing reservation number) is 0 (step S463).
Then, if it is determined that the first special drawing reservation number is 0 (step S464; YES), it is checked whether the customer waiting demo has already been started (step S465) and the customer waiting demo has not been started That is, if it is determined that the process has not been started (step S466; NO), processing for saving a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is performed (step S467).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S468), and a command setting process (step S469) is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S465 that the customer waiting demo is already started (step S466; YES), the customer waiting demonstration flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S467), and the customer waiting demo command is also Since preparation (step S468) and command setting processing (step S469) are also performed, the process proceeds to step S470 without performing these processing.
Next, special processing shift processing setting processing 1 is performed (step S470). This is to set various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, a processing number "0" related to the special figure ordinary processing, a flag defining the special winning opening fraud monitoring period (big winning opening fraud monitoring information), etc. The processing is performed, and then the special processing routine is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S462 that the second special figure reservation number is not 0 (step S463; NO), special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step S471) is performed. In addition, the detail of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process in step S471 is mentioned later.
Then, special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 2) is performed (step S470). This is preparing a table (for the second special drawing) for shifting to the special drawing fluctuation processing, processing number “1” related to the special drawing fluctuation processing in the table, and information concerning the end of the customer waiting demo , Test signal according to the variation of the second special figure, information for controlling the second special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35 (for example, special figure 2 indicator The special flag 2 process is performed to set the flag, the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display, etc.) during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 and then the special figure normal processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S464 that the first special figure reservation number is not 0 (step S464; NO), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S473) is performed. In addition, the detail of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process 1 in step S473 is mentioned later.
Then, special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 1) is performed (step S474). This is preparing a table (for the first special drawing) for shifting to the special figure changing process, the process number “1” related to the special figure changing process in the table, and information related to the end of the customer waiting demo , Test signal according to the variation of the first special figure, information for controlling the first special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35 (for example, special figure 1 indicator The special flag 1 process is performed to set the flag, the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the special figure 1 display, etc.) during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and then the special figure normal process is ended.
As described above, the second special view reservation number is 0 by performing the check of the second special view reservation number in step S461 and step S462 prior to the check of the first special view reservation number in step S463 and step S464. If not, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 1 (step S471) will be executed.
That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game.

[Special figure normal process shift setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special view routine processing transition setting process 1 (step S470) in the special view routine processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S481, "0" is set as the process number (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal process is prepared, and the process number "0" related to the special figure ordinary process is prepared in the table. Is set, and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area in step S482.
Next, at step S483, the variable symbol determination flag area is reset, and at step S484, a flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region, and the routine is ended. Thereby, various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the processing number "0" related to the special figure ordinary processing is set, and the flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) defining the special winning opening fraud monitoring period Processing for setting is performed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 1]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process 1 (step S 473) in the special view normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, first, whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit A big hit flag 1 setting process (step S 491) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not. The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process in step S 491 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S492) according to the setting of the first special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol), the first special figure stop symbol number (special figure 1 stop symbol number) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S493). The test signal corresponding to the first special figure stop symbol number (special figure 1 stop symbol number) has a symbol 2 data signal, and this signal continues to be output until the value of the data changes. In addition, the detail of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S492 is mentioned later.
Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information (for work) area (step S494).

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step S495), and the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step S496).
Subsequently, a table (for the special view 1) for setting information on the variation pattern is prepared (step S497), and a special view information setting process (step S498) for setting the special view information is performed. Subsequently, the second half variation pattern setting process (step S499) for setting the second half variation pattern among the variation modes in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and then the variation mode in which the first special figure variation display game is set A pattern setting process (step S500) is performed. Thereafter, the variation start information setting process (step S501) for setting the information of the variation start of the first special figure is performed, and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.
The details of the special figure information setting process in step S498, the second half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S499, the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S500, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in step S501 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step S 491) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area in step S511. This is because information on deviation is set in advance before the jackpot determination. Next, in step S512, a big hit random number is loaded from the big hit random number save area (for special figure 1) and prepared, and a big hit determination process is performed in step S513. This is to check whether the big hit random number corresponding to the special figure 1 extracted this time is in the big hit range (the value between the big hit lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: same as the big hit judgment value) If it is within the jackpot range, it can be judged as a jackpot (detailed routine will be described later).

The check result in step S513 is determined in step S514, and if the determination result is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S515, the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area, and the big hit random number save area is continued in step S516. Clear "0" (for special figure 1) and return to prepare for the next judgment.
On the other hand, if NO at step S514 (at the time of disconnection), the process jumps step S515 and proceeds to step S516. Therefore, at this time, the process is ended with the shift information saved in the big hit flag 1, and the big hit flag 1 is not set.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S492) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S521 whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (whether big hit information is saved), and if it is determined in step S522 that it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S523 and the big hit symbol table of the special figure 1 is set. Do.
Here, as information defined on the jackpot symbol table of the special figure 1, there are the following.
· Judgment value of random number (Indicates distribution rate)
・ Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value Subsequently, in step S524, the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number save area (for special figure 1), and in step S525 the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired In step S526, the acquired stop symbol number is saved in the special view 1 stop symbol area.

Next, in step S527, it is determined whether the power-on support is in progress. The universal power support supports the start winning by opening the opening / closing member 26a of the second starting winning opening 26 as a normal electric power role (general power), for example, at high probability or time Such support is provided.
If it is during the common charge support, the process proceeds to step S528, and after preparing the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table at the time of high probability and time reduction, the process proceeds to step S529. On the other hand, if it is not in the common charge support state, the process branches to step S530 to prepare the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table at low probability, and the process proceeds to step S529.
In step S529, stop symbol information setting processing is performed to set stop symbol information corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol (big hit symbol). The details of the stop symbol information setting process in step S529 will be described later.

Next, in step S531, a decoration special drawing command table (an decoration special drawing 1 command (ACTION) is defined in this table) is set. In step S532, the decoration special drawing 1 corresponding to the symbol information is performed. After processing for acquiring the command (ACTION), processing for acquiring the decoration special figure 1 command (MODE) is performed in step S533, and these commands are saved in the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM (step S534) .
Then, in step S535, the RWM big hit symbol random number saving area (for special figure 1) is cleared to 0, and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S522 that the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (NO), the processing in steps S523 to S529 is not performed, and the process branches to step S536. Then, in step S536, the stop symbol number at the time of detachment is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area, and the process proceeds to step S537, and the symbol information at the time of detachment is saved in the symbol information area. Perform the processing of

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step S471) in the above-mentioned special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, first, whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit A big hit flag 2 setting process (step S 541) for setting deviation information or big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not is performed. The details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process in step S 541 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S 542) according to the setting of the second special figure stop symbol (special figure 2 stop symbol), the second special figure stop symbol number (special figure 2 stop symbol number) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S543). There is a symbol 3 data signal in the test signal corresponding to the second special figure stop symbol number (special figure 2 stop symbol number), and this signal continues to be output until the value of the data changes. In addition, the detail of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process in step S542 is mentioned later.
Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information (for work) area (step S544).

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step S545), and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step S546).
Subsequently, a table (for the special figure 2) for setting information related to the fluctuation pattern is prepared (step S547), and a special figure information setting process (step S548) for setting the special figure information is performed. Subsequently, of the variation modes in the second special figure variation display game, after performing the second half variation pattern setting process (step S549) for setting the second half variation pattern, the variation for setting the second special figure variation display game variation mode A pattern setting process (step S550) is performed. Thereafter, the variation start information setting process (step S551) for setting the information of the variation start of the second special figure is performed, and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.
The details of the special figure information setting process in step S548, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S549, the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S550, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in step S551 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step S 541) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area in step S561. This is because information on deviation is set in advance before the jackpot determination. Next, in step S562, a big hit random number is loaded from the big hit random number save area (for special figure 2) and prepared, and a big hit determination process is performed in step S563. This is to check whether the big hit random number corresponding to the special figure 2 extracted this time is in the big hit range (the value between the big hit lower judgment value and the upper judgment value: same as the big hit judgment value), If it is within the jackpot range, it can be judged as a jackpot (detailed routine will be described later).

The check result in step S563 is determined in step S564, and if the determination result is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S565 and the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area, and in the following step S566 Clear (0) (for Special Figure 2) and return to prepare for the next judgment.
On the other hand, if NO at step S564 (done), the process jumps step S565 and proceeds to step S566. Therefore, at this time, the process is finished with the shift information saved in the big hit flag 2, and the big hit flag 2 is not set.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S 542) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S571 whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (whether big hit information is saved), and if it is determined in step S572 that it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S573 and the big hit symbol table of special figure 2 is set. Do.
Here, as information defined on the jackpot symbol table of the special figure 2, there are the following.
· Judgment value of random number (Indicates distribution rate)
・ Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value Subsequently, in step S574, the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number save area (for special figure 2), and in step S575 the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired In step S576, the acquired stop symbol number is saved in the special view 2 stop symbol area.

Next, in step S577, it is determined whether the power transmission support is in progress. If it is in the common charge support, the process proceeds to step S578, and after preparing the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table at the time of high probability and time saving, the process proceeds to step S579. On the other hand, if it is not in the common charge support state, the process branches to step S580 to prepare the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table at low probability, and the process proceeds to step S579.
In step S579, stop symbol information setting processing for setting stop symbol information corresponding to the special view 2 stop symbol (big hit symbol) is performed. The details of the stop symbol information setting process in step S579 will be described later.

Next, in step S581, the decoration special drawing command table (an decoration special drawing 2 command (ACTION) is defined in this table) is set, and in step S582 the decoration special drawing 2 corresponding to the symbol information After processing for acquiring the command (ACTION), processing for acquiring the decoration special figure 2 command (MODE) is performed in step S583, and these commands are saved in the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM (step S584) .
Then, in step S585, the jackpot symbol random number saving area (for special view 2) of RWM is cleared to 0, and the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S572 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (NO), the processing in steps S573 to S579 is not performed, and the process branches to step S586. Then, in step S586, the stop symbol number at the time of detachment is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area, and the process proceeds to step S587, and the symbol information at the time of detachment is saved in the symbol information area. Perform the processing of

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the respective big hit determination processes (step S513, step S563) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, in step S591, processing is performed to set a lower limit determination value for jackpot determination. After that, it is checked in step S592 whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, that is, the value of the big hit random number read in step S512 of FIG. If it is determined in step S593 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value, the process branches to step S594, and a deviation is set as a determination result, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value in step S593, the process proceeds to step S595 to determine whether or not it is a high probability time. This is to determine whether or not the jackpot probability is in a high state by probability fluctuation, that is, whether or not the probability of being hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (probability fluctuation state) It is to judge. If it is a high probability time, processing is performed to set an upper limit judgment value for jackpot determination at the high probability time in step S596, and then the process proceeds to step S597.
If it is determined in step S595 that the time is not high probability, the process branches to step S598 to set an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination under low probability, and then the process proceeds to step S597.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value at the high probability time and the low probability time is set, if the value of the target jackpot random number is in the zone between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value (zone), the jackpot It will be possible to judge.
Therefore, in step S597, it is checked whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (whether the upper limit determination value is exceeded) or not, and it is determined in step S598 that the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S598) If YES, it can be determined that it is not a big hit, so the process proceeds to step S594 to set a gap as a determination result and return.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S598 that the value of the target big hit random number is less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (not exceeding the upper limit judgment value) (step S598; NO), the value of the target big hit random number is the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment. It is determined that the game is a big hit while it is between the values (zone), and a big hit is set as a determination result in step S600 and the process returns.

[Stop symbol information setting process]
Next, the details of the stop symbol information setting process (step S529) in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the stop symbol information setting process (step S579) in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the stop symbol information setting process, first, at step S611, symbol information corresponding to the target stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the symbol information area.
Here, when acquiring symbol information, it is acquired from the information defined on the prepared stop symbol information table, but the contents are as follows (the same applies to each information described later).
-Symbol information-Probability fluctuation judgment flag-Number of rounds upper limit information-Major winning opening opening information-Special effect information (for example,
-Special effect information (eg, presence or absence of a promotion effect execution period to be performed after the big hit is over, etc.)
Here, the promotion effect is the following concept.
In the case of this embodiment, when hit with a normal symbol, when it reaches a specific number of rotations (for example, 20, 50, 100 turns) within a short time after the big hit end, the normal big hit probability (normal mode) to high probability It is designed to perform promotion of whether to promote to mode. This promotion effect gives a player a great sense of expectation that it may become a probability change (it becomes a high probability mode due to a probability change), and is an effect with a feeling of haraharadoki.
However, in the pachinko machine 1, whether or not it is a definite change in advance is determined in advance, but since there is only vague notification on the screen of the display device 41 that conveys the effect to the external player, the player is confident There is no condition. Therefore, by performing the promotion effect, it is possible to inform the player as to whether or not the definite variation is determined.
In addition, it is decided in advance how to promote certain variable in the promotion effect of the time (this information is also included in the special effect information), and if it is not a definite change hit, it will be directed whether to promote all three times, but all fail It will be the end of the production.

Next, in step S612, the probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination flag is saved in the probability variation determination flag area of RWM.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired in step S613, and the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round number upper limit value information area of the RWM. Subsequently, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired in step S614, and the special winning opening opening information is saved in the special winning opening opening information area of RWM. Next, in step S615, special effect information (for setting) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the special effect information (for setting) is saved in the special effect information (for setting) area of RWM, and the stop symbol information setting is made. End the process.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the special view information setting process (steps S498 and S548) in the special view 1 change start process and the special view 2 change start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special view information setting process, first, the prepared flag is saved in a symbol determination flag (for work) area as a flag indicating a target special view (step S621).
Here, as information defined on a table prepared for special drawing information, there are the following.
-Address of special figure reservation number area-Address of first half fluctuation information 1 area-Address of first half fluctuation information 2 area-Address of first half fluctuation group information area-Address of second half fluctuation group information area-Address of random number save area (variation pattern random number 1)
· Address of random number save area (variation pattern random number 2)
· Address of the second half of the variation number area · Address of the random number save area (variation pattern random number 3)

Next, in step S 622, the number of target special drawing reservations is loaded as information generation parameter 1, and in step S 623, special effect information (for distribution) is loaded as information generation parameter 2. Next, in step S624, it is determined whether or not the general power support is in progress (the concept of the general power support is as described above). If it is not during general-purpose support, the process branches to NO in step S624, and proceeds to step S625 to set a value without general-purpose support as information generation parameter 3. Next, in step S626, the former half fluctuation information 1 is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 3 and saved in the former half fluctuation information 1 area. Then, in step S627, the former half fluctuation information 2 is generated based on the information generation parameter 2 and saved in the former half fluctuation information 2 area, and the symbol information (for work) is loaded as the information generation parameter 4 in step S628. In S629, the symbol determination flag (for work) is loaded as the information generation parameter 5.
Next, in step S630, the former half fluctuation group information is generated based on the information generation parameters 4 and 6, and saved in the former half fluctuation group information area. Subsequently, the latter half fluctuation group information is generated based on the information generation parameter 1 in step S631 and saved in the target second half fluctuation group information area, and in step S632 the information generation parameters 2 and 4 and 5 fluctuation group selection table points Generate, prepare and return. Therefore, at this time, the special drawing information without the common power support is set.

On the other hand, if in step S624 normal power support is in progress, the process branches to step S633 to determine whether it is a high probability time, and when NO (when low probability), the process proceeds to step S634 and low probability as information generation parameter 3 After setting the value during the general power supply support, the process exits to step S626, and thereafter executes step S626 to step S632 to return.
Therefore, at this time, the low probability and the special map information during the general power support are set.
If it is determined in step S633 that the time is high (YES), the process branches to step S635 to check whether the first half information generation parameter 2 is executing special effects, and the check result is determined in step S636. If NO is in effect (special effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S637, and after setting the high probability and the value during the general support as information generation parameter 3, the process exits to step S626, and thereafter steps S626 to S632 Execute and return.
Therefore, in this case, the high probability and the special map information in the common charge support are set.
Furthermore, when it is determined in step S636 that the first half information generation parameter 2 is under special effect execution (YES), the process branches to step S638 to set a value at the time of special effect execution as information generation parameter 3 and then step. After the process returns to step S626, steps S626 to S632 are performed and the process returns.
Therefore, at this time, special drawing information at the time of special effect execution is set.

[Second half fluctuation pattern setting processing]
Next, the details of the second half variation pattern setting process (steps S499 and S549) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection table corresponding to the special drawing information (for example, the first special drawing etc.) set in the special drawing information setting process among the first special drawing and the second special drawing. The address of the variation group selection table corresponding to the pointer is calculated and prepared (step S641).
As information defined in the fluctuation group selection address table before calculation, there is an address of the fluctuation group selection table but there are as many as the number of fluctuation group selection table pointers.

Next, it is checked whether or not the symbol information (for work) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is the lost symbol information (step S642), and the symbol information (for work) is disconnected in step S634. If it is determined to be information (YES), the process proceeds to step S644, loads the latter half fluctuation group information from the target second half fluctuation group information area, then additionally calculates the address corresponding to the latter half fluctuation group information in step S645, It prepares as a fluctuation group selection table, and proceeds to step S646.
The information defined on the outlier fluctuation group selection table is the address of the fluctuation group selection table, but this is to be additionally calculated to change the table for each number of reservations, When the jackpot does not affect the number of pending.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S634 that the symbol information (for work) is not the removal symbol information (NO), the process jumps step S644 and step S645 to proceed to step S646.
Therefore, when the symbol information (for work) is the removal symbol information, the information corresponding to the removal is prepared.

In step S646, fluctuation pattern random number 1 composed of 2 bytes (a plurality of bytes) is loaded from the target area and prepared as a judgment random number for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern group of the special figure fluctuation display game, and thereafter At step S647, 2-byte distribution processing relating to the specification of the second half variation selection table is performed.
Next, after obtaining and preparing the address of the second half variation selection table obtained by performing 2-byte distribution processing (step S648), it is used as a determination random number for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game. The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step S649), and the sorting process (step S650) according to the specification of the latter half fluctuation number is performed.
Next, a process (step S651) of acquiring the latter half fluctuation number obtained by performing the distribution process is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number is saved in the second half fluctuation number area targeted for RWM (step S652). The second half fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps S500 and S550) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the variation pattern setting process, first of all, the first special figure and the second special figure correspond to the special figure information (for example, the first special figure etc.) set in the special figure information setting process, that is, the first half of the target A process (step S661) is performed to load first half fluctuation group information from the fluctuation group information area.
Next, the address of the first half fluctuation group table corresponding to the first half fluctuation group information is calculated (step S662), and then the second half fluctuation number is loaded from the target area (step S663). An address corresponding to the fluctuation number is calculated (step S664).

Next, it is checked whether or not the latter half fluctuation number is the number of no reach fluctuation (step S665), and if it is determined that the second fluctuation number is a no reach fluctuation number (step S666; YES), the first half fluctuation of the object The former half fluctuation information 1 is loaded from the information 1 area (step S667).
If it is determined in step S666 that the latter half change number is not the reach no change number (step S666; NO), the process branches to step S669 to load the first half change information 2 from the target first half change information 2 area, The process proceeds to step S668.
Next, in step S668, processing is performed to calculate the address corresponding to the first half fluctuation information using the table after calculation, and in step S670, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table is acquired from the calculated address and processing is performed. .
Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target area in step S671 and prepared, and in step S672, distribution processing is performed to specify the first half variation number. Next, in step S673, processing is performed to acquire and prepare the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution processing, and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps S500 and S550) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the change start information setting process, first, after clearing the save area of the RWM of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step S681), the first half change time corresponding to the first change number acquired in the change pattern setting process A process of acquiring the value of the value table (step S682) is performed, and then, a process of acquiring the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (step S683) is performed. A process (step S684) of setting a second half fluctuation time value table corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is performed.

Next, processing for acquiring a second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is performed (step S685), and then, processing for adding the acquired first half fluctuation time value and second half fluctuation time value is performed (step S686) After that, the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S687).
Subsequently, after the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is calculated and prepared (step S688), the value of the second half variation number is prepared as the variation command (ACTION) (step S689), and the command setting process ( Step S690) is performed.

Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special drawing variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special drawing command area of RWM (step S691), and the command setting process (step S692) Do.
Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command (MODE) corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (that is, related to the number of special views reserved displayed on the display device 41) is prepared (step S693), and the variation symbol determination flag The address of the random number save area of the first special figure of the RWM corresponding to is set (step S694).

Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated (-1) (step S695), and the decoration special figure reservation number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure reservation number is prepared (step S696) , And performs command setting processing (step S697).
Then, the process of shifting the random number save area of the special figure of the variation target corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag among the first special figure and the second special figure (step S698) and clearing the vacant area after the shift (step S699) ), And the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure during fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S474) in the above-mentioned special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the processing number relating to the special processing being processed) is set as the processing number in step S711, and the processing number (“1” in this case) in the special processing game processing number area in step S712. Save Next, at step S713, a flag other than waiting for customer demonstration is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area, and at step S714, a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, save the flag during fluctuation in the special view 1 fluctuation control flag area in step S715, save the initial value (for example, 200 ms) of the symbol fluctuation control timer in the special view 1 fluctuation control timer area in step S716, and end the routine. .
In this manner, processing is performed to shift to processing during special figure fluctuation with regard to special figure 1.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure during fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S 472) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to the special processing being processed) is set as the processing number in step S721, and the processing number ("1" in this case) in the special processing game processing number area in step S722. Save Next, at step S723, a flag other than waiting for customer demonstration is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area, and at step S724, a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, save the changing flag in the special view 2 change control flag area in step S725, save the initial value (for example, 200 ms) in the special view 2 change control timer area in step S726, and end the routine. .
In this manner, processing is performed to shift to processing during special figure fluctuation regarding special figure 2.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, details of the special figure variation in-progress process (step S360) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure changing process, first, in step S729, a symbol stop command is prepared, and then in step S730, a command setting process (described later) is executed for the symbol stop command (prepared in step S729). The symbol stop command instructs the effect control device 300 to stop the variable display of the special figure (decorative symbol). Note that this special view of the batch display device 35 does not change / stop due to a command, and the game control device 100 itself outputs the ON / OFF data of the LED to the batch display device 35 to control the fluctuation and the like. .
Moreover, although this example is a structure which transmits a symbol stop command to a sub board | substrate (effect control apparatus 300) from a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100) in this way, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, the sub substrate side may be configured to automatically stop the symbol (that is, to stop the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing) automatically (that is, without using a command from the main substrate) at the sub substrate side. It is not necessary to transmit the symbol stop command from the main substrate. However, also in this case, processing for receiving a symbol stop command may be left as processing on the sub-substrate side so that it can be used at the time of inspection or the like.
Subsequently, in the special figure variation process, it is checked in step S731 whether symbol information is out symbol information and if it is determined YES in step S732 (symbol information is out symbol information), the process proceeds to step S733, the second half Check if the change number is the number of no reach change. A check result is determined in step S734, and if YES (no change in reach), a special view display time pointer at the time of shift is set in step S735. Next, the special figure display time table is set in step S736, the special figure display time corresponding to the special figure display time pointer is acquired in step S737, and the special figure display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step S738. Do. Thereafter, in step S739, a transition setting process is performed during the special view display, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S734 that the latter half fluctuation number is not the no reach fluctuation number, it is determined as NO (reach fluctuation), and the process branches to step S740 to set the special view display time pointer for outreach, and then step S736. Go to and perform the following processing.
If it is determined in step S732 that the symbol information is not out symbol information (NO), the process branches to step S741 to set a special figure display time pointer at the time of big hit, and then proceeds to step S736 to perform the subsequent processing.

[Process transition setting process during special map display]
Next, the details of the process for setting the processing for transition to special images being displayed (step S739) in the above-mentioned special image variation processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the processing number relating to the special processing being displayed) is set as the processing number in step S751, and the processing number ("2" in this case) in the special figure game processing number area in step S752. Save Next, in step S753, a signal related to the special view 1 fluctuation end process is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step S754, a signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end process is saved in the test signal output data area.
Then, in step S755, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area, the stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area in step S756, and the special figure 2 fluctuation in step S757. Save the stop flag in the control flag area and end the routine.
In this manner, processing is performed to shift to processing during special image display.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step S361) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step S 761), and the big hit flag 2 area of RWM is cleared ( Step S762) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step S763), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step S764; YES), the process jumps to step S770 to clear the big hit flag 1 area of RWM. Then, in step S771, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area, and the process proceeds to step S772.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S764 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step S764; NO), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special view 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. Then (step S765), a process (step S766) is performed to clear the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM.
Subsequently, it is checked whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S767), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step S768; YES), the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area. Then (step S769), the process proceeds to step S772.
If it is determined in step S768 that no big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S787 in FIG. In this case, the process proceeds after determining whether there is a time saving.

After saving the test signal relating to the special figure 1 jackpot at step S769 or saving the test signal relating to the special figure 2 jackpot at step S771, the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step S772) is performed.
Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is saved in the round number upper limit value area (step S773). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LED pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step S774).
Next, prepare a probability information command at the time of low probability according to the information in which the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step S775) , And performs command setting processing (step S776).
Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information is prepared (step S777), and a command setting process (step S778) is performed.

Thereafter, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to stop symbol pattern information relating to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step S779), and a command setting process (step S780) is performed.
Next, save the signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (step S781), and set the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (step S782), The big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S783).
Then, after the number area of incorrect prize winnings for the special winning opening is reset (step S 784), an out-of-fair monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step S 785).

Then, transition setting processing 1 for setting various data to shift to fanfare / interval processing (step S 786), specifically, processing number “3” related to fanfare / interval processing, and switching of various states A process of setting information, etc. is performed, and the special figure variation in-process process is ended.
Here, as information for switching various states, for example, a signal indicating that the game state for output to the external information terminal board 55 is a special game state (big hit state), a common drawing fluctuation display game and a special drawing fluctuation Test signal indicating that the probability to be hit in the display game is the normal probability state (low probability state), information concerning the clearing of the number of winning prizes for the special winning port in the special winning port unfair monitoring period, special gaming state Information related to clearing the number of rounds, information to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the display of the high probability state, information to make the probability of being hit in the common view fluctuation display game the normal probability state (low probability state), power failure Information for turning off the game state display LED (high probability notification LED) related to the display of the high probability state lit at the time of recovery, information for controlling the special view change display game (for example, in the special view change display game Information that makes the probability of winning a hit result a normal probability state (low probability state), the probability of hitting a hit result in a regular drawing fluctuation display game or a special drawing fluctuation display game, which is output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery Information indicating that it is a normal probability state (low probability state), information related to clearing of the remaining time shortening fluctuation number after a big hit, and the like can be mentioned.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S768 that the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit as a result of the check of the big hit flag 1 (step S768; NO), as shown in FIG. A process (step S787) is performed to determine whether or not the time-shortening state in which the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is extended is set to the time-saving operation state.
Here, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (step S787; NO), special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step S788) for setting various data for shifting to special figure ordinary processing, specifically, A process of setting a process number "0" or the like according to the special figure normal process to the table is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S787 that the gaming state is the short time state (step S787; YES), the number of time short time changes (time is 100 times) according to the number of times the special view change display game is played in the short time operation state After updating (-1) the shortening variation count) (step S 789), a process (step S 790) is performed to determine whether the number of time variation variations after the updating is “0”.
Here, if it is determined that the number of time-saving variations is not “0” (step S 790; NO), the process proceeds to step S 788 and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S790 that the number of time variation is "0" (step S790; YES), that is, the special figure variation display game in the time saving state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time shortening operating state. Probability information command when ending the state (time saving state) of extending the opening time of the special fluctuation game and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 when the execution of) is completed. Are prepared (step S791), and command setting processing (step S792) is performed.
Next, to set various data to shift to special processing normal processing when time reduction ends Special processing ordinary processing transition setting processing 2 (when time reduction ends) (step S793), specifically, in the table, Process number "0" related to the special process normal processing, information related to the end of the state (time reduction state) to extend the opening time of the special change pattern game and the short-time operation state of the special map change display game and the common view change display game Is set, and the special view display processing ends.

[Special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (at the time of time reduction end)]
Next, the details of the special view processing shift setting process 2 (at the time reduction end) (step S793) in the special view display processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the special processing routine processing) is set as the processing number in step S801, and the processing number ("0" in this case) is added to the special processing game processing number area in step S802. Save. Next, in step S803, the signal regarding the end of time saving is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S804 the signal regarding the end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area.

  Next, in step S805, the number at the time of low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area, and in step S806, the general drawing low probability & general support no flag is stored in the common drawing game mode flag area. Next, the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area in step S807, and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area in step S808. Next, the variable symbol determination flag area is reset in step S809, the special effect information (for distribution) area is reset in step S810, and the process returns.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step S 786) in the above-described special-image display process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / in-interval processing) is set as the processing number in step S821, and the processing number (here "3") in the special figure game processing number area in step S822. Save Next, in step S823, the signal regarding the start of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S824, the signal regarding the high probability & end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area.

  Next, in step S825, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is reset, and in step S826, the round number area is reset. Next, in step S827, the number at the time of low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area, and in step S828, the general drawing low probability & general support no flag is stored in the common drawing game mode flag area. Next, the variable symbol determination flag area is reset in step S829, the high probability notification flag area is reset in step S830, the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area in step S831, and the power failure is restored in step S832. Save the probability information command (low probability) in the hour transmission command area. Next, at step S833, the time-shortening fluctuation number area is reset, and at step S834, the special effect information (for allocation) area is reset and the process returns.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step S362) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fanfare / interval process, first, after performing a process (step S 841) for updating (+1) the number of rounds in the special gaming state, the opening time of the big winning opening in each round of the special gaming state In order to determine the open time of the opening / closing member 27b (hereinafter, the same applies), it is checked whether the large winning opening opening open information is long open.
As the opening time of the special winning opening (opening time of the opening and closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27) in each round of the special gaming state, a short opening (for example, 0.8 seconds etc.) with a short opening time There is a long long open (for example, 25 seconds etc.). This determination sets, for example, a special winning opening open information determination flag, and checks whether the special winning opening open information determination flag is a long opening (for example, 25 seconds) of the opening time of the special winning opening. You should do it.

The check result in step S842 is determined in step S843, and if YES (long release of open time), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S844), and the command setting process (step S84) S845) is performed.
Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special drawing variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special drawing command area of RWM (step S846), and a command setting process (step S847) Do.
Then, a process (step S 848) for setting a long open (for example, 25000 ms = 25 seconds) of the open time as the open time (open time of the big winning opening) of the open / close member 27 b of the variable winning device 27 in each round of the special gaming state After that, the open time (open time related to long open) is saved in the special figure game processing timer (step S849).
Next, the special winning opening opening processing transition setting processing (step S850) for setting various data for shifting to the special winning opening opening processing (step S850), specifically, the processing number "4 related to the special winning opening opening processing" , A test signal concerning the opening of the big winning opening, a control signal (on signal) concerning the driving of the big winning opening solenoid 133 for opening the big winning opening, information concerning clearing of the winning number to the big winning opening, etc. Perform processing to set, and end processing during fanfare / interval.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S843 that the opening time of the big winning opening is not long opening, that is, if the opening time of the big winning opening is short opening, the process proceeds to step S851. The open time is set to short open (for example, 800 ms = 0.8 seconds), and the process proceeds to step S849.
Therefore, if the number of rounds of the big hit is 15 rounds, the opening time for the long opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer as the opening time of the big winning opening, and the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds. The opening time according to the short opening is saved as the special opening game processing timer as the opening time of the winning opening.

[A special winning opening open process processing transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing (step S850) in the above-described fanfare / interval processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "4" (corresponding to the processing number relating to the special winning opening open processing) is set as the processing number in step S861, and the processing number (here "4") in the special figure game processing number area in step S862. Save). Next, in step S863, a signal regarding the opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area. As a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening, for example, there is a signal in which the special electric character 1 is in operation.
Next, in step S864, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area, and in step S865, the special winning opening count number is reset and the process returns.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step S363) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening open process, first, it is checked whether the special winning opening opening information is a long opening (for example, 25 seconds etc.) with a long opening time (step S871). This determination is performed using, for example, a special winning opening open information determination flag.
Then, if it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening is long opening (step S872; YES), the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of RWM. Then, a process (step S873) is performed to check whether the current round has reached the upper limit (that is, the final round).

The result of the check in step S873 is determined in step S874, and as a result of the determination, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step S874; NO), prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (Step S875) A command setting process (step S876) is performed.
Subsequently, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to stop symbol pattern information relating to the decoration special drawing variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special drawing command area of RWM (step S877), and the command setting process (step S878) is performed. Do.

  Next, the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step S879) for setting various data for shifting to the special winning opening residual ball processing, specifically, the processing number “5” related to the special winning opening residual ball processing , And processing time for the special prize game processing timer to save in the special figure game processing timer, the control signal (off signal) for driving the special prize mouth solenoid 133 for closing the special prize port, etc. Go and finish the special winning opening open processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S874 that the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step S874; YES), an ending command is prepared for display control of the ending display screen etc. when the special gaming state is ended. Then, after the command setting process (step S876) is performed, the process proceeds to step S877, and the subsequent processes are performed.
That is, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special drawing variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special drawing command area of RWM (step S877), and the command setting process (step S878) is performed. After that, the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step S879) is performed to set various data for shifting to the special winning opening residual ball processing. Specifically, the processing number "5" concerning the special winning opening residual ball processing, the processing time concerning the special winning opening residual ball processing saved in the special figure game processing timer, the special winning opening solenoid for closing the special winning opening A process of setting a control signal (off signal) and the like relating to the driving of 133 is performed, and the process of opening the special winning opening is ended.

  If it is determined in step S872 that the opening time of the big winning opening is not long opening (step S872; NO), that is, if the opening time of the big winning opening is short opening (for example, 0.8 seconds), The process proceeds to step S879 without setting the interval command (step S876), setting the decoration special drawing command (step S878), and setting the ending command (step S874), and proceeds to the special winning opening residual ball processing A special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process (step S879) is performed to set various data to be set. Specifically, the processing number "5" concerning the special winning opening residual ball processing, the processing time concerning the special winning opening residual ball processing saved in the special figure game processing timer, the special winning opening solenoid for closing the special winning opening A process of setting a control signal (off signal) and the like relating to the driving of 133 is performed, and the process of opening the special winning opening is ended.

[Large winning hole remaining ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process (step S879) in the above-mentioned special winning opening open process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "5" (corresponding to the processing number related to large winning opening residual ball processing) is set as the processing number in step S881, and the processing number ("5" in this case) in the special figure game processing number area in step S882. Save). Next, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 ms) is set in step S883, the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special view game processing timer area in step S884, and then it is turned off in the special winning opening solenoid output data area in step S885. Save data and return.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step S364) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening ball game processing, first, the current round reached the upper limit value by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state under execution with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of RWM (final It is checked whether it is a round) (step S891).
Then, if it is determined that the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step S 892; NO) as a result of the check in step S 891, an interval time table is set (step S 893). The interval time corresponding to the number is acquired (step S 894), and the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S 895). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step S896) for setting various data for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing, specifically, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing Processing for setting the fanfare / in-interval processing saved in the figure game processing timer, the test signal indicating the end of operation of the variable winning device 27, etc. is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step S892; YES) as a result of the check in step S891, processing for setting an ending time table (step S897) is performed, corresponding to symbol information After obtaining the ending time (step S898), the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S899).

  Next, the big hit end process shift setting process (step S900) to set various data for shifting to the big hit end process, specifically, the process number "6" related to the big hit end process, the blockage of the big winning opening Test signal, information related to clearing each parameter in the special gaming state (for example, information pertaining to clearing the number of winnings to the special winning opening, information pertaining to clearing the number of rounds in the special gaming state, upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state Information related to clearing the value, information related to clearing the flag for determining the upper limit of the number of rounds, information pertaining to clearing the flag for opening information determination of long opening or short opening, etc. The processing to set is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing is finished.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 2 (step S896) in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / in-interval processing) is set as the processing number in step S911, and the processing number (here "3") in the special figure game processing number area in step S912. Save Next, in step S913, a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area, and the process returns. As a signal relating to the end of the special winning opening opening, for example, there is one in which the signal during the operation of the special electric combination 1 is turned off.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing shift setting process (step S900) in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "6" (corresponding to the processing number related to the big hit end processing) is set as the processing number in step S921, and the processing number ("6" in this case) is saved in the special figure game processing number area in step S922. Do. Next, in step S923, a signal related to the end of the special winning opening open (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, the special winning opening count number is reset in step S924, the round number is reset in step S925, and the round number upper limit value region is reset in step S926. Subsequently, in step S927, the round number upper limit information area is reset, and in step S928, the big winning opening open information area is reset and the process returns.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (step S365) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big hit end process, first, it is checked whether the probability variation determination flag set in the stop symbol information setting process is the high probability entry flag (step S 931), and the check result is determined in step S 932. It is determined that it is not a rush and the process proceeds to step S933.
In step S933, a big hit end setting process 1 is performed. Since this is a state in which the high probability rush is not made, the processing to shift to the mode which becomes short after the big hit is set. Next, in step S934, a probability information command corresponding to the probability fluctuation determination flag is prepared, and command processing is performed in step S935.

Next, in step S936, special effect information (for setting) is loaded and saved in the special effect information (for allocation) area. After that, set special data for transitioning to special processing routine processing special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3 (step S937), specifically, processing number "0" related to special processing routine processing, special winning opening illegality A process of setting a flag (big winning opening fraud monitoring information) or the like defining the monitoring period is performed, and the big hit end process is ended.
On the other hand, if YES (the high probability rush) in step S932, the process branches to step S938 to perform the big hit end setting process 2. Since this is a state of high probability rush, it sets processing to shift to a mode in which probability fluctuation (high probability start) is made after the big hit ends. Then, the process after step S934 is performed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (step S933) in the above-described big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, at step S941 a signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area. The signal relating to the start of the short in this area is, for example, the jackpot 2 signal ON. Next, in step S942, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals for the start of the short in this region are:
・ Special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal ON
・ Special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening status signal ON
・ Normal pattern 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal ON
・ Normal electric role 1 open extension status signal ON
Next, the time saving number is saved in the game state display number area in step S943, and the low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area in step S945. Next, in step S946, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area, and in step S947 the time saving change frequency initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the time saving change frequency area and returned.
In this manner, processing is performed to shift to a mode in which time is short after the big hit ends.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step S938) in the above-described big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, at step S951 a signal regarding the start of the high probability is saved in the external information output data area. The signal relating to the start of the high probability in this region is, for example, the jackpot 2 signal ON. Next, in step S952, a signal related to the start of the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals for the start of the short in this region are:
・ The special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON
・ Special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON
・ Special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal ON
・ Special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening status signal ON
・ Normal pattern 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal ON
・ Normal electric role 1 open extension status signal ON
Next, in step S953, the number at the time of high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area, and in step S954, the common drawing high probability & common support flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area. Next, in step S955, the high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Next, in step S956, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area, and in step S957, the time-shortening fluctuation number area is reset and the process returns.
In this way, processing is performed to shift to a mode in which a high probability is obtained after the big hit.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step S 937) in the above-described big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the special processing routine processing) is set as the processing number in step S961, and the processing number (here "0") is set in the special processing game processing number area in step S962. Save. Next, in step S963, a signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area.
As a signal regarding the end of the big hit here, there are a big hit 1 signal OFF and a big hit 3 signal OFF.

Next, in step S964, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area. Here are the signals for the end of the big hit:
・ Condition device in operation OFF signal
・ The signal is turned off while the continuous product operating device is in operation.
・ OFF the signal per special symbol 1 or the signal per special symbol 2
Next, the probability fluctuation determination flag area is reset in step S965, the round LED pointer area is reset in step S966, and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area in step S967, and further in step S968. Reset the special effect information (for setting) area and return.

Next, we will move on to the description of the flowchart related to the common drawing game processing, but here, the explanation will be made using "step B" as the step number.
[Puppet game processing]
First, the details of the regular game processing (step S79) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 122, control of the entire processing related to the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of the common drawing, and the like are performed.
First, gate switch monitoring processing (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a general prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) is performed to monitor the input from the second start port switch 121. In addition, the details of the routine compensation switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, it is checked whether the regular drawing game processing timer has already timed up or the regular drawing game processing timer is updated (-1) and whether the game processing timer has timed up (step B3). If it is determined that the regular drawing game processing timer has timed up (step B4; YES), the common drawing game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the common drawing game processing number is set in the register (step B5) ) And the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the common drawing game processing number is acquired using the table (step B6).
Then, after the processing (step B7) for saving the return address after the end of the branch processing to the stack area is performed, the game branch processing (step B8) is performed according to the game processing number.

If the game processing number is "0" in step B8, the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game and the setting of the effect, and the processing during common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing routine processing (step B9) is performed to set the information necessary for the execution.
The details of the common drawing routine processing (step B9) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "1" in step B8, a common drawing variation processing (step B10) is performed to set information necessary for performing the common drawing display processing.
In addition, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B10) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "2" in step B8, and the result of the common drawing change display game is a hit, the common use release according to whether or not the normal change winning device 37 is in support. A general drawing display processing (step B11) is performed to set the time, set information necessary for performing the common drawing processing, and the like.
The details of the general-diagram display-in-progress process (step B11) will be described later.

If the game processing number is "3" at step B8, the processing of the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the setting of the information necessary for performing the general electric bulb remaining processing Perform step B12).
In addition, the details of the common process per process (step B12) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "4" in step B8, general electric ball remnant ball processing (step B13) is performed to set information necessary for end processing per common drawing.
The details of the routine charge ball processing (step B13) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "5" in step B8, a per-diagram generalization end process (step B14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the per-diagram ordinary process (step B9).
The details of the end processing per common drawing (step B14) will be described later.
Thereafter, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol by the common drawing display (collective display device 35) (step B15), the control of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol by the common drawing display (collective display device 35) The symbol variation control process (step B16) according to is performed, and the regular game processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the regular drawing game processing timer has not timed out (step B4; NO), the process proceeds to step B15 to perform the subsequent processing.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described standard game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 is checked (step B21). Then, if it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B22; YES), the common drawing reservation number is obtained and it is checked whether the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (step B23) If it is determined that the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B24; YES), the general drawing reservation number is updated (+1) (step B25).

Thereafter, after the process (step B26) of calculating the address of the random number save area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is performed, the process (step B27) of saving the acquired hit random number in the random number save area of RWM is performed. To complete the gate switch monitoring process.
Also, if it is determined in step B22 that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B22; NO), or if it is determined in step B24 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit ( Step B24: NO) The gate switch monitoring process is ended.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the routine prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described regular drawing game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the Futo prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the regular drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) ) Is checked (step B31). Then, if it is determined that the drawing is in the middle (step B32; YES), it is checked whether or not there is an input to the second start port switch 121 (step B33), and there is an input to the second start port switch 121. When it is determined (step B34; YES), the processing (step B35) of updating (+1) the count number of the common charge counter is performed.

Next, it is checked whether or not the count number of the updated common charge counter has reached the upper limit (for example, 9) (step B36), and the count has reached the upper limit (step B37; YES). If it is determined, the hit value "4" of the end is hit in the processing control pointer area in the middle of the normal drawing (step B38). Thereafter, the common drawing game processing timer is cleared to "0" (step B39), and the general electric winning switch monitor processing ends.
In other words, if there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, then at that point the normal processing control pointer for the common drawing is set and the end is set. Make the hit state in the figure end on the way.

  Also, in step B32, it is determined that a common drawing is not in progress (step B32; NO), or in step B34, is it determined that there is no input to the second start port switch 121 (step B34; Also, if it is determined in step B37 that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step B37; NO), the routine prize winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the ordinary drawing routine processing, first, whether or not the ordinary drawing reservation number is "0" is checked (step B41), and if it is determined that the ordinary drawing reservation number is "0" (step B42; YES), After the routine proceeds to step B70 and the ordinary drawing transition processing transition setting processing 1 is performed, the ordinary drawing routine processing ends. The common drawing routine processing shift setting processing 1 is a process for repeating the common drawing routine processing next time, and the details will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B42 that the common drawing reserve number is not 0 (step B42; NO), the process proceeds to step B43, and the probability that the common drawing variation display game is hit is higher than usual. It is determined whether or not it is in the probability state (that is, at the time of the common drawing high probability).
Here, if it is determined that it is not at the common drawing high probability (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is in support) (step B43; NO), the probability that it will be hit in the common drawing fluctuation display game is not high probability state Then, the random number is loaded from the random number save area and prepared (step B44), and the judgment value at the time of the low probability of common drawing is set (step B45).
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the value of the hit random number matches the determination value (step B46), and if it is determined that the value of the hit random number does not match the determination value (step B47; NO), the hit flag area After saving the misplacement information (step B48), a process (step B49) is performed to set the stop symbol number at the time of misplacement to the common figure stop symbol. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B50, where the random number save area is cleared to "0" (step B50).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B47 that the value of the hit random number matches the determination value (step B47; YES), the hit flag area is saved after the hit information is saved (step B51), and the symbol stop symbol is hit A process (step B52) of setting the stop symbol number of the hour is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B50, where the random number save area is cleared to "0" (step B50).
Also, if it is determined in step B43 that the drawing probability is high (step B43; YES), the probability of becoming a hit result in the drawing fluctuation game is high probability state, so from the random number save area The random number is loaded and prepared (step B53), and a process (step B54) is performed to set the lower limit judgment value when the drawing probability is high.
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the value of the random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step B55), and if it is determined that the value of the random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step B56; NO), A process (step B57) is performed to set the upper limit judgment value of.
Then, it is checked whether or not the value of the random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B58). After shifting and saving the hit information to the hit flag (step B51), processing to set the stop symbol number at hit to the common drawing stop symbol is performed (step B52), and thereafter, the processing is shifted to step B50 A process (step B50) is performed to clear the random number save area to "0".

  Also, in step B56, it is determined that the value of the random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B56; YES), or it is determined in step B59 that the value of the random number is greater than the upper limit determination value. Also in the case (step B59; YES), the process proceeds to step B48, and after the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B48), the process of setting the stop symbol number at the time of shift to the common stop symbol (Step B49) is performed, and then the process proceeds to Step B50.

By the way, when the process proceeds to step B50 through step B49 or step B52, after the process (step B50) to clear the random number save area to 0 is performed, then, the stop symbol number in the common pattern stop symbol area Is saved (step B60), and the signal corresponding to the common figure stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B61).
Subsequently, the random number save area is shifted (step B62), and the free space after the shift is cleared to "0" (step B63). To perform the process (step B64).
That is, as the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation 1 is executed, the process of raising the positions of the common drawing reservations 2 to 4 which are being held after the common drawing reservation 1 is performed one by one become. As a result of this process, the value (for example, hit random number) for common drawing reservation 4 from common drawing reservation 2 of per random number save area is moved from common drawing reservation 1 for per random number save area to common drawing reservation 3 It becomes. Then, the value for common drawing reservation 4 of the hit random number save area is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, a process (step B65) is performed to determine whether the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is in support (during normal power support), and when it is determined that normal power support is in progress (step B65; YES), A process (step B66) of setting a fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) of the general drawing at the time of support is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step B67, the fluctuation time of the common drawing when there is the common power support set in step B66 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer (step B67), and the process proceeds to step S68.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B65 that normal support is not in progress (step B65; NO), the process branches to step B69 to set the fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) of the spread diagram when there is no power support The process (step B69) is performed, and then, the process proceeds to step B67, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing without the common charge support set in step B69 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer.
Then, after passing through the process of step B67, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B68) is performed to shift to the general drawing variation processing, and the general drawing routine processing is ended.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the ordinary drawing routine processing transition setting process 1 (step B70) in the ordinary drawing routine processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the ordinary process) is set as the process number in step B81, and the process number (“0” in this case) is added to the ordinary game Save. Next, at step B83, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. By this, it shifts to the common drawing normal processing next time.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to normal processing during normal processing in the above-mentioned normal processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, Step B91 sets "1" (corresponding to the process number related to the processing during general drawing variation) as the processing number, and the process number (here "1") in the general drawing game processing number area at Step B92. Save Next, in step B93, a signal relating to the start of common drawing fluctuation (for example, a signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B94, a fluctuation flag is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area. Next, at step B95, the fluctuation timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control timer area, and the process returns. By this, the processing shifts to the processing during the general fluctuation.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing variation-in-progress processing (step B10) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B101, a process transition setting process is carried out during the display of a common drawing. This is to make settings for shifting to processing during the display of a common drawing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[Processing transition setting processing during common map display]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to general processing during general processing during the processing of general fluctuation during the above processing (step B101) will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, "2" (corresponding to the process number related to the processing in the general drawing display) is set as the processing number in step B111, and the processing number ("2" in this case) in the common drawing game processing number area Save Next, in step B113, a common drawing display time is set (for example, 600 ms). Next, save the common drawing display time in the common drawing game processing timer area in step B114, and save the signal related to the common drawing fluctuation end (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal OFF) in the test signal output data area in step B115. . Next, in step B116, the stop flag is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control timer area, and the process returns. By this, the processing shifts to the processing of displaying the common drawing next time.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, the details of the general drawing display processing (step B11) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the ordinary drawing display process, first, the hit flag set in the ordinary drawing normal process is loaded (step B121), and a process of clearing the hit flag area is performed (step B122).
Next, it is checked whether the loaded hit flag is hit or not (step B123), and if it is determined that the hit flag is not hit (step B124; NO), the process branches to step B125 and processing for ordinary processing transition setting 1 (described with reference to FIG. 69), and the routine is ended during the display of the common drawing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B124 that the hit flag is hit (step B124; YES), processing (step B126) is performed to determine whether the power transmission support is in progress.
If it is determined that the general power support is in progress (step B126; YES), processing (step B127) is performed to set the general power release time (for example, 1.7 seconds) when the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is in support. After that, a process (step B128) is performed to set a hit start pointer when the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is in support. That is, when the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is in support, the hit start pointer (for example, hit start pointer “0” to “4”) so that the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is two or more times. And so on, but in this case "0" is set. Subsequently, the hit pointer is saved in the processing control pointer area during the common drawing, and the start pointer is saved (step B129).
Next, after saving the common use open time (for example, 1.7 seconds) set in step B127 in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B130), the common movement per processing common setting process (step B131) Do. This is to make settings for shifting to processing during a common drawing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step B126 that general power support is not in progress (NO), processing branches to step B132 to set the general power release time (for example, 0.3 seconds) when there is no support by the normal fluctuation winning apparatus After that, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 performs a process (step B133) of setting "4" as a hit start pointer when there is no support. When the hit start pointer is set to “4”, the number of opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B129.
If the process proceeds to step B129 by this route, the hit pointer (in this case, "4" in this case) is saved in the middle processing control pointer area per common drawing, and in step B130 the general power supply set in step B132 is released A time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the common game processing timer area, and in step B131, the common processing per process common processing transition setting process is performed, and the process returns.

[Per process of processing transition setting processing per common map]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing (step B131) per common drawing in the processing of the common drawing display described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing in the common drawing) is set as the processing number in step B141, and the processing number ("3" in this case) in the common drawing game processing number area in step B142. Save Next, in step B143, a signal relating to the start per common drawing (for example, the signal per normal symbol 1 is turned on) and a signal regarding the start of power operation (for example, the signal during normal motor vehicle 1 operation is turned on) Save to Next, in step B144, save the ON data in the common power solenoid output data area, reset the common power count number in step B145, and then reset the common power misappropriation number in step B146. The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the period flag area, and the process returns. By this, next time it moves to the middle processing per common drawing.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the per-diagram normal process (step B12) in the above-mentioned figurative game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the processing during the drawing, the processing control pointer for the drawing is loaded and prepared first (step B151), and the processing control pointer for the drawing is loaded and the hit end value (for example, "4", etc.) Is checked (step B152), and if it is determined that the hit is not the end value (step B153; NO), the process (step B154) of updating (+1) the processing control pointer area during the common drawing Do.
Next, a routine operation shift setting process (step B155) is performed. Here, control of the operation of the common charge is performed. Then return.
If it is determined in step B153 that the value is the hit end value (step B153; YES), the processing in step B154 is not performed to update (+1) the processing control pointer during the common drawing. In step B155 to perform the subsequent processing.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the general-purpose power transition setting process (step B155) in the above-described middle-round process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a branch is performed by the control pointer in step B161. Here, the process branches depending on the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B151. Specifically, if the control pointer is "0" or "2" in step B161, the process branches to step B162 to set a wait time (for example, 800 ms), and in step B163, the common game processing timer area The wait time is saved, and in the following step B164, the data is saved by turning off the common power solenoid output data area, and then the process returns. As a result, the closing time after the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is opened becomes the above-mentioned wait time, and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 26 is closed in that period.

On the other hand, if the control pointer is "1" or "3" in step B161, the process branches to step B165 to set the general power release time (for example, 1700 ms) at the time of general power support, and in step B166 the general drawing game After the general-purpose open circuit time is saved in the processing timer area and the data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in step B167, the process returns. As a result, the open time of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is the above-mentioned common power release time, and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is opened during that period.
If the control pointer is "4" in step B161, the process branches to step B168 to set "4" as the process number, and in step B169 the process number ("4" in this case) Save). Next, in step B170, set the general processing residual ball processing time (for example, 600 ms), save the general control residual ball processing time in the general drawing game processing timer area in step S171, and continue the general control solenoid output data in step B172. Save the OFF data in the area and return. Therefore, when the control pointer is "4", the control for releasing the normal charge is ended, and the information necessary for performing the next general ball remaining ball processing is set.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B13) in the above-described regular game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, at step B181, processing for setting end processing transition per common drawing is performed. This is to set for shifting to the end processing per common drawing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[Process for setting end processing transition per common drawing]
Next, the details of the processing for shifting to the end processing shift setting processing (step B181) per common drawing in the above-described normal charge residual ball processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "5" (corresponding to the processing number for ending processing per common drawing) is set as the processing number in step B191, and the processing number ("5" in this case) in the common drawing game processing number area in step B192. Save Next, in step B193, the general drawing ending time is set (for example, 100 ms), and in step B194, the ending time is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area, and in step B195 1) Save the operation signal (OFF)) to the test signal output data area. Next, at step B196, the common charge count number is reset, and at step B197, the processing control pointer area is reset for each drawing, and the process returns. As a result, the process proceeds to the end processing per common drawing next time.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-figure end process (step B14) in the above-mentioned ordinary-figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, at step B201, processing 2 for transition to ordinary processing is set. This is to perform setting for shifting to the common processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing transition setting process 2 (step B201) in the above-described common drawing end processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the ordinary process) is set as the process number in step B211, and the process number (“0” in this case) is added to the ordinary game process number area in step B212. Save. Next, in step B213, a signal related to the end per common drawing (for example, the signal per normal symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, at step B214, a fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. By this, next time, it shifts to the common drawing normal processing.

The flowchart related to the common game processing has been described above. Next, the subroutine of step S80 and subsequent steps in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described.
Here, the description will be made using “step C” as the step number.
[Segment LED editing process]
First, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LEDs provided in the collective display unit 35 (FIGS. 2, 4 and 5), and the collective display unit 35 displays the common view and the special view as described above. Furthermore, the display of the start memory of the special drawing or the common drawing is displayed (special drawing holding display, common drawing holding display) or the display of the game state.
These displays are configured to be performed by, for example, a plurality of displays (for example, one lamp or 7-segment display) using an LED as a light emission source. More specifically, for example, the special figure 1 reserve indicator, the special figure 2 reserve indicator, the general drawing reserve indicator, the first gaming state indicator, the second gaming state indicator, the error indicator, the round indicator, etc. It is segment LED edit processing that is configured with segment LEDs having a function, and performs settings relating to their driving and the like.

In the segment LED editing process, first, a process (step C1) of updating (+1) the display control timer is performed.
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the display control timer is the output ON timing (step C2), and when it is determined that the output ON timing is (step C3; YES), processing of setting the lighting pointer as the blinking control pointer (step After C4), the process proceeds to step C5.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C3 that the output ON timing is not reached (step C3; NO), the process branches to step C6 to set the turn-off pointer as the blinking control pointer (step C6), and then the process proceeds to step C5. Transition.
Here, the determination as to whether or not the output ON timing is to monitor the state of a specific bit, and if this monitored bit is “1”, it is determined that the output ON timing is present, while the monitored bit is If it is "0", it is determined that it is not the output ON timing.
In particular, in the present embodiment, when bit 5 of the display control timer is "1", it is determined that the output ON timing is reached. At this time, for example, it is set to blink for 128 ms.

When the process proceeds from step C4 or step C6 to step C5, in step C5, the acquired display data is obtained after acquiring the display data corresponding to the common drawing reserve number and the blinking control pointer set in step C4 or C6 Are stored in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the general drawing hold indicator). Then, after acquiring display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number, the acquired display data is saved in a segment area (for example, a segment area of the special drawing 1 reservation indicator) (step C7).
Subsequently, after acquiring display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number, the acquired display data is saved in a segment area (for example, a segment area of the special figure 2 reservation display) (step C8).

Next, after acquiring display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, the acquired display data is saved in a segment area (for example, a segment area of a round display unit) (step C9).
Subsequently, after acquiring display data corresponding to the gaming state display number, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the first gaming state display portion or the second gaming state display portion) (step C10) ).

Next, the high probability notification flag related to the notification that the jackpot probability state is the high probability state at the time of the power failure restoration is checked (step C11), and it is not the timing to notify the high probability (step C12; If determined, the OFF data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the error display unit) (step C13), and the segment LED editing process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C12 that it is the timing to notify the high probability (step C12; YES), step C13 is skipped and the segment LED editing process is ended.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality, and setting of start and end of fraud notification is performed.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor detection signal bit output from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and taken into the second input port 162 (input port 2) is checked (step C21), and the input of the magnetic sensor detection signal is If it is not determined (step C22; NO), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C23).
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the magnet fraud notification timer specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud has already timed out, or the magnet fraud notification timer is updated (-1), and then the timer has timed out (step C24) ). If it is determined that the time is not up (step C25; NO) in the determination result of whether or not the magnet fraud notification timer has timed up, the process returns and repeats the routine.
If it is determined that the time is up (step C25; YES) in the determination result of whether the magnet fraud notification timer has timed up by repeating the routine, the magnet fraud notification end command (ACTION) is prepared ( Step C26) After performing the processing (step C27) of setting the magnet fraud release flag as the magnet fraud flag, the process proceeds to step C34, and the subsequent processing is performed. In this case, even if the routine is repeated, the notification of the fraud is not performed because it is a normal state in which the fraud is not occurring. That is, the magnet fraud alerting timer is always in a time-up state.

On the other hand, if the fraud using the magnet is performed and it is determined in step C22 that there is an input of the magnetic sensor detection signal (step C22; YES), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is updated (+1), and then the timer is timed. It is checked whether or not it is up (step C28), and if it is determined that the time is not up (step C29; NO), the process branches to step C24 to perform the subsequent processes. In the determination of whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out, it is determined that the monitoring timer is 8 with time up. That is, it is determined that the time is up because the input of the magnetic sensor detection signal is interrupted eight times and continuously performed. This is because the sensing of the magnetic sensor switch 125 is 4 ms and it is judged that the occurrence of the fraud is occurring in 32 ms, so if it is interrupted eight times and there is an ON input of the magnetic sensor detection signal, it can be judged as fraud.
Therefore, when the input of the magnetic sensor detection signal is continuously performed for a predetermined period, that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 interrupts), the time for the magnet fraud monitoring timer is up in step C29 (step C29; YES). If determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C30), and then the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C31).

Next, a magnet fraud notification command (ACTION) is prepared (step C32), and the magnet fraud occurrence flag is set as the magnet fraud flag (step C33), and then the set magnet fraud flag is compared with the value of the magnet fraud flag region ( Step C34). If the set magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (Step C35; NO), it is determined that a magnet fraud has newly occurred, and the process proceeds to Step C36, and the set magnet fraud flag is not a magnet fraud flag Save to area. Thereafter, command setting processing is performed (step C37), and the process returns.
Therefore, at this time, the fraudulent notification is performed by the continuous ON input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125. That is, the start of fraud notification is performed. The notification of the illegal start is started (that is, the illegal notification command is generated) when the ON input of the magnetic sensor detection signal continues for 32 ms as described above.

On the other hand, if the set magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C35; YES), the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 does not change, so updating of the command once set is Return without doing. At this time, the same magnet fraud continues.
After that, when there is no injustice, there is no ON input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 in step C22, and the process branches to NO in step C22, and the process proceeds to step C23 and subsequent steps. At this time, in step C37, setting of a fraud notification end command is performed.

In addition, if the input of the magnetic sensor detection signal is not performed for a fixed period, that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 interrupts) continuously, it means that the occurrence of the magnet fraud has not been determined yet (during notification of fraud) After the magnet fraud monitoring timer is determined not to have timed out (step C29; NO) in step C29, the process proceeds to step C24, and the subsequent processes are performed. .
Therefore, with regard to the fraud notification termination command, the fraud notification termination command will be set when 60000 ms elapses from the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (60000 ms) from the start of the fraud notification command. That is, while the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is on and about 60000 ms (60 seconds) after the signal is turned off, the false notification is performed, and the false notification is continued as long as the signal is turned on. It will be.
In summary, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is turned on, it is determined that the fraud has occurred 32 ms later, and the fraud notification command is set, and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is turned on every 32 ms while the detection signal is on. When the monitoring timer times up and returns to the initial value and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is turned off, the fraudulent notification continues for about 60000 ms (60 seconds) from that point, and the fraud occurrence state is released after 60000 ms, An unauthorized notification end command is set.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S82) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, step C41 unique information signal editing processing is performed. This is for acquiring the unique information (unique ID) of the main substrate, and the details will be described later.
Next, in step C42, it is checked whether the security signal control timer has already timed out after time-up or "-1" update. The security signal control timer is to check an illegal state or a gaming machine error state at regular intervals. The check result is determined in step C43, and if NO, the process proceeds to step C44 to determine whether the unique information output request has been made. The unique information here is the unique information of the main board, that is, the unique ID.
If the unique information output request has not been made at step C44, the process proceeds to step C45 to set the output request flag of the unique information signal at power on, and at step C46, the output requested flag of the unique information signal at power on is set. . As a result, the unique ID (specific information of the main board) is output to the outside when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (for example, at the time of opening the store). After passing through step C46, after setting the output data of the security signal ON in step C47, the process proceeds to step C48.

If it is determined in step C44 that the output of the unique information has already been requested, the processing skips steps C45 and C46 and proceeds to step C47.
On the other hand, if the security signal control timer has already timed up in step C43 after time-up or "-1" update, the process branches to step C49 to clear the output requested flag of the specific information signal at power on, and step After setting the output data of the security signal OFF at C50, the process proceeds to step C48. That is, if the security signal control timer has already timed up, the setting of the external output of the information related to security is not performed.

Next, in steps C48, 51, 52, it is determined whether there is a magnet fraud, a big winning opening fraud, or a general electric charge fraud. If any one or more frauds have occurred, the process proceeds to step C53 to set output data of the security signal ON, and further set output data of the gaming machine error state signal ON at step C54.
As a result, an illegal state or a gaming machine error state is output to the outside. On the other hand, if NO at step C48, NO at step C51, NO at step C52, that is, if all steps are NO at steps C48, 51, 52, the process branches from step C52 to step C55 and the gaming machine error status signal OFF. Set output data.

After step C54 or step C55, the process proceeds to step C56, and it is determined whether the door or frame is in the process of being opened. Here, the door is the glass frame 5, and the opening of the door is detected by the glass frame open detection switch 211. Further, the frame is the front frame 4, and the opening of the frame is detected by the front frame opening detection switch 212.
If the door or frame is being opened, the process proceeds to step C57 to determine whether the unique information output has been requested or not. If NO (not requested), the unique information signal at the door / frame open is determined at step C58. After setting the output request flag and setting the output requested flag of the specific information signal at the door / frame opening at step C59, the process proceeds to step C60. Therefore, at this time, when the glass frame 5 or the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened (for example, including the unauthorized opening), the unique ID (specific information of the main substrate) is output to the outside. .

When the process proceeds from step C59 or step C57 to step C60, the output data of the door / frame open signal ON is set in step C60, the output data of the gaming machine error state signal ON is set in step C61, and the process proceeds to step C62. This is to output an error signal to the outside when an event of opening the door or frame occurs.
On the other hand, when NO at step C56, that is, when the door or frame is not open, an event of opening the door or frame does not occur, and there is no need to set such output data, so the process branches to step C63. Then, the output request completion flag of the specific information signal at the door / frame opening is cleared, and at step C64, the output data of the door / frame opening signal OFF is set, and the process proceeds to step C62.

In step C62, it is determined whether or not the big hit is in operation. If the big hit is in operation, whether or not the unique information output is requested is determined in step C65. If NO (not requested), the big hit is in step C66. After setting the output request flag of the specific information signal at step C67 and setting the output requested flag of the specific information signal at the big hit in step C67, the process proceeds to step C68. Therefore, at this time, when the jackpot of the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the unique ID (specific information of the main substrate) is output to the outside.
On the other hand, if a unique information output request has been made at the time of a big hit in step C65, the process jumps steps C66 and 67 and proceeds to step C68.
In step C68, the output data of the jackpot 1 signal ON is set, and then the process proceeds to step C69 to perform the starting opening signal editing process, and the subsequent step C70 performs the symbol determination frequency signal editing process and returns. This is to edit a signal to be output to the outside upon editing of a signal to be output to the outside when there is a start winning, or to determine a symbol of a special drawing.
On the other hand, when the big hit operation is not in progress at step C62 (NO), the process branches to step C71 to clear the output request flag of the unique information signal at the big hit, and sets the output data of the big hit 1 signal OFF at step C72. Proceed to step C69. Therefore, when a big hit does not occur, there is no output of the unique ID (specific information of the main board) to the outside.

[Specific information signal editing process]
Next, details of the unique information signal editing process (step C41) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step C81 whether serial communication is in progress. This is to determine whether the game control apparatus 100 is executing serial communication with the management apparatus 140 (or may include the card unit 551). If serial communication is in progress, the process returns. If the serial communication is not in progress, the processes after step C82 are executed. The game control apparatus 100 and the management apparatus 140 are uni-directional communication, and only signal transmission from the game control apparatus 100 to the management apparatus 140 is permitted. Therefore, the determination as to whether or not serial communication is in progress is performed by checking whether the serial transmission buffer in the game control device 100 is in communication.
If serial communication is not in progress, it is checked in step C82 whether the output request flag of the specific information signal is set. If NO in step C83 (the output request flag is not set), the routine ends and returns. On the other hand, if YES in step C83 (the output request flag is set), the process proceeds to step C84 to clear the output request flag of the unique information signal.
Here, the output request flag of the specific information signal is set independently in response to the "power on security signal", the "door / frame open signal", and the "big hit 1 signal". If a plurality of conditions are established simultaneously, priority is given to process one by one. Thus, not all output request flags are cleared at one time.
Next, CPU specific information acquisition processing is performed in step C85. This is processing for acquiring unique information, which will be described later in detail. After step C85, the process returns.

[CPU specific information acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the CPU unique information acquisition process (step C85) in the above-mentioned unique information signal editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C91, the start code is written to the serial transmission buffer in the game control apparatus 100. It is a code for causing the management apparatus 140 that is the receiver to specify that it is the start of serial communication. Next, in step C92, it is determined whether acquisition is only the chip code (main substrate unique ID), and if acquisition is only the chip code, the process jumps to step C97 to write the chip code identification code into the serial transmission buffer, step C98. The chip code as individual identification information (unique ID) is read out, written to the serial transmission buffer, and returned. As a result, the unique ID is acquired and output to the management device 140.

  On the other hand, if the acquisition is not only the chip code at step C92, the process proceeds to step C93 to write the maker code identification code into the serial transmission buffer, and at step C94, the maker code is read and written to the serial transmission buffer. Next, in step C95, the product code identification code is written to the serial transmission buffer, and in step C96, the product code is read and written to the serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step C97. As a result, the maker code and the product code are acquired and output to the management device 140. Therefore, when the acquisition is not only the chip code in step C92, the maker code, the product code, and the chip code are sequentially acquired and output to the management apparatus 140.

As described above, by utilizing the serial transfer (transmission) function provided in advance in the game control apparatus 100, there is no need to prepare transfer (transmission) processing again by a program (for example, a game program), so that the program configuration It is efficient.
Further, compared to parallel transfer (transmission), the number of wires is reduced, which results in cost reduction.
The unique ID and the like are transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the management apparatus 140 by serial communication as described above, but may be transmitted by parallel communication, for example.

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, the details of the starting opening signal editing process (step C69) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 are input.
When the routine starts, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", the processing (step C101) of updating (-1) is performed. The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to zero.
Next, it is checked whether or not the start-up signal output control timer, which is decremented by a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) each time the timer interrupt is performed, is timed up (step C102). If it is determined that the start opening signal output control timer is up (step C103; YES), it is checked whether the number of start opening signal outputs is 0 (step C104).

Here, if it is determined that the starting opening signal output count is not 0 (step C105; NO), the starting opening signal output count is updated (-1) (step C106), and then the starting opening signal is output to the starting opening signal output control timer area. The output control timer initial value (for example, 192 ms) is saved (step C107).
Here, as the starting opening signal output control timer initial value, the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the starting port signal and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) are added Save the time (for example, 192 ms).
This is because the start-up signal output control timer set to the initial value, for example, 128 ms, starts decrementing (update (-1)) at the same time when the start-up signal turns on (high level). Even if the start port signal is turned off (low level) after the on-state time (128 ms), the start port signal output control timer continues to decrement and the progress after the start port signal is turned off This is because the timing configuration is such that when the time (64 ms) elapses, the start opening signal output control timer becomes timed up (“0”).
Next, a process (step C108) of setting ON data of the starting opening signal is performed. Thereafter, a process (step C109) of saving the starting opening signal set to ON in step C108 in the external information output data area is performed, and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
If it is determined in step C105 that the number of times the starting opening signal is output is 0 (step C105; YES), the process branches to step C110 to set OFF data of the starting opening signal, and then proceeds to step C109. The process proceeds to save the starting opening signal set to OFF in the external information output data area, and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C103 that the starting opening signal output control timer is not time up (step C103; NO), the process branches to step C111 and the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) Whether or not the start opening signal output control timer is in the output ON interval is checked depending on whether or not it is.
Then, if it is determined that the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output ON interval (step C112; YES), the processing proceeds to step C108 to perform processing (step C108) for setting ON data of the starting opening signal. A process (step C109) of saving the starting opening signal set to ON in the external information output data area is performed, and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
If it is determined that the start opening signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C112; NO), the process proceeds to step C110 to set OFF data of the start opening signal, and then proceeds to step C109. A process of saving the starting opening signal set to OFF in the external information output data area is performed, and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

[Pattern fixed number signal editing process]
Next, details of the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step C90) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is set in step C121, and it is determined in step C122 whether the symbol determination frequency signal control timer has already timed out or timed out after (-1) update. To check. This is because the symbol is determined after a predetermined time has elapsed for the symbol determination of the special figure, and a signal is output to the outside, so that the elapsed time is counted by the timer.
The determination result in step C122 is determined in step C123, and if the symbol determination frequency signal control timer is not up (NO), the process proceeds to step C124, sets ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal, and proceeds to step C125 . At step C125, the symbol determination number signal (ON data in this case) set at the previous step C124 is saved in the external information output data area, and the process returns.

Then, the routine is repeated, and if it is determined in step C123 that the symbol determination number signal control timer has timed up (YES), the process jumps to step C125 and the symbol determination number signal set in step C121 above (in this case, OFF data) Are saved in the external information output data area and return.
In this manner, the symbol of the special drawing is determined after a predetermined time, and is output as external information.

Command setting process
Next, details of each command setting process executed during the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the command setting process, first, a process (step C131) of updating the write counter that defines the write location of the buffer is performed. The write counter is updated by (+1) in the range of “0” to “31”.
Subsequently, the command is saved in the command transmission area (MODE) corresponding to the write counter (step C132). This is because the upper one byte command of the two byte commands corresponds to (MODE), so it is saved.
Thereafter, the command is saved in the command transmission area (ACTION) corresponding to the write counter (step C133). This is to save the lower 1 byte command of the 2 byte command because it corresponds to (ACTION). After passing through step C133, the process returns.
In this way, the upper 1 byte command of the 2 byte command is saved in the command transmission area (MODE) corresponding to the write counter, and the lower 1 byte command is saved in the command transmission area (ACTION).

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process in step S367 and S369 of the special figure game process described above and step B16 of the common-play game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C141, it is checked whether or not the change control flag (read from (i) below) of the target symbol is changing.
Here, the information defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in advance is as follows.
(A) Address of variation control flag area (B) Address of symbol display table (for variation) (C) Address of symbol display table (for stopping) In addition, information defined on the symbol display table (for variation) Is as follows.
(D) Address of variation symbol number area (E) Display data (There are several minutes of variation symbol number)
(F) Address of segment area Further, the information defined on the symbol display table (for stopping) is as follows.
(G) Address of stop symbol number area (H) Display data (There are several minutes of stop symbol number)
(I) Segment area address

The check result in step C141 is determined in step C142, and if it is changing (YES), the process proceeds to step C143 to obtain a symbol display table (for variation) (above (b)) corresponding to the target symbol . Next, at step C144, the target fluctuation timer is updated by (-1), and it is checked whether the time has expired. The check result in step C144 is determined in step C145, and if time is not up (NO), the process jumps to step C148 to load the value of the target variable symbol number area as a display symbol pointer. Next, in step C151, display data ((E), (H) above) corresponding to the display symbol pointer is acquired, and in the following step C152, the acquired display data is the target segment area (E), (E), Save to ()) and end the routine.
Therefore, at this time, since the variation timer of the target symbol does not time out, the display data of the symbol corresponding to the symbol number for variation is saved in the target segment area, and the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C145 that the target fluctuation timer has timed out (YES), the processing proceeds to step C146, and the symbol fluctuation control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the target fluctuation timer area. Next, after updating the target variable symbol number ((D) above in step C147, the process proceeds to step C148, loads the value of the target variable symbol number area as a display symbol pointer, and in step C151 The corresponding display data is acquired, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step C152), and the routine is ended.
Therefore, at this time, when the variation timer of the target symbol has timed out, the timer initial value is saved, the variation symbol number is updated, and the display data of the symbol is saved in the target segment area.

On the other hand, if the variation control flag of the target symbol is not changing but is stopping at step C142 (NO), the process branches to step C149, and the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol (C)), and after loading the value of the target symbol number area as a display symbol pointer in step C150, proceed to step C151, acquire display data corresponding to the display symbol pointer, and acquire The display data is saved in the target segment area (step C152), and the routine is ended.
Therefore, at this time, the symbol display data for stop is saved in the target segment area by stopping from the change control flag of the target symbol being changed.

[Distribution process]
Next, details of the sorting process (step S650) in the above-mentioned second half fluctuation pattern setting process and the sorting process (step S672) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step C161, it is checked whether or not the top data of the target selection table (the variation group selection table) is a no-distribution code.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group, and, for example, if distribution is not necessary, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If it is determined that the first data in the selection table is a code without distribution (step C162; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step C168), and the distribution process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C162 that the first data in the selection table is not a code without distribution (step C162; NO), the target variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 2) is loaded as a selection value. (Step C163) The one distribution value defined first in the selection table is acquired (Step C164).
Subsequently, a new selection value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step C164 from the selection value (for example, the value of the variation pattern random number 2) loaded in step C163 (step C165). It is determined whether the calculated new selected value is smaller than "0" (step C166).

Here, if it is determined that the new selected value is not smaller than "0" (step C166; NO), the address is updated to the address of the next distributed value (step C167), and then the process returns to step C164 to repeat the loop. .
That is, after the distribution value defined next in the selection table is acquired in step C164, the new selection value is subtracted by using the new selection value determined in step C166 as the selection value. Calculate (step C165). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new selected value is smaller than "0" (step C166).
The above process is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step C166 that the new selected value is smaller than "0" (step C166; YES). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation pattern group is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern group defined in the selection table.
When it is determined in step C166 that the new selected value is smaller than "0" (step C166; YES), the process proceeds to step C168, and the data is updated to the address corresponding to the distributed result. (Step C168), the distribution process ends.

Thus, it is used, for example, to select one more detailed one from the second-half fluctuation pattern group distributed by the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (random number for reach variation detail aspect determination) fluctuation pattern 1. For example, from the group of normal reach type, select a specific effect pattern such as a normal reach pattern to stop falling off, -2 coma shift, +1 coma shift, etc. with a symbol that is shifted from the hit symbol by -1 coma . This is because the variation time changes depending on the number of frames for sending the special image. In addition, for example, when it hits with SP 1-A (special 1-A) reach system, it is the pattern which the design usually aligns, the pattern which reappears reminiscently as if it deviates once, and it aligns (so-called relief effect) (of course There are various modes such as changing time is longer when changing again.
Therefore, when the data at the top of the selection table is not a code without distribution by executing this distribution process, a new value is stored based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the selection value related to the determination. By calculating the selection value and repeating the process of determining whether or not the new selection value is less than the predetermined value “0”, any one fluctuation pattern group is quickly set among the plurality of fluctuation pattern groups. I am able to do that.

[2-byte distribution process]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step S647) in the above-mentioned second half fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern group of the special view fluctuation display game from the fluctuation group selection table such as the out-of-out fluctuation pattern selection table or the big hit fluctuation pattern selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 .
In particular, the process is performed when the size of the random number is 2 bytes, and the data of 2 bytes is, for example, "0" to "49999".
When this routine is started, first, at step C171, it is checked whether or not the top data of the target selection table is a no-distribution code.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group, and, for example, if distribution is not necessary, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If it is determined that the first data in the selection table is a code without distribution (step C172; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step C178), and the 2-byte distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C172 that the first data in the selection table is not a code without distribution (step C172; NO), the target variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 1) is loaded as a selection value. (Step C173), one distribution value defined first in the selection table is obtained (Step C174).
Subsequently, a new selection value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step C174 from the selection value (for example, the value of variation pattern random number 1) loaded in step C173 (step C175). It is determined whether the calculated new selected value is smaller than "0" (step C176).

Here, if it is determined that the new selected value is not smaller than "0" (step C176; NO), the address is updated to the address of the next distributed value (step C177), and then the process returns to step C174 to repeat the loop. .
That is, after the distribution value defined next in the selection table is acquired in step C174, the new selection value is subtracted by using the new selection value determined in step C176 as the selection value. Calculate (step C175). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new selected value is smaller than "0" (step C176).
The above process is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step C176 that the new selected value is smaller than "0" (step C176; YES). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation pattern group is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern group defined in the selection table.
Then, if it is determined in step C176 that the new selected value is smaller than "0" (step C176; YES), the process proceeds to step C178 and is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (Step C178), the 2-byte distribution process ends.

Thus, for example, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (randomness for reach fluctuation mode determination) determines whether or not the reach state is generated in the special view fluctuation display game, and the special view fluctuation when the reach state occurs. The selection table relates to the determination of the reach fluctuation mode in the display game, and the selection table corresponds to a fluctuation group selection table such as an out-of-out fluctuation pattern selection table or a big hit fluctuation pattern selection table.
And the fluctuation group selection table such as the outlying fluctuation pattern selection table and the big hit fluctuation pattern selection table is the presence or absence of the reach state in the special figure fluctuation display game and the reach of the special figure fluctuation display game when the reach state occurs. According to the type (reach variation mode), a plurality of types of second half variation pattern groups are defined, and the ROM 101B storing the variation group selection table is a first special figure and a second special figure (special figure variation display game As a variation mode of identification information), a plurality of variation distribution information (latter half variation pattern group) relating to each setting of a no reach variation mode and a plurality of reach variation modes in which a reach state is not generated It matches and memorizes in order.
Therefore, when the data at the top of the selection table is not a code without distribution by executing this 2-byte distribution process, based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the selection value related to the determination, By calculating a new selection value and repeating the process of determining whether the new selection value is less than the predetermined value “0”, any one fluctuation pattern group among the plurality of fluctuation pattern groups can be rapidly determined. It can be set to.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG.
Here, the description will be made using “step D” as the step number. Note that the special view controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special view for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special view in the description of the control processing of the effect control device 300 below is It means the decorative design which is not this special figure.

[Power on reset processing]
First, the power on reset process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The power on reset process starts when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 starts, the interrupt is first inhibited in step D1, then the CPU 311 is initialized in step D2, then the VDP 312 is initialized in step D3, and then the interrupt is executed in step D4. Then, the main process of step D5 is started. When the main process is started, the main process is executed until the power is cut off (including a power failure).

[Main processing]
Next, the main process (step D5) in the power on reset process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the main processing is started, first, in step D11, wireless module initialization processing for initializing the wireless module 360 is executed, steps D12 to D16 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D17. Although this example is an example of performing communication between sub-boards in different pachinko machines (in this case, between effect control devices, hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as sub-subs) by wireless communication, it is limited to wireless communication Alternatively, wired communication may be used.

At step D12, the base address of the VDP 312 register is set. This is because the address space differs depending on the type of the CPU 311 and its setting, so the base address is set, and various designations are made based on the difference from that.
In step D13, generation of display data is permitted. This is processing for permitting the display circuit 608 to access the VRAMs 606 and 607 to generate display data.
In step D14, a random number seed is set. This is processing for setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like is used so as to be different for each gaming machine. It is also good.

  At step D15, a terminal ID is set. This is processing for setting an ID for each stand (that is, for each gaming machine) based on the setting of the setting SW 371, for example. Although the individual ID of the wireless module 360 or the like may be used as the terminal ID to be set, it is easier to specify the position information of the gaming machine in the island if the setting is manually performed by the setting SW or the like. It is easy to assign to the unit number of. That is, it is difficult to specify the position information from the magnitude of the numerical value if the ID of the wireless module is not arranged in ascending order at the time of installation of the gaming machine, but the setting is performed manually by the setting SW etc. For example, if the value of this terminal ID is set in order of the installed position, for example, it is easy to specify the installed position information from the value of this terminal ID. However, the method of setting the terminal ID from the ID of the wireless module or the like has an advantage of being able to be set automatically without bothering the human hand. On the other hand, setting of the terminal ID by the setting SW needs to set a different number for each machine by the operation of a person, so that it may not be possible when busy, such as when introducing a gaming machine. Further, when using the ID of the communication module, there is an advantage that the cost is not increased because the setting SW is unnecessary. Since there are advantages and disadvantages as described above, it is necessary to select the setting method of the terminal ID according to the effect desired to be performed by the inter-sub-substrate communication. In this example, effects such as making the notice character appear sequentially on the display devices 41 of the gaming machines from the gaming machine at the left end of the island (ie, the arrangement of gaming machines in the island (from the left ID1, ID2, ID3,... ID10) In order to be able to realize the effect that needs to be specified), the setting method by the setting SW, which is easy to specify the position information of the table, is taken as an example. The terminal ID is provided to, for example, identify a transmission destination or a transmission source in sub-substrate communication.

At step D16, initialization of the effect flag area (storage area used as various flags described later) is performed.
Next, in step D17, steps D17 to D24 are performed, and the process proceeds to step D25.
In step D17, a random number update process is performed. This is, for example, processing of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main processing using the rand function. Since the rand function generates random numbers based on the specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. In addition, you may use the random number which updates +1 each like a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100).

At step D18, a reception command check process (described later) is executed.
In step D20, an inter-sub transmission start process is performed. This is processing for permitting the inter-sub transmission interrupt when there is a request for inter-sub command transmission. Note that depending on the effect, there may be cases where it is not desirable to send a command immediately, so time adjustment is also performed (described in detail later).
In step D21, inter-sub-reception task processing is performed. This is a process that mainly analyzes the received inter-sub command (described in detail later).
In step D22, inter-sub ack response task processing is executed. This is processing for monitoring when ack (reply) is requested to another machine (described in detail later).

In step D23, an inter-sub presentation effect setting process is performed. This is processing for controlling the effect corresponding to the received inter-sub command (described in detail later).
At step D24, an effect display editing process is performed. This is processing for setting various commands and parameters for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 (described in detail later). In the effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands thus set are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D28 (instruction for screen drawing) described later.

  In step D25, it is determined whether it is a frame switching timing. If it is a frame switching timing, steps D26 to D32 are sequentially executed. If it is not a frame switching timing, this step D25 is repeated. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to the processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds3333.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing which arrives at a regular interval. By the process of step D25, the subsequent processes (steps D26 to D32 and the subsequent steps D17 to D24) are performed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. In addition, time management which needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in units of this frame (that is, in units of the processing cycle). In the case where the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, three frames result in 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

At step D26, the watchdog timer is cleared.
In step D27, if there is a compression expansion request, the expansion execution is instructed. This is processing for instructing the VDP 312 to expand and reproduce while reproducing the moving image because the moving image is compressed and stored in the character ROM (image ROM 322). (Details will be described later).
At step D28, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
At step D29, an effect button input process is performed. This is processing for editing when the effect button 9 is pressed when activated. Since the effect button is not turned on and off at a high speed, the process of sensing the button input may be performed within this process, or may be performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown).

At step D30, a sound control process is performed (described in detail later).
In step D31, decoration control processing for controlling various LEDs and the like is performed.
At step D32, motor / SOL control processing for controlling various motors and SOL (solenoid) is executed.
Note that the control processing in steps D30 to D32 is performed in these steps in which switching of operations is performed in units of processing cycles in order to match the effects on the screen, but the signals generated or set in these control processing The process of actually outputting data (particularly various LEDs and signals for driving and controlling the motor, etc.) to the port is performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when using an IC specialized for control of various devices, there is also a case where the output of a signal or the like is not performed by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 (main substrate) by the effect control device (sub substrate), and the data constituting the command falls within the normal range. Content to check if it is included.
In the case of this example, the case where communication between the main substrate and the sub substrate is performed by parallel communication using a strobe signal (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an STB signal) will be described as an example.
The command reception interrupt process is started when the strobe signal described in the control process of the game control device 100 (main substrate) is turned on and a command reception interrupt occurs in the effect control device 300 (sub substrate). That is, the strobe signal output from the main substrate is also input to an interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 311 of the sub substrate, and the command reception is performed by turning on the strobe signal input to the interrupt terminal. An interrupt occurs. Here, this command reception interrupt has higher priority than the V blank interrupt described above. Further, although the command reception interrupt occurs irregularly as described above, when the main board transmits the command continuously, the generation of the command reception interrupt in the sub board corresponding to the transmission interval (for example, 4 msec) occurs. The intervals are also the same (for example, 4 msec).
The command from the main board is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), which are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

When this routine is started, the reception monitoring timer is first stopped in step D41, and then it is determined in step D42 whether the STB signal of the port input is off. If it is off, the mode reception flag is "NG" in step D59. Is returned (end of this routine), and if it is not off (ie, if it is on), the command from the main board being input at this time is input (read) at step D43. Note that since parallel communication of 8 bits is performed, data of 1 byte (8 bits) is input at a time in step D43.
Here, the determination result in step D42 is normally NO, and the process proceeds to step D43. This routine is started by turning on the STB signal as described above. However, if a command reception interrupt has occurred abnormally due to noise or the like, the decision result in step D42 becomes YES if the STB signal of the port input is off, the process proceeds to step D59, and the command is erroneously received due to noise It is avoided that the process (steps D43 to D58) is performed.

After step D43, in step D44, whether the command data input in step D43 is in the MODE range or not is determined based on the value of the data, and if it is in the MODE range, the process proceeds to step D45 and the one in the MODE range If not, it proceeds to step D48 because it is in the ACTION range. The MODE range is a range of values in 1 byte that can be set as data of MODE, and the ACTION range is a range of values in 1 byte that can be set as data of ACTION, and is determined in advance. .
At step D45, the command data input at step D43 is stored as a reception MODE, then at step D46 the MODE reception flag is set to "OK", and at step D47 the value of the reception monitoring timer is reset to zero. Then, the timing operation of the reception start timer is started, and then the process returns. As used in step D45, simply storing means reading and storing data in a predetermined storage area so as to be used for the control process to be performed later (the same applies in the following).

  In step D48, it is determined whether the value of the MODE reception flag is "OK". If "OK", it is further determined in step D49 whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out, and if it has not timed out, step D50 Go to When the value of the MODE reception flag is not "OK" in step D48 and when the time out in step D49, the command can not be received normally, so "NG" is set to the MODE reception flag in step D59. It returns after being done. If the value of the MODE reception flag is not "OK" in step D48, for example, although command data in the ACTION range is received, it is abnormal because command data in the MODE range is not received prior to that. If timed out in step D49, it is abnormal because command data in the ACTION range is not received within the specified reception monitoring time counted by the reception monitoring timer from the time when command data in the MODE range is received. .

At step D50, the command data input at step D43 is stored as a reception ACTION. At step D51, the value of the MODE reception flag is set to "NG", and the process proceeds to step D52.
In step D52, it is determined whether the value of the command reception counter is larger than 31. If the value is larger, the capacity of the command buffer to be described later is exceeded, so the process returns. move on. Although the value of the command reception counter is 0 to 31 and the process proceeds to step D53, the value of 0 to 31 is a value corresponding to the capacity of the command buffer to be described later. The number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in 1/30 seconds) is sufficient.

At step D53, a rendering operation corresponding to the reception MODE and reception ACTION is prepared, then at step D54 a reception command range check process (described later) is executed, and then the procedure goes to step D55.
In step D55, it is determined whether the range check is OK or not. If it is not OK, the process returns to discard the command (reception MODE and reception ACTION). If it is OK, steps D56 to D58 are sequentially executed and then the process returns. Here, the determination result of the range check in step D55 is range check OK (Yes in step D55) if the command range normal flag is set in the reception command range check process described later, and the reception command range check process described later If the command range abnormality flag is set in step S5, the range check is not OK (No in step D55).

At step D56, the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are stored in the command buffer. The command buffer is a so-called ring buffer in this example, and has a prescribed capacity (the number of commands that can be stored and held). The command buffer is configured of, for example, a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311.
At step D57, updating is performed to increase the value of the command reception counter by one.
At step D58, since data has been stored (that is, written) in the command buffer, updating is performed to increase the value of the command write index by 1 within the range of 0 to 31. The command write index is a write pointer for the command buffer, and the value of this command write index is in the range of 0 to 31 in this example, but this range is the capacity of the command buffer (in this case, 32) And, as described above, the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board during one cycle of the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; eg, 1/30 seconds). Just do it.

[Received command range check process]
Next, the details of the reception command range check process (step D54) in the above-described command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D61 whether the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is within the normal range, and if not within the normal range, the command range abnormal flag is set in step D67 and the process returns. If it is in the range, steps D62 and D63 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D64. As for the value of MODE, if not all of the values in the MODE range are defined in the command contents, and some values are not used and not defined, and if such values are not used, step It is determined in the determination of D61 that the range is not within the normal range.

In step D62, the minimum value (ACTION_min) among the possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is acquired. In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control processing as described above means that the data is taken out from the ROM (the PROM 321 in the effect control device 300 of this example).
In step D63, the maximum value (ACTION_max) of the possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is acquired.
In step D64, it is determined whether the value of the received ACTION stored in step D50 is smaller than the minimum value obtained in step D62. If smaller, the process proceeds to step D67 because it is abnormal. Go to step D65.

In step D65, it is determined whether the value of the received ACTION stored in step D50 is larger than the maximum value acquired in step D63. If it is larger, the process proceeds to step D67 because it is abnormal. Go to step D66.
In the case of proceeding to step D66, since it is normal, the command range normal flag is set, and the process returns. In the case of proceeding to step D67, since it is abnormal, the command range abnormal flag is set and the process returns.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the details of the received command check process (step D18) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the value of the command reception counter is first loaded as the command reception number in step D71, and then it is determined in step D72 whether the command reception number is not zero, and if not zero, steps D73 to D75 are sequentially After execution, the process proceeds to step D76, and if it is zero, the process returns. In the present application, “loading data” in the control processing means extracting data from the RAM (RAM in the CPU 311 in the effect control device 300 of this example) in the control processing as in the step D71.

At step D73, the content of the command reception counter area (ie, the value of the command reception counter) is subtracted by the number of command receptions.
Here, assuming that A: a value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D71. Then, it is a normal movement that “A = A−B = 0” immediately after the execution of step D73, but in the aspect of this example (in the case of parallel communication using a strobe signal as the command from the main board), Since the control device gives top priority to the command reception interrupt from the game control device (main substrate) without interrupting it, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73. . Therefore, if the process of step D73 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted, so that the subtraction process of “A−B” is performed in step D73. Is going. However, when serial communication is used to transmit and receive commands from the main board, interrupts are disabled to prevent the value of A from increasing between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73, The processing content of step D73 may be “A ← 0”.

In step D74, the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer in step D56, hereinafter simply referred to as the command buffer) (ie, command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer) Copy to storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311 that configures a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.
At step D75, since the data of the command buffer has been read, the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, is updated by increasing it by 1 within the range of 0 to 31. Here, the range of 0 to 31 may be in the same range as the command write index updated in step D58.

  In step D76, it is determined whether copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (ie, whether steps D74 and D75 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands) or not. Returning to step D74, the process is repeated, and if completed, the process proceeds to step D77.

At step D77, the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, ie, the data to be read next) are loaded (ie, read), For the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command), a received command analysis process (described later) is executed in the next step D78, and then the process proceeds to step D79.
In step D79, the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read out next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D80.
In step D80, it is determined whether or not analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (ie, whether steps D77 to D79 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands) or not, and if not completed, the process returns to step D77. The process is repeated from step D77, and if completed, the process returns.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step D78) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, at step D91, the values of ExMode and ExAct are cleared. ExMode and ExAct are storage areas in which command data is separated into upper bytes and lower bytes and recorded respectively in steps D125, D127, and D158 described later.

  After step D91, in step D92, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is stored separately in MODE and the lower byte in ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D93. In the case of a variable system command instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands a first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands a second variation pattern It is a thing.

  In step D93, it is determined whether or not the data of MODE is within the variable system command range 1. If it is within this range, steps D94 and D95 are sequentially executed to advance to step D96. Here, the data of MODE is the data of MODE stored separately in step D92 (the same applies to steps D99, D111, D112, D113, D114, D131, D132, D145, D146 described later). In addition, the commands of the variation system for instructing the variation pattern of the special figure are grouped into the same type, and the range of possible values of the command data belonging to the first group (normal variation system) is a variation system The command range is 1. Similarly, the range of possible values of command data belonging to the second group (reach variation system) is variation system command range 2, and the range of possible values of command data belonging to the third group (burst variation system) varies. System command range 3

In step D94, a symbol type information table of the normal variation system is prepared. The symbol type information table is a table for setting the type of symbol of the special view corresponding to the command data. The data of the symbol type information table etc., that is, various information (for example, data of various tables) used in the control process of the effect control device 300 are stored in the PROM 321 together with the operation program.
At step D95, a variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (described in detail later) for setting symbol type information corresponding to the current command is executed.

At step D96, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D95. If invalid command information is returned, the present command is returned as invalid command and invalid. If no command information is returned, it is determined that the command is valid, and the process proceeds to step D97.
At step D97, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st (the first command of the first and second commands forming a set), and at step D98, it corresponds to the fluctuation pattern instructed by the current command. The symbol type information (set in the variation pattern-corresponding symbol setting process of step D95) of the special figure to be stored is stored as standby symbol information, and then the process proceeds to step D162. In the standby symbol information, when it is possible to determine the type of the special figure symbol to be set from the first command (such as a variable system command) transmitted prior to the symbol command (second command) described later, the corresponding symbol command It is classification information (that is, symbol information) of the said special figure memorized and saved before receiving.

At step D99, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the variation system command range 2. If it is within this range, steps D100 and D101 are sequentially executed to advance to step D102. If outside this range, the procedure proceeds to step D111. .
In step D100, a symbol variation information table of the reach variation system is prepared.
In step D101, variation pattern corresponding symbol setting processing (described later) is executed for the current command.

At step D102, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D101, and if invalid command information is returned, the current command is regarded as an invalid command and returns and invalid. If no command information is returned, it is determined that the command is valid, and the process proceeds to step D103.
At step D103, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and then at step D104, symbol information of the special figure corresponding to the fluctuation pattern instructed by the current command (set by the fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting process of step D101) Stored) as standby symbol information, and then proceeds to step D162.

At step D111, it is determined whether or not the data of MODE falls within the fluctuation system command range 3. If it is within this range, steps D115 and D116 are sequentially executed to advance to step D117. .
In step D115, the symbol type information table of the sudden change system is prepared.
In step D116, fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting processing (described later) is executed for the present command.

At step D117, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D116. If invalid command information is returned, the present command is returned as invalid command and invalid If no command information is returned, the process proceeds to step D118 as a valid command.
At step D118, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and then at step D119, the symbol information of the special figure corresponding to the fluctuation pattern instructed by the current command Stored) as standby symbol information, and then proceeds to step D162.

At step D112, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the big hit system command range. If it is within this range, steps D120 and D121 are sequentially executed to advance to step D162, and if outside this range, the procedure proceeds to step D113. The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) relating to a big hit medium effect, and the range which can be taken by data of the big hit system command is a big hit system command range.
At step D120, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and then at step D121, symbol information (information such as 15R big hit symbol, 2R big hit symbol etc.) corresponding to ACT data of the current command is stored. It is stored as standby symbol information, and then the process proceeds to step D162.
Here, in steps D120 and D121, data of MODE and ACT are not unconditionally adopted. Although not shown, for example, a check for missing data of MODE data is performed, and it is checked after checking whether the value of a normal ACT corresponding to that MODE is adopted, and it is invalidated in any of these checks. If the command is determined to be a normal command, the data of MODE and ACT are discarded and the process returns.
The checkout of MODE data means that it is determined whether or not the MODE data to be checked corresponds to an invalid value in a portion where the possible values of MODE are not continuous. The missing data check of the MODE data is a determination as to whether the determination in step D112 or the like is greater than or equal to the minimum value and less than the maximum value that the data of MODE can take (determination in which the discontinuous portion is not checked). In this case, it is executed, for example, immediately before the step D120 as necessary. If there is no discontinuity in the value of MODE, this missing tooth check is unnecessary. In addition, in steps D93, D99, D111, and D112, and steps D113, D114, D131, D131, D132, D145, D146, and D172 described later, such a omission check of MODE data is also included in the determination contents as necessary. In the case of this configuration, it is not necessary to separately execute the missing data check of the data of MODE. In addition, there may be tooth gaps (discontinuous portions) in the normal value of ACT, and in this case, for example, when checking whether the value of normal ACT corresponding to MODE is the data of this ACT In addition to the range check, it is configured to perform a tooth missing check.

At step D113, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol command range. If it is within this range, step D122 is executed to proceed to step D123, and if outside this range, the procedure proceeds to step D114. The symbol command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special figure, etc.), and the possible range of data of this symbol command is the symbol command range.
At step D122, the symbol information of the special view corresponding to the data of ACT of the command (symbol command) of this time is acquired.

In step D123, the symbol information acquired in step D122 is compared with the standby symbol information at that time (the symbol information set in any of steps D98, D104, D119, and D121 described above), and both match If it does, it will progress to step D124, and if both do not correspond, it will progress to step D126. Although the determination result in step D123 is normally positive (the two match), when an abnormality such as a command value abnormality (the value of the command changes to an abnormal value due to noise or the like) occurs, It becomes negative (the both disagree).
In step D124, stop symbol information to be generated corresponding to symbol information acquired in step D122 is set, and the procedure proceeds to step D125.
At step D125, the upper byte of command data stored as cmd1st is set as ExMode (data of decided MODE), the lower byte is separated and stored as ExAct (data of decided ACT), and then at step D126. move on.
In this step D125, after storing the command data as ExMode and ExAct, processing is also executed to delete the command data stored as cmd1st. As a result of this deletion, the determination result of step D162 described later is NO.
At step D126, the standby symbol information is cleared, and the process proceeds to step D162.

In step D114, it is determined whether the data in MODE is a one-shot command. If it is a one-shot command, steps D127 and D128 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step D162. In addition, unlike the commands (ie, the first command and the second command) that make sense in combination as in the variable system command and the symbol command, the command that is established independently is referred to as a single command. The single-shot commands include a customer wait demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error / illegal system command, a model specification command, and the like.
At step D127, the data of MODE of the current command is stored as ExMode, and the data of ACT of the current command is stored as ExAct.
At step D128, the standby symbol information is cleared, and the process proceeds to step D162.
Here, in steps D127 and D128, data of MODE and ACT is not unconditionally adopted as in the above-described steps D120 and D121. Although not shown, for example, a check for missing data of MODE data is performed, and it is checked after checking whether the value of a normal ACT corresponding to that MODE is adopted, and it is invalidated in any of these checks. If the command is determined to be a normal command, the data of MODE and ACT are discarded and the process returns.

  At step D131, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead fluctuation command range 1. If it is within this range, steps D133 and D134 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step D135. move on. Here, the look-ahead change system command is a command instructing a change pattern of a special figure for performing pre-read (for example, a big hit notice of a special figure), and commands of the same look-ahead change system are grouped Among them, the range of possible values of command data belonging to the first group (prefetch normal fluctuation system) is the prefetch fluctuation system command range 1. Similarly, the range of values that can be taken by the command data belonging to the second group (reach variation change system for pre-reading) is the pre-reading variation system command range 2, and command data belonging to the third group (disruptive change system for pre-reading) can be taken The range of values is the look-ahead change system command range 3.

In step D133, a symbol type information table of a pre-reading normal variation system is prepared.
In step D134, fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting processing (described later) is executed for the current command.

At step D135, it is determined whether invalid command information has been returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D134. If invalid command information is returned, the present command is regarded as an invalid command and returns and invalid. If no command information is returned, it is determined that the command is valid, and the process proceeds to step D136.
At step D136, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and then at step D137 the symbol type information of the special figure corresponding to the fluctuation pattern instructed by the current command (the fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D134) The set value is stored as waiting symbol information, and then, in step D138, pre-reading information setting processing 1 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D162. The pre-reading information setting process 1 and the pre-reading information setting process 2 described later are processes for performing setting for executing the fluctuation pattern of the special drawing (or the start display of the start storage) when pre-reading is performed.

At step D132, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead variation system command range 2. If it is within this range, steps D139 and D140 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step D141. move on.
In step D139, a symbol type information table for the prefetch change flag is prepared.
In step D140, fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting processing (described later) is executed for the current command.

At step D141, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D140. If invalid command information is returned, the present command is returned as an invalid command, and invalid. If no command information is returned, it is determined that the command is valid, and the process proceeds to step D142.
At step D142, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and then at step D143, the symbol type information of the special figure corresponding to the fluctuation pattern instructed by the current command (the fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D140) The set value is stored as waiting symbol information, and then, in step D144, pre-reading information setting processing 1 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D162.

At step D145, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead fluctuation system command range 3. If it is within this range, steps D150 and D151 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step D152. move on.
In step D150, a symbol type information table of a sudden change system for read ahead is prepared.
In step D151, fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting processing (described later) is executed for the current command.

At step D152, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D151, and if invalid command information is returned, the present command is returned as an invalid command, and invalid. If no command information is returned, it is determined that the command is valid and the process proceeds to step D153.
At step D153, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, then at step D154 the symbol type information of the special figure corresponding to the fluctuation pattern instructed by the current command (the fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting process at step D151) The set value is stored as standby symbol information, and then, in step D155, pre-reading information setting processing 1 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D162.

At step D146, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the pre-reading symbol command range. If it is within this range, step D156 is executed to proceed to step D157, and if outside this range, the procedure proceeds to step D162. The pre-reading symbol command is a command for instructing information (for example, what stop symbol of the special drawing is to be made, etc.) regarding the symbol of the special drawing when the pre-reading is performed, and the possible range of data of this pre-reading symbol command is It is a look-ahead symbol command range.
In step D156, symbol information of the special view corresponding to the data of ACT of the present command is acquired.

In step D157, the symbol information acquired in step D156 is compared with the standby symbol information at that time (the symbol information set in any of steps D137, D143, D154, etc. described above), and both match For example, if the two do not match, the process proceeds to step D159. Note that although the determination result in step D157 is normally positive (the two match), when an abnormality such as a command value abnormality (the value of the command changes to an abnormal value due to noise or the like) occurs, It becomes negative (the both disagree).
At step D158, the upper byte of command data stored as cmd1st is set as ExMode, the lower byte is separated and stored as ExAct, and then the process proceeds to step D159.
In this step D158, after storing the command data as ExMode and ExAct, processing is also executed to delete the command data stored as cmd1st. As a result of this deletion, the determination result of step D162 described later is NO.
In step D159, the standby symbol information is cleared, and in step D160, the pre-reading information setting process 2 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D162.

In step D162, it is determined whether there is a setting of command data as cmd1st. If there is a setting of cmd1st, step D163 is performed and then the process proceeds to step D147. If cmd1st is not set, step D163 is not performed. Go to D147.
Here, if any of the above-described steps D97, D103, D118, D120, D136, D142, and D153 is executed, the setting of this cmd1st is present (that is, the determination result of step D162) Will be YES). Further, if any of the above-described steps D125 and D158 is executed and the setting of cmd1st remains erased, this setting of cmd1st is none (that is, the determination result of step D162 is NO). Become). Therefore, step D163 is executed when cmd1st (first command) is received.
In step D163, of the storage areas of the RAM of the CPU 311, areas requiring initialization are initialized with corresponding default values.
In the area requiring initialization to be initialized in step D163, the contents are given by the first command and second command (for example, a jackpot symbol command forming a pair with a rendering screen command such as a fanfare command) that exerts an effect in combination. Contains an area for storing the information determined by For example, it includes an area for storing information (such as stop symbol information) related to the variation of the special drawing and an area for storing information (such as information on the big hit symbol, the number of rounds, the count number) regarding the big hit screen. According to step D163, at the time of receiving the first command of the first command and the second command that exerts an effect as a group, the information on the effect determined by the first command and the second command is stored. Region to be initialized once. Here, the area storing the information whose content is determined by the second command of the type or system different from the received first command is also initialized (for example, when a big hit system effect screen command such as a fanfare command is received) Not only the storage area of the information determined by the jackpot symbol command forming a pair with this effect screen command, but also the area storing the information determined by the fluctuation pattern command of the variation system and the stop symbol command, for example, is initialized).
At step D147, it is determined whether or not ExMode is set. If not, the process returns. If yes, the process proceeds to step D148. Here, the setting of ExMode means that data is stored as ExMode. Also, "No setting of ExMode" means that the data of ExMode remains cleared. Note that ExMode is cleared in the step D91.
At step D148, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is other than the fluctuation system command (including the prefetch fluctuation system command). If it is other than the fluctuation system command (including the prefetch fluctuation system command), the process proceeds to step D149. If the command is a command (including a prefetch change system command), the process proceeds to step D161.
At Step D149, the received command separate initialization process 1 (described later) is executed, and then the process returns.
At step D161, received command separate initialization processing 2 (described later) is executed, and then the process returns.

[Variation pattern corresponding symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (child module) executed in steps D95, D101, D116, D134, D140, and D151 in the above-described received command analysis process (parent module) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D171, valid symbol type information corresponding to the data of ACT stored in step D92 described above is obtained, and the process proceeds to step D172. The acquisition of the symbol type information is performed based on the symbol type information table set in the immediately preceding step (for example, in the case of step D95, the preceding step D94).
In addition, in the case of this example, there are three patterns of “detachable symbol”, “2R big hit symbol”, and “15R big hit symbol” as symbol type information. However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, types such as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol of the number of rounds other than 2R or 15R may be set, and the setting of this symbol type changes depending on the specifications of the model.

  In step D172, the MODE data (upper byte data stored in step D92 described above, the same applies to steps D178, D179, and D180) falls within the variation command range (steps D134, D140, and D151). If this routine is being executed, it is determined whether or not it is within the read-ahead variation system command range), and if it falls within this range, the process proceeds to step D173, and if it is out of this range, it is judged as abnormal. Here, the “variable system command range” is a range including all of the above-described variable system command range 1, variable system command range 2, and variable system command range 3. Further, the “prefetch variation command range” is a range including all of the above-described prefetch variation command range 1, prefetch variation command range 2, and prefetch variation command range 3. That is, in this step D172, the command normality is checked in a wider range than the above-mentioned steps D93, D99 and the like.

  In step D173, it is determined whether the symbol type information acquired in step D171 is an out symbol. If it is an out symbol, an ACT matching check table corresponding to data of MODE is acquired in step D178, and the process proceeds to step D181. If it is not a symbol, the process proceeds to step D174. Here, the out-of-time ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be present as ACT (lower byte data of a command) in the case of out-of-pattern.

  In step D174, it is determined whether the symbol type information acquired in step D171 is 2R big hit symbol or not, and if 2R big hit symbol, 2R big hit ACT matching check table corresponding to MODE data is obtained in step D179 and step D181 Proceed to step D175 if it is not a 2R jackpot symbol. Here, the 2R big hit time ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be as ACT (lower byte data of a command) in the case of the 2R big hit symbol.

  When the process proceeds to step D175, it is determined whether the symbol type information acquired in step D171 is 15R big hit symbol, and if 15R big hit symbol, 15R big hit ACT matching check table corresponding to MODE data is obtained in step D180 and step D181 The process advances, and if it is not the 15R big hit design, invalid command information is returned in step D176 and the process returns. Here, the 15R big hit time ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be as ACT (lower byte data of a command) in the case of the 15R big hit symbol.

At step D181, the operation at step D182 and step D183 is sequentially performed by branching at step D184 until the end of the check table (obtained at any of the immediately preceding steps D178, D179 and D181). .
Here, in step D182, the contents of the table (ie, the data corresponding to the pointer at that point in the check table acquired in the immediately preceding step) match the data of ACT stored in step D92 described above. If a match is found, the loop is exited and the process proceeds to step D177. If not, the process proceeds to step D183.
In step D183, the value of the pointer in the check table is updated, and the process proceeds to step D184.
In step D184, it is determined whether step D182 has been repeatedly executed until the last data of the check table. If step D182 is repeated until the last data, the process proceeds to step D185. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D182. Go back and repeat the process.

If any data in the check table matches the ACT data stored in step D92, the process proceeds to step D177; otherwise (match If there is no data in the check table, the process proceeds to step D185.
Then, in step D185, invalid command information is returned as being abnormal, and the process returns. In step D177, the value of the symbol type information acquired in step D171 is returned.
In the above-mentioned step D98 etc., the symbol type information returned in this step D177 is stored as waiting symbol information.

[Received command separate initialization process 1]
Next, the details of the received command-based initialization process 1 executed in step D149 in the received command analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D191, an area requiring initialization is initialized with the corresponding default value, and in the next step D192, NULL (data indicating that there is no information) is set as the overall fade information. Proceed to step D193. An area requiring initialization to be initialized in step D191 is a common area (for example, the entire area of the advance notice information area) to be initialized at the time of command determination among the storage areas of the RAM of the CPU 311.

At step D193, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is for instructing a customer waiting demo, and if it is for instructing a customer waiting demo, the round display information is set to NULL at step D195, and the procedure proceeds to step D196. If it is not intended to issue a customer waiting demo, the process proceeds to step D194. The customer waiting demonstration is a customer waiting demonstration effect (or also referred to as a customer waiting effect), and is an effect including a customer waiting demonstration display performed on the display device 41. In the guest waiting demonstration effect, the display is not limited to the display on the display device 41, and the display may be performed on another display device, lighting (including blinking) of lamps, or output by sound may be performed.
In step D196, it is determined whether the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) is in the customer waiting demo. If the customer waiting demo is in progress, the process proceeds to step D199. If the customer waiting demo is not in progress, the process proceeds to step D197.
In step D197, information on the customer waiting A display start is set in the display control flag area, and in step D198, customer waiting display data (information on the customer waiting control table) is set in the background information, and step D199. Go to

  At step D199, change end display data is set in background information at the end of change, and next step D200 sets customer waiting A as the machine state P, and next step D201 stops the special view as a special view display symbol number The value of the symbol area is set, and in the next step D203, no hold display movement control is set, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step D203a. With the suspension display movement control, the display position of the suspension display is appropriately moved so as not to overlap with the display of the reach action etc. when the suspension display of the starting memory is also performed on the screen of the display device 41 displaying the special view. It is control.

The above steps D195 to D203 are processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration display on the display device 41. The customer waiting demonstration display is divided into “customer waiting A” for symbol display and “customer waiting B” for movie display, and “waiting for customer A” is started by the above steps D195 to D203, and so on Thus, the customer waiting demo display of "waiting for customer B" is performed (refer to customer waiting display editing processing described later).
Moreover, the value of the special figure stop symbol area in step D201 is data set in step D341 to be described later, and the special figure display symbol number is, for example, the case where the customer waiting demo command is transmitted during the special figure change Is a storage area for storing the value of the special figure stop symbol area at that time. In addition, the value of the special figure display symbol number stored in this way is used for symbol display waiting for a customer.

In step D203a, it is determined whether inter-sub data transmission is in progress (that is, it is determined whether data transmission is in progress to a different pachinko machine production control device), and if transmission is in progress, the process returns. If not, the process returns after executing steps D203b to D203f.
In step D203b, an inter-sub command (broadcast transmission setting) of customer waiting demo synchronization (sub-sub synchronization in customer waiting demo display) is prepared, and in step D203c, the inter-sub transmission data is prepared to edit the prepared inter-sub command. An editing process (described later in FIG. 120) is executed.

At step D203d, an initial value is set to the ack waiting timer (timer used at step D521 described later). Note that whether the sub board (effect control device) of the pachinko machine that has received the inter-sub command returns an ack to the sub board of the pachinko machine that has transmitted the inter-sub command depends on the type of command See D480a). In this example, the sub-interval command of the customer waiting demo synchronization includes content for requesting an ack reply. That is, in this example, the sub-interval command of the customer waiting demo synchronization is a command that requires an ack response.
In step D203e, a sub-interval effect start waiting timer (a timer used in step D532 described later) is set.
In step D203f, an inter-sub transmission request flag is set. The inter-sub transmission request flag is used for the determination of step D461 described later.

At step D194, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is to instruct fanfare effect (effect when big hit), and if it is commanding fanfare effect, steps D204 to D210 are sequentially executed. If it is determined that the fanfare effect is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D221.
In step D204, a jackpot state is set as the P machine state.
At step D205, the round display information is set to NULL.
In step D206, big hit fanfare display data (information of background control table for big hit fanfare) is set as background information.
In step D207, black fade display is set as the entire face fade information.
In step D208, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special figure display symbol number.
In step D210, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D204 to D210 are processing for executing fanfare effect (including fanfare display on the display device 41).

At step D221, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is for instructing round effect (effect for a big hit round), and if it is instructing round effect, steps D223 to D229 are sequentially executed and then return is made. If it is not intended to issue a round effect, the process proceeds to step D222.
In step D223, the jackpot state is set as a big hit.
In step D224, a scene switching table corresponding to the number of rounds is set as round display information.
In step D225, the jackpot round background display data (information on the jackpot round background control table) corresponding to the data of ExAct is set as the background information.
In step D226, round number display data corresponding to the data of ExAct is set.
At step D227, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special figure display symbol number.
In step D228, the symbol operation table in the round (information on the symbol variation table for the round) is set in the symbol variation table area.
In step D229, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D223 to D229 are processing for executing a round effect (including a round display on the display device 41).

If it progresses to step D222, it will be determined whether the data of ExMode is to instruct an interval effect (effect between rounds in a big hit) and if it is an instruction to instruct interval effect, steps D230 to D235 are sequentially performed. After execution, the process returns, and if it is not one to instruct interval production, the process proceeds to step D241.
In step D230, the jackpot state is set as a big hit.
At step D231, the round display information is set to NULL.
In step D232, the big hit interval background display data (information of background control table for interval) is set in the background information.
In step D233, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special figure display symbol number.
At step D234, the symbol operation table in the round is set.
In step D235, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D230 to D235 are processing for executing interval effect (including interval display on the display device 41).

At step D241, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is for instructing ending effect (effect at the end of the big hit), and if it is one for instructing ending effect, steps D244 to D250 are sequentially executed and then return is made. If the ending effect is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D242.
In step D244, a jackpot state is set as the P machine state.
At step D245, a scene switching time table is set in the round display information.
In step D246, ending background display data (information on a background control table for ending) is set in the background information.
In step D247, black fade display is set as the entire face fade information.
In step D248, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special figure display symbol number.
In step D250, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D244 to D250 are processing for executing an ending effect (including an ending display on the display device 41).

At step D242, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is to instruct the value of the special figure 1 pending number, and if the value of the special figure 1 pending number is instructed, the special figure 1 pending information is obtained at step D251. After the setting process (to be described later) is performed, the process returns, and if it is not a command to specify the value of the special figure 1 reservation number, the process proceeds to step D243.
In addition, although the same steps as the above-described steps D 242 and D 251 are provided for the special figure 2 as well, illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

At step D243, it is determined whether the data of ExMode instructs to stop the symbol of the special figure, and if the command to stop symbol of the special figure is instructed, steps D252 to D259 are sequentially executed and then return. If it is not intended to instruct the symbol stop of the special drawing, the process returns.
At step D252, if the current BGM is not a basic BGM, a sound stop request is set.
In step D253, if the change end background information is not NULL, the background information is overwritten.
At step D254, the state of P machine is set to being in the fluctuating state.
At step D255, normal background display data (information of a background control table for normal use) is set as the background information.
In step D256, NULL is set as background information at the end of variation.
In step D257, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special figure display symbol number.
In step D259, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D252 to D259 are processing for executing effects of symbol stop of the special figure (including stop display of the special figure on the display device 41).
In addition, about this received command classified initialization process 1, illustration and description are abbreviate | omitted also about processes other than the process with respect to the command of the special figure 2 reservation number. For example, the corresponding processing in the case of receiving another non-variable system command (such as an error system command or a probability state system command) is also omitted.

[Special figure 1 reservation information setting process]
Next, the details of the special view 1 suspension information setting process executed in step D251 in the above-described received command-based initialization process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step D261, the data of the special figure 1 pending number at that time is loaded, and this loaded data is stored as the previous pending number, then at step D262, the command (ExMode and The value of the number of reservations instructed by the data of ExAct) is stored as the special drawing 1 number of reservations, and then the process proceeds to step D263.

In step D263, it is determined whether the number of new reservations (number of special drawing 1 reservations stored in step D262) matches the number of previous reservations (value stored in step D261). If they match, the process returns. If not, the process proceeds to step D264.
In step D264, it is determined whether the number of reservations has increased (ie, whether the number of new reservations> the number of previous reservations). If it has increased, the process proceeds to step D265. If it has not increased, the process proceeds to step D267.
At step D265, the display pattern of the hold normal lighting is set in the color information area corresponding to the new hold number, and at step D266, an output request for the starting opening winning sound is made, and then the process returns.

In step D267, the special view 1 pre-reading information area is shifted, and in the next step D268, the color information area is shifted.
In addition, since it is when there is a start winning of special figure 1 that it progresses to step D265, in order to perform the display of suspension by this start winning (display of the start memory reserved) and the winning sound output for effects Steps D265 and D266 are performed. In addition, since it is a case where the number of reservations of starting storage in special figure 1 decreases, the process proceeds to step D 267. Therefore, the display of the number of reservation where prefetching display (for example, big hit advance notice and fluctuation pattern advance notice) Steps D 267 and D 268 are executed to shift pre-read information (various information such as pre-read variation patterns and stop symbol information and various information such as presence or absence of pre-reading effect) to the area corresponding to the number of reservations. In the effect control device 300, the prefetch command (prefetch variation system command and prefetch symbol command) for each hold in the aforementioned steps D138, D144, D155, D160, and step D161 (initialization processing 2 for each received command). The above-mentioned pre-reading information is set as an analysis result of. Then, it is necessary to shift the storage area of this pre-read information in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings in the same manner as shifting the random number storage area at the start of fluctuation on the main substrate. The step is the step D267. Step D268 is a process for similarly shifting the storage area of the information on the hold display color (that is, the color of the hold display different depending on the presence or absence of the pre-reading effect for the pre-reading effect) in accordance with the pre-reading information. It is.

[Reception processing for each received command 2]
Next, the details of the received command separate initialization process 2 executed in step D161 in the received command analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, steps D271 to D281 are executed, and the process proceeds to step D282.
In step D271, the area requiring initialization is initialized with the corresponding default value.

  In step D 271, among the storage areas of the RAM of the CPU 311, the common area (for example, the entire area of the advance notice information area) to be initialized at the time of command determination is initialized with the corresponding default value.

At step D272, NULL is set as the overall fade information.
In step D273, information on normal variation display is set in the display control flag area.
At step D274, the fluctuation initialization flag of the fourth symbol of the special drawing that fluctuates is set.
At step D275, the fourth symbol status of the varying special figure is set as being in variation.
By the processing of these steps D274 and D275, the fourth symbol corresponding to the one in special figure 1 or special figure 2 is changed (see the fourth symbol editing process described later)
In step D276, the hold display movement control is set to none.

In step D277, fluctuation pattern classification processing (described later) is performed.
At step D278, a notice distribution table corresponding to the major pattern returned by the variation pattern classification process at step D277 is prepared.
In step D279, a random number lottery process A (described later) is performed.
In step D280, a step UP preliminary distribution table corresponding to the major pattern returned in step D277 is prepared.
In step D281, a random number lottery process B (described later) is performed.

At step D282, it is determined at step D277 whether the largely classified pattern returned is "normal deviation". If "normal deviation", the process proceeds to step D285. If not "normal deviation", steps D283 and D284 are sequentially performed. After execution, the process proceeds to step D285.
At step D283, a during-reach notice distribution table corresponding to the broad pattern returned at step D277 is prepared.
In step D284, a random number lottery process C (described later) is performed.
At step D285, advance notice effect setting process 1 (to be described later) is executed, then at step D286, advance notice effect setting process 2 (to be described later) is performed. Then, at step D287, the music number of basic BGM is set. Then, it proceeds to step D288.

In step D288, it is determined whether the data of ExMode (first-half fluctuation pattern) commands normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds. If 12-second fluctuation is commanded, steps D289 to D295 are sequentially executed and then return is made. If the command does not command normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, the process proceeds to step D301. Here, "normal" in "the first half of the 12 seconds normal fluctuation" means that it is not a special fluctuation such as a shortening fluctuation.
In the present example, in the case of the normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, there can be only a fluctuation pattern without reach action. In this case, since the reach action is not performed, the time value of the second half fluctuation is set as 0, and the total fluctuation pattern is 12 seconds (that is, 12 seconds normal fluctuation; “normal” here means the fluctuation which is not reach) It is defined as). That is, the second-half fluctuation time value indicated by the data of ExAct (second-half fluctuation pattern) is a 0 second fluctuation.
At step D289, the background information is set as the normal fluctuation background (information of the background control table for normal fluctuation).
In step D290, NULL is set as background information at the end of variation.
In step D291, an initial stage fluctuation table at the time of a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds is set as a symbol fluctuation table to be described later. Specifically, the information on the address of the early stage variation table is stored in the symbol variation table area (the same applies to the following).
In step D292, as a symbol variation table, a first half variation table in the first half of the 12 seconds normal variation is set.
In step D293, a second half fluctuation table corresponding to ExAct is set as a symbol fluctuation table.
In step D294, a flag for generating discolored eye pattern is set. The barakage pattern means a state in which a plurality of symbols constituting the special figure is not a reach or a jackpot (if it is not a combination of reach types, it includes a combination such as "776").
At step D295, stop symbol setting processing (described later) is executed.

These steps D 289 to D 295 are processing for executing variable display on the display device 41 of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) without the reach action. Here, in steps D291 to D293, control is performed by dividing the time of one change into three sections. The same variation command may change the symbol itself depending on the type of notice or the like, and a plurality of movements are registered in the inside of each table of these steps D291 to D293.
Note that these steps D289 to D295 are an example without reach action, and in fact there are many modes without reach action, but illustration and explanation of control processing therefor are omitted.

In step D301, it is determined whether the data of ExMode (first-half fluctuation pattern) instructs normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (meaning that "normal" here is not shortening fluctuation or the like); If it is a command to instruct normal fluctuation in the first half of 4 seconds, steps D302 to D303 are sequentially executed and then the process proceeds to step D304. If it is not a command to command normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, the process proceeds to step D318. In the present example, in the case of the normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, there can be only a fluctuation pattern with reach action. In this case, since the time value of the latter half fluctuation changes according to the contents of the reach action, it is defined as a fluctuation pattern which is (10.4 + α) seconds in total. There are a plurality of types of ExAct data (second-half fluctuation pattern) for the same ExMode, and the number varies depending on the specification of each gaming machine.
In step D302, an early stage fluctuation table is set in the first half of the 10.4 second normal fluctuation.
In step D303, the first half fluctuation table in the first half of the 10.4 seconds normal fluctuation is set.
These steps D302 to D303 are processing for executing the variable display on the display device 41 of the early stage and the first half of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) in the first half of the normal variation of 10.4 seconds. In the present application, the period of the beginning of the movement of the symbol in the first half fluctuation time is "early", and the remaining period in the first half fluctuation time is "first half". The movement of the symbol starts with the same first half fluctuation time, but there is also a case where it scrolls down as it is or when it hops up once (a kind of advance notice), so that the movement is not one way. It has the composition. Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the contents of presentation are respectively set for each period in which the presentation at the time of special figure fluctuation is divided into a plurality of times, and the entire effect at the time of special figure fluctuation is combined as a combination of the effect contents of each period. It is a combination type to constitute. This has the advantage of reducing the total amount of data that must be stored in the non-volatile memory for storing control data (in this example, the PROM 321). That is, for example, if all tables in the first half change are prepared for each of the effect contents having even a slight movement, the amount of data becomes enormous, but such a combination is improved by this combination type.

At step D304, it is determined whether the data of ExAct (second-half fluctuation pattern) commands fluctuation of normal -1 deviation, and if normal -1 instructs deviation, steps D307 to D311 are sequentially executed. After that, the process returns, and if normal-1 does not command deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step D305. Note that the normal-1 deviation is a fluctuation pattern that is deviated with the normal reach action.
In step D307, the background of the normal reach action (information of the background control table for the normal reach action) is set as the background information.
In step D308, NULL is set as background information at the end of variation.
In step D309, the latter half fluctuation table corresponding to ExAct is set as a symbol fluctuation table to be described later.
In step D310, a flag of -1 is generated.
At step D311, stop symbol setting processing (described later) is executed.
Steps D307 to D311 are for performing fluctuation display on the display device 41 of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) in the case of the latter half fluctuation of the normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds and being out of the normal -1. Processing.

At step D305, it is determined whether the data of ExAct is commanding fluctuation of military command Leech-1 or not, and if military command Leech-1 is commanded to command fluctuation, steps D312 to D317 are sequentially executed and then return is made. If the command does not command a change in shift, the process proceeds to step D306. Note that military commander reach-1 is a variation pattern that comes off with military commander reach action in which a character of a military commander appears.
In step D312, the background of military commander reach action (information on background control table for military commander reach action) is set as the background information.
In step D313, the background at the end of military commander reach is set as background information at the end of change.
In step D314, the latter half fluctuation table corresponding to ExAct is set as a symbol fluctuation table to be described later. Here, the table is selected according to the type of notice (big hit notice) during military commander reach.
In step D315, a flag of -1 shift symbol generation is set.
At step D316, stop symbol setting processing (described later) is executed.
In step D317, white fade display information is set in the overall fade information.
Steps D312 to D317 are the latter half of the normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, and execute the fluctuation display on the display 41 of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) in the case of military command Leech-1 loss. It is a process for

In step D306, setting processing corresponding to other various reach types (including a big hit) is performed for the second half fluctuation of the first half of the 10.4 second normal fluctuation, and then the process returns.
In step D318, setting processing corresponding to various reach types (including those that make a big hit) in the other ExMode and ExAct is performed.
Note that steps D301 to D305 and steps D307 to D317 described above are processes of some examples in the case where there is a reach action. Actually, there are many other types of reach actions, but in order to avoid complications here, these other types of processing are illustrated together in step D306 and step D318, and the details thereof will be described. Illustration and explanation are omitted.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the stop symbol setting process executed in steps D295, D311, and D316 in the above-described received command-based initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in this example, special figures for effect consist of three symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) arranged side by side, and there are nine kinds of symbols (symbol numbers 0 to 8) as each symbol. The case is illustrated.
When this routine starts, first, in step D321, it is determined whether or not an off-set margin is set as a symbol generation flag. If it is set, steps D322 to D323 are performed and then step D324 is performed, and if not set, step Go to D331. In addition, the symbol generation flag of the loose-off eye is set (that is, set) in the above-mentioned step D 294.

Step D322 is processing to set a symbol number randomly selected from nine types of symbol numbers 0 to 8 as the left symbol lx.
Step D323 is processing to set a symbol number randomly selected from eight types of symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the right symbol rx.
In step D324, it is determined whether the right symbol rx set in step D323 is a value greater than or equal to the left symbol lx set in step D322. If right symbol rx ≧ left symbol lx, then in step S325 the symbol of the right symbol rx The number is increased by one and the process proceeds to step D326, and step D325 is not executed without progressing to step D326 if right symbol rxrxleft symbol lx is not satisfied (that is, if right symbol rx <left symbol lx).
The left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are randomly set by the processing of steps D322 to D325, and the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are always set to different symbol numbers. The reason for selecting from the range of symbol number 7 or less in step D323 is to be able to increase by one in step D325.

In step D326, it is determined whether the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx can be a combination that can not be an appearance prohibition symbol. If the combination can be an appearance prohibition symbol, the process proceeds to step D327. move on. Here, the appearance prohibited pattern is a pattern whose appearance is prohibited as a loose-off eye. For example, in the case of a specification with a combination of 3, 5, and 7 as a chance eye, such as “357” “375” “537”, etc., prohibition control is performed so that this chance eye does not appear at the time of losing fluctuation. When it is necessary, this chance is a prohibited pattern. Steps D326 to D330 are processing for this prohibition control. In the case of a model which is simply good for loose eyes, this prohibition control is unnecessary, and it is sufficient to process the right column (step D338).
Specifically, for example, assuming that the combination of 3, 5, and 7 is a prohibited pattern, in step D326, the symbol number of the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx is different among 3, 5, and 7 If it is two, it will become an appearance prohibited symbol, and it proceeds to step D327.

In step D327, the cx value for which the combination of "left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx" is a prohibited pattern is stored in the storage area nocx. For example, when the left symbol lx is 3 and the right symbol rx is 5, if the middle symbol cx is temporarily 7, the combination of symbols in the special figure becomes "3, 7, 5" and the appearance prohibited symbol Therefore, 7 which is the value of the middle pattern cx is set to nocx.
After passing through step D327, in step D328, a process of setting a symbol number randomly selected from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 as a middle symbol cx is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D329.

In step D329, it is determined whether or not the middle symbol cx n nocx, and if the middle symbol cx n nocx, the value of the middle symbol cx is increased by one in step S330, and the process proceeds to step D341. For example, the process proceeds to step D341 without executing step D330.
According to the processing of these steps D328 to D330, the value of the middle symbol cx always becomes a value different from nocx, and eventually, the combination of "left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx" is not necessarily a prohibited symbol It becomes.
At step D338, a process of setting one symbol number randomly selected from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the middle symbol cx is executed, and then the procedure goes to step D341.

When it proceeds to step D331, it determines whether or not reach-1 has been set as a symbol generation flag, and if it is set, it executes step D332 and proceeds to step D333, and if it is not set, it proceeds to step D337. Note that the reach-1 symbol deviation generation flag is set at the above-described steps D310 and D315.
At step D332, processing is performed to store a value randomly selected from ten types of values 0 to 9 as tmprnd.
In step D333, it is determined whether the value of tmprnd is 0. If 0, steps D334 and D335 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D336. If not 0, steps D339 and D340 are sequentially performed and the process proceeds to step D336.

At step D334, processing is executed to store a value randomly selected from the four types of values 1, 3, 5 and 7 which are odd numbers as the number of the left symbol lx. Note that the description in step D334 is described using a programming language, "rand" indicates a function that generates random numbers, and "mod" indicates an operation for obtaining the remainder of division, " rand () mod 4 "is a value randomly selected from 0, 1, 2, 3. At Step D334, since the value of “rand () mod 4” is doubled and one is added, one value is randomly selected from among 1, 3, 5 and 7 in the end.
At step D339, a process of storing one of the even-numbered five values 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 randomly selected as the number of the left symbol lx is executed.
In step D335 or step D340, the value of the right symbol rx is made the same as the value of the left symbol lx (ie, the right symbol is made the same as the left symbol) in order to obtain a reach symbol.

  Here, according to the processing of steps D332 to D334 and step D339, it is possible to change the odd and even appearance ratio of the reach symbol. In this case, since it is only when tmprnd = 0 that the process proceeds from step D333 to step D334, the appearance ratio of the odd symbols is 1/10, whereas the ratio of proceeding from step D333 to step D339 (ie, even symbols) The appearance ratio of) is 9/10. The reason for doing this is as follows. That is, since there is a re-lottery effect, the reach symbol at the time of a big hit is likely to be even. Therefore, in order not to reduce the big hit reliability of the odd reach, the occurrence rate of the odd reach is lowered. Of course, the ratio of the odd and even appearance rates may not be 1: 9. Moreover, although the aspect which calculates | requires a symbol by calculation like step D334 and D339 was illustrated in this example, you may select a symbol with a random number and a data table.

At step D336, the result of subtracting 1 from the value of the left symbol lx is set as the value of the middle symbol cx so that -1 is deviated, and then the procedure goes to step D341.
In step D337, a process of generating symbols (including a big hit symbol) of a combination corresponding to the other symbol generation flags is performed, and then the procedure proceeds to step D341.
In step D341, the values of the left symbol lx, the middle symbol cx and the right symbol rx set in the steps up to this point are stored in the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol of the stop symbol area, respectively, and then return.
Note that, as described above, steps D321 to D336 and steps D338 to D340 described above are processing in the case of a loose-off eye and in the case of reach-1 in a misaligned eye. In fact, there are many other types of stop symbols, but in order to avoid complications here, the other types of processing are illustrated in step D337 together, and the details thereof are as follows. Illustration and explanation are omitted.

[Variation pattern classification process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern classification process executed in step D277 in the above-described received command classification initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined at step D351 whether the data of ExMode is a variation command, and if it is a variation command, the process proceeds to step D352, and if it is not a variation command, it proceeds to step D358.
In step D352, it is determined whether the data of ExAct is in the valid range. If the data is in the valid range, step D353 is executed to proceed to step D354. If the data is not in the valid range, the process proceeds to step D358.

In step D353, fluctuation pattern check data corresponding to the data of ExMode is acquired. The fluctuation pattern check data is set for each data of MODE of the fluctuation system command, and 0 is set as fluctuation pattern check data for data of MODE which is not used in the model.
In step D354, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern check data acquired in step D353 is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D358, and if it is not 0, steps D355 to D357 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

In step D 355, a major classification pattern table corresponding to the data of ExMode is set.
In step D356, based on the large classification pattern table set in step D355, large classification pattern data corresponding to the data of ExAct is acquired.
At step D 357, the broad pattern data acquired at step D 356 is returned and returned.
At step D358, 0 is returned and returned.

  In addition, in order to prepare the notice distribution table etc. corresponding to ExMode and ExAct data in the above-mentioned step D278 etc., the classification pattern data is classified into which classification the fluctuation pattern instructed by the data of ExMode and ExAct belongs. It is data to show. In addition, the large classification pattern table is a table for determining the large classification pattern data. Then, in the large classification pattern table, the large classification pattern data is 0 when there is no combination of ExMode and ExAct data. Therefore, if there is no combination of ExMode and ExAct data, step D357 returns 0 in the same manner as step D358. In addition, when 0 is returned in this way, for example, it is treated the same as the normal removal. If treated in the same way as normal, even if there is an abnormality in the confirmed command, the special figure can be temporarily fluctuated, and there is an advantage that the player can be prevented from being anxious. . However, when 0 is returned, there is also a mode in which the fluctuation start setting is not performed as a configuration in which the process is returned without performing step D278 and subsequent steps after executing step D277 of FIG. In this way, the special figure can be prevented from changing in the case of a command abnormality.

[Random number lottery process A]
Next, the details of the random number lottery process A executed in step D279 in the above-described received command-based initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of selecting the distribution result in the advance notice distribution table prepared for the group A of the distribution in the above-described step D278 using random numbers for each type.
When this routine is started, steps D361 to D368 are repeatedly executed until the final value na (for example, na = 9) is reached while incrementing the advance notice type number A by an increment of 1 from the initial value 1, and then the process returns. That is, in step D361, immediately after the start of the routine, the notice type number A is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step D362. In step D368, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D361, and if the notice type number A is na, the process returns. Then, returning to step D361, the value of the notice type number A is increased by one, and the process proceeds to step D362. The value of the final price na differs depending on the model.

  In addition, assuming that the notice distribution table prepared in step D278 is a matrix data table (matrix), for example, distribution values of various distribution results are arranged side by side in the same row (stage) for each type of notice. Then, the value of notice type number A corresponds to one of a plurality of rows in this table, for example, A = 1 is the first row from the top, and A = 2 is the second row from the top , ... and so on. That is, the notice type number is a parameter indicating the vertical arrangement position (the line number) of the specific distribution value in the notice distribution table. In addition, a distribution table pointer is provided as a parameter indicating the horizontal arrangement position (the number of columns) of a specific distribution value in one row of the preliminary distribution table. In addition, since there are 1000 types of random number values from 0 to 999 in this example, the distribution value is a number within the range of 0 to 999 which is set to be 1000 when all the distribution values in the same row are added. is there. The same is true for the other distribution tables and other notice type numbers B and C.

  At step D362, a process of storing one randomly selected value from 0 to 999 as rdm is executed, and then at step D363 the value of the distribution table pointer corresponding to the notice type number A (notice type number A After setting the first column of the row corresponding to the value of (1), the process proceeds to step D364. Here, as described above, the distribution table pointer set in step D363 designates the horizontal position (hereinafter referred to as pointer position) in the same row in the preliminary distribution table prepared in step D278 described above. Pointer.

At step D364, the distribution value of the pointer position at that time is compared with the value of rdm. If the value of rdm is greater than the distribution value, the process proceeds to step D365 where the value of rdm is determined. Is less than the distribution value, the process proceeds to step D367.
At step D365, the value obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the value of rdm is set as a new value of rdm, and then at step D366, the distribution table pointer is incremented by 1 (the distribution table is identical) After performing update by shifting the pointer position away from the top by one column in the row), the process returns to step D364 and the process is repeated.

  According to the process of steps D364 to D366, the process of updating the distribution table pointer by subtracting the distribution value from the value of rdm is repeated until the value of rdm is less than the distribution value. . Then, the number of times of updating the distribution table pointer (or the value of the pointer position) when the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value (that is, when the determination result in step D364 becomes NO) and the notice at that time The value of the type number A indicates one specific position (that is, one distribution result) in the advance notice distribution table, whereby the distribution result is selected based on the random number.

In step D367, a notice data value is set based on the number of times the distribution table pointer is updated (ie, the number of times step D365 and D366 are repeatedly executed), and the notice data value is stored in the corresponding notice type area. Then, it proceeds to step D368.
At step D368, as described above, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D361, and if the notice type number A is na, the process returns.

[Random number lottery process B]
Next, the details of the random number lottery process B executed in step D281 in the above-described received command-based initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of selecting the distribution result in the step-up preliminary distribution table prepared for the group B of distribution in the above-mentioned step D280 using random numbers for each type.
In this routine, as in the random number lottery process A described above, steps D371 to D378 are repeatedly executed until the final value nb (for example, nb = 7) is reached while incrementing the advance notice type number B from the initial value 1 by the increment 1. Then return. The value of the closing price nb differs depending on the model.

  The step-up notice is to give a big hit notice in stages while changing the notice content and the reliability of the notice. In the drawings and the specification of the present application, "SU" means step-up of this step-up notice.

[Random number lottery process C]
Next, the details of the random number lottery process C executed in step D284 in the above-described received command classification initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of selecting the distribution result in the in-reach advance notification distribution table prepared for the group C of distribution in the above-mentioned step D 283 by random number for each type.
In this routine, as in the random number lottery process A or B described above, steps D 381 to D 388 are performed until the final value nc (for example, nc = 6) is reached while incrementing the advance notice type number C from the initial value 1 by the increment 1. Repeat and then return. The value of the closing price nc differs depending on the model.

In steps D367, D377, and D387 in the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above, the effect content (SU advance notice specified by the notice data value (value determined from the number of times the distribution table pointer is updated) is executed Various information (SU notice number, SU progress pattern, various notice types, etc.) corresponding to the effect pattern including a predetermined storage area (for example, SU notice number area described later, SU progress pattern area described later) , The notice type C4 area, the notice type C5 area, etc.).
Thereby, according to the random number lottery process A, B, C described above, the distribution result is selected in advance for all notice type number values in each of all the groups A, B, C, and according to the distribution result Various pieces of information for specifying the contents of the effect are stored in advance in predetermined storage areas.

[Notice effect setting process 1]
Next, FIG. 115 will be used to explain in detail the preliminary announcement effect setting process 1 executed in step D285 in the above-described received command-based initialization process 2. Although the case of setting the SU notice according to the random number lottery result (the result of the random number lottery process A, B, and C described above) is illustrated as the preliminary announcement effect setting process 1, naturally the announcement effect is set for each model. The contents are different.
When this routine is started, first, in step D391, the distribution result is loaded from the SU notice frequency area of the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D392.

In step D392, it is determined in step D391 whether the number of SU announcements loaded is 1 or not. If it is not 1, the process proceeds to step D393, and if it is 1, the process proceeds to step D404.
In step D393, it is determined in step D391 whether the number of SU announcements loaded is 2 or not. If it is not 2, the process proceeds to step D403. If it is 2, the process proceeds to step D394.
In step D404, the distribution result is loaded from the SU progression pattern area of the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D405.

In step D405, it is determined whether the SU progression pattern loaded in step D404 is 0 or 2, and if it is not 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step D406, and if it is 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step D407.
At step D406, male military commander 1_1 information is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and the process returns. At step D407, female military commander 1_1 information is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and the process returns. The SU1 notice information area is an area for storing the first information of the step-up notice, and the first step-up notice is executed based on the information set in the area. The information set in steps D406 and D407 is notice data for notice of SU1 (address information for specifying a specific row in the control table for notice of SU1).

In step D394, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 type area of the advance type area, and the process proceeds to step D395.
In step D395, it is determined whether the type of SU2 loaded in step D394 is 1 or not. If it is not 1, the process proceeds to step D396. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step D408.

At step D396, male military commander 1_2 information (predictive data for SU1 advance notice) is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and then in step D397 male military commander 2_1 information (notice data for SU2 advance notice) in the SU2 advance notice information area. Set and proceed to step D398.
At step D408, female military commander 1_2 information (SU1 advance notice data) is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and then at step D409, female military commander 2_2 information (SU2 advance notice data) in the SU2 advance notice information area. Set and proceed to step D398. The SU2 notice information area is an area for storing the second information of the step-up notice, and the second step-up notice is executed based on the information set in the area.

In step D398, the distribution result is loaded from the SU progression pattern area of the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D399.
In step D399, it is determined in step D398 whether the loaded SU progression pattern is 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step D411. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D400.
In step D400, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 female appearance pattern area of the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D401.

In step D401, it is determined whether the SU2 female appearance pattern loaded in step D400 (in the figure, the pattern is described as "P") is 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step D410. Go to D402.
At step D402, female military commander 1_2 information (prediction data for SU1 advance notice) is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and the process goes to step D411.
At step D410, female military commander 2_2 information (prediction data for SU2 advance notice) is set in the SU2 advance notice information area, and the process goes to step D411.

In step D411, it is determined whether the SU progression pattern loaded in step D398 is 2 or not. If it is not 2, the process returns. If it is 2, the process proceeds to step D412.
At step D412, female military commander 1_2 information (predictive data for SU1 advance notice) is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and female military commander 2_2 information (notice data for SU2 advance notice) in the SU2 advance notice information area at next step D413. Set and return.
In step D403, similarly, the SU notice information area is set according to the SU notice frequency distribution result, and then the process returns.
In addition, although there are cases where the number of SU notices is 3 or more in the setting of SU notices, the setting processing of the other SU notices is illustrated in step D403 in order to avoid complication. The illustration and the description are omitted.

[Notice effect setting processing 2]
Next, details of the notice effect setting process 2 executed in step D 286 in the above-described received-command-based initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although the case of setting a scroll, PB, and a military commander notice according to the random number lottery result (the result of the random number lottery process A, B, and C described above) is illustrated as the preliminary announcement effect setting process 2, it is needless to say The contents of the notice production are different. PB means a push button, and corresponds to, for example, the effect button 9 in this example.
When this routine is started, first, in step D421, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type C4 area of the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D422.
The names such as C4 are names on specifications, and represent the type numbers of the notices in each route of the effect. For example, it indicates that "notice type 4 in route C".

In step D422, it is determined whether the data of the sorting result of notice type C4 loaded in step D421 is for specifying a scroll notice, and if it is not a scroll notice, the process proceeds to step D423, and if it is a scroll notice. Go to step D425.
In step D425, scroll notice 0 information (notice data for front notice 4) is set in the front notice information 4 area, and the process returns. When scroll notice 0 information is set in the front notice information 4 area, a scroll notice is executed.
At step D423, it is determined whether the data of the classification result of notice type C4 loaded at step D421 is for designating a letter notice. If it is not a letter notice, the process goes to step D424, and if it is a letter notice. After sequentially executing steps D426 to D429, the process returns.

In step D426, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type C5 area of the notice type area.
In step D427, scroll color information (notice data for the notice 4 on the front side) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type C5 is set in the front notice information 4 area.
In step D428, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type C6 area of the notice type area.
In step D429, scroll character information (notice data for notice 5 for the front notice) corresponding to the distribution result of notice type C6 is set in the front notice information 5 area.
A character advance is performed based on the settings of these steps D427 and D429.

  At step D424, it is determined whether the data of the distribution result of the notice type C4 loaded at step D421 designates PB notice, and if it is not a PB notice, the process returns and if it is a PB notice, step D430. , D431 and D441 sequentially, and then the process proceeds to step D442. For example, in the preview of the PB announcement, a moving image suggesting that the PB is pressed is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 to urge the player to press the PB, thereby providing a feeling of expectation of the big hit. is there.

In step D430, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type P1 area of the notice type area.
In step D431, PB color information (notice data for the notice 4 on the front side) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type P1 is set in the front notice information 4 area. By the setting of the PB color information, the display color of the image of PB in the PB advance notice is set.
In step D441, the distribution result (data for determining the number of military commanders) is loaded from the notice type C8 area of the notice type area.
At step D442, it is determined at step D441 whether the loaded distribution results in designation of one military commander. If the military commander is not one, control is passed to step D443. If it is one, then it is determined. After steps D445 to D448 are sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D444.

In step D445, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type N1 area of the notice type area.
At step D446, left serif frame information (notice data for the notice 5 on the front side) is set in the front notice information 5 area.
In step D447, military commander serif frame information (notice data for front notice 6) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N1 loaded in step D445 is set in the front notice information 6 area.
At step D448, left military commander character information (notice data for front notice 7) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N1 loaded at step D445 is set in the front notice information 7 area.
Based on the settings of these steps D446 to D448, display or the like of an advance notice effect of one military commander is executed.

  At step D443, it is determined at step D441 whether the loaded distribution result designates two military commanders. If the military commander is not two, the process proceeds to step D444. If the military commander is two, After steps D449 to D455 are sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D444.

In step D449, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type N2 area of the notice type area.
At step D450, left serif frame information (notice data for the notice 5 on the front side) is set in the front notice information 5 area.
In step D451, military commander serif frame information (notice data for front notice 6) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N2 loaded in step D449 is set in the front notice information 6 area.
At step D452, left military commander character information (notice data for front notice 7) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N2 loaded at step D449 is set in the front notice information 7 area.
At step D453, right serif frame information (notice data for the notice 8 on the front side) is set in the front notice information 8 area.
In step D454, military commander serif information (notice data for front notice 9) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N2 loaded in step D449 is set in the front notice information 9 area.
At step D455, right military commander character information (notice data for front notice 10) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N2 loaded at step D449 is set in the front notice information 10 area.

Based on the settings of these steps D450 to D455, a notice of two military commanders is executed.
At step D444, similarly, various advance notice information are set using the result of the advance notice area distribution, and then the process returns.
There are many other types of advance notice settings, but here, in order to avoid complication, the setting process of the other advance notice types is collectively illustrated in step D444, and the details thereof are illustrated and described. Omit.
Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the setting of the advance notice type is performed by the program as described above has been described, but an aspect may be adopted in which processing is set for general purpose using a data table.

[Inter-sub transmission start process]
Next, the details of the inter-sub transmission start process executed in step D20 in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. Inter-sub transmission is transmission in inter-sub communication. The inter-sub communication is communication (in this example, wireless communication) performed between sub-boards (in this example, effect control devices) of pachinko machines different in the game arcade.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D461 whether there is an inter-sub transmission request (that is, whether the inter-sub transmission request flag set in step D203f described above or step D480 described later is set). If there is an inter-sub transmission request (if the inter-sub transmission request flag is set), the process proceeds to step D462. If there is no inter-sub transmission request (if the inter-sub transmission request flag is not set), the process returns. .
In step D462, it is determined whether the value of the inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step D466. If it is less than 0, steps D463 to D465 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. .

In step D463, the inter-sub transmission request flag is cleared (it is not set).
At step D464, the inter-sub transmission permission flag is set.
In step D465, the inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted. The inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted in step D465 if data to be transmitted in sub-sub communication occurs, and is prohibited if there is no data to be transmitted (see step D1196 described later).
In step D466, the inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is updated (ie, the timer value is decreased by a fixed value). The inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is a timer which has an initial value set in step D479 described later and is cleared (a value is set to 0) in step D491 described later.

[Inter-sub receive task processing]
Next, the details of the inter-sub-reception task process executed in step D21 in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D471 whether there is an inter-sub receive task request (that is, whether the inter-sub receive task request flag set in step D1179 described later is set), and inter-sub receive If there is a task request (if the inter-sub reception task request flag is set), the process proceeds to step D472, and if there is no inter-sub reception task request (if the inter-sub reception task request flag is not set), .

At step D472, data of SB_MODE of the received inter-sub command (value copied at step D1176 described later) is loaded from the SB_MODE area, and the procedure goes to step D473.
In step D 473, it is determined whether the data of SB_MODE loaded in step D 472 indicates terminal ID notification. If it does not indicate terminal ID notification, the process proceeds to step D 474. If it indicates terminal ID notification. After sequentially executing steps D482 to D485, the process proceeds to step D481.

At step D482, the received terminal ID (value copied at step D1175 described later) is loaded from the inter-sub command transmission source ID area.
At step D483, the terminal presence / absence information of the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded at step D482 is set to "present".
At step D484, an initial value is set to the terminal validity period timer of the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded at step D482. Note that by providing a terminal validity period timer, a time limit is provided for recognizing that the gaming machine of the received terminal ID is "present". That is, it is necessary to periodically check the existence of each other between gaming machines performing inter-sub communication, and a process (not shown, for example, until the terminal validity period timer times up) based on the terminal validity period timer. If the same terminal ID notification is not received again, this confirmation is periodically performed by the process of updating the terminal presence / absence information corresponding to the terminal ID to "none". In this way, there are the following advantages. That is, when a certain gaming machine is powered off or the wireless module suddenly breaks down, etc. If there is no communication between gaming machines that have established communication with each other once for some reason, the other party exists. It is useless to continue to communicate on the premise that there is a risk that the effect of the inter-sub effects will be reduced. For example, as an inter-sub effect, an instruction is sent from the game machine on the left end of the island to the adjacent game machine sequentially through inter-sub communication, and an image of a specific character or the like (character) sequentially from the game machine on the left end of the island In the case of performing a continuous effect such as displaying on the display device 41 so as to flow to the right, there is a possibility that the continuous effect may be interrupted and interrupted at a gaming machine where the communication can not be established. However, if the configuration is such that the terminal presence information is updated periodically by performing the above confirmation, it is possible to make a request for sub-sub effects for the gaming machine whose presence becomes "none", for example. It is possible to reliably perform the inter-sub-effects efficiently, such as performing the interlocking effect by flying the platform whose power is turned off.
However, since sub-sub effects do not affect the outcome of the game, there is a problem even if there is an adverse effect as described above (for example, an adverse effect that the effect is not performed as a result of making a request to the other party whose existence is not present). The idea that does not exist is also established. In the case of the specification according to such a concept, the terminal valid period timer is not necessary.
In step D485, the received game state data (the value copied to the inter-sub command game state area in step D1178 described later) is stored in the game state of the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482.

  In step D474, it is determined in step D472 whether the loaded data in SB_MODE indicates an ack response. If the data does not indicate an ack response, the process proceeds to step D476. If an ack response is indicated, the process proceeds to step D486. After setting the ack reception flag at step D, the process proceeds to step D481.

In step D476, it is determined whether the data of SB_MODE loaded in step D472 is a rendering command, and if it is not a rendering command, the processing proceeds to step D481. If it is a rendering command, the processing proceeds to step D477.
In step D477, it is determined whether inter-sub data transmission is in progress. If inter-sub data transmission is in progress, the process proceeds to step D481. If inter-sub data transmission is not in progress, steps D478 to D480 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D480 a. The inter-sub data transmission is data transmission (for example, transmission of a command) in inter-sub communication. Further, in the present application, a command transmitted and received in inter-sub communication is referred to as an inter-sub command.

Further, the processing of steps D 478 to D 480 is processing for performing rendering according to the received inter-sub command (particularly rendering-system command).
At step D 478, an inter-sub command, parameter or the like of various effects corresponding to the content of the received inter-sub command is set.
In step D479, the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is set to transmit the inter-sub command set in step D478 to the sub-boards of the other gaming machines. Similarly, in step D480, an inter-sub transmission request flag is set.

Depending on the contents of the effect, there may be a case where the inter-sub command does not occur. In such a case, in step D478, the setting of the inter-sub command is not performed, and the processing of steps D479 and D480 for transmitting the inter-sub command is not performed either, and the process proceeds to step D480a.
In step D480a, it is determined whether the data of SB_MODE loaded in step D472 is a command requiring an ack response, and if it is not a command requiring an ack response, the process proceeds to step D481 and a command requiring an ack response After sequentially executing steps D488 to D491, the process proceeds to step D481.

Steps D488 to D491 are processes for responding to the ack request and returning an ack response.
At step D488, the received transmission source ID is prepared as a transmission destination ID command.
At step D489, data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT of the ack response are prepared. SB_MODE and SB_ACT are data constituting an inter-sub command, and are data of the 8th byte and the 9th byte in the packet configuration example (described later) shown in FIG.
At step D 490, an inter-sub-transmission data editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D491, the inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is cleared (the value of the timer is set to 0).

Then, in step D481, the inter-sub reception task request flag is cleared, and then the process returns.
Since the steps D477 and D487 are provided, the operation requested by the inter-sub command (rendering system command) is not performed when the inter-sub data is being transmitted. This is because the command between subs does not necessarily correspond to the command from the main board, and the fact that it is in the process of sending means that it is making a request to another machine or is in the process of returning ack. It is from the thought that it is not necessary to meet the demand from the platform of In addition, there is a possibility that contradiction appears in the presentation if all requirements are met, but this configuration has an advantage of eliminating the possibility of such contradiction. However, this idea is a basic idea, and when there is an effect that it is desired to perform in any state, there may be a mode of performing the requested operation even during transmission.

[Inter-sub transmission data editing process]
Next, the details of the inter-sub transmission data editing process executed in step D 490 in the above-described inter-sub reception task process (or step D 203 c of the above-described reception command-based initialization process 1) will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that the configuration of the packet transmitted and received between the subs is as shown in FIG. 158 described later.

When this routine is started, steps D501 to D514 are sequentially executed, and then return.
In step D501, data (for example, 02H) of the packet start code (STX) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 0. Here, the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is part of the transmission buffer area (sub-sub transmission buffer area) for inter-sub communication, and the storage area at the address 0 position of this inter-sub transmission buffer area is inter-sub transmission Buffer 0 (hereinafter, the same applies to the other addresses 1, 2, 3,... 11).
In step D502, data of the inter-sub transmission data number (SIZE) (for example, data indicating 12 bytes) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 1.

At Step D503, the terminal ID of one's own terminal (the terminal ID assigned to the effect control device 300 or the wireless module 360 of the effect control device 300) or the group ID (the pachinko machine belongs) as data of the transmission source ID (SID). The inter-sub transmission buffer 2 is set to an ID for specifying a group of pachinko machines.
At Step D504, data (terminal ID and group ID) of the transmission destination ID (DID) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 3. In the data of the transmission source ID (SID) and the transmission destination ID (DID), the upper bits of one byte are the group ID and the lower bits are the terminal ID.
In step D505, data of the inter-sub manufacturer code (MAKER) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 4.
At step D506, data of the year code (YEAR) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 5.

At step D507, the data of the inter-sub device model code (TYPE) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 6.
In step D508, data of the inter-sub command MODE (SB_MODE) (for example, the one prepared in the above-described step D489 and the like) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 7.
In step D509, data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT) (for example, the one prepared in the above-described step D489 and the like) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 8.
At Step D510, data of one's game state STS (that is, the game state of the pachinko machine) (for example, data indicating the fifth round of the big hit etc.) is set in the inter-sub-transmission buffer 9.

At Step D511, the checksum of the setting data (that is, the data from STX to STS) from the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 to the inter-sub transmission buffer 9 is calculated. Although the calculation method of the checksum is not particularly limited, for example, simple addition may be performed with a 1-byte size.
In step D512, data of the calculation result (SUM) of the checksum calculated in step D511 is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 10.
In step D513, data (for example, 03H) of the end of packet code (ETX) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 11.
At step D514, the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is set as data of the inter-sub transmission pointer (a parameter for specifying the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer area). This inter-sub transmission pointer is used in step D1192 described later.

[Inter-sub ack response task processing]
Next, the details of the inter-sub ack response task process executed in step D22 in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D521 whether the value of the ack waiting timer is 0, and if it is 0, the process returns. If not 0, the ack waiting timer is updated in step D522 (value is reduced by a specified value) Then, the process proceeds to step D523. The ack waiting timer is set to an initial value in step D203d described above.

In step D523, it is determined whether an ack response has been received (ie, whether the ack reception flag has been set). If received, steps D524 to D526 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. If not (if the ack reception flag is not set), the process returns without performing steps D524 to D526. The ack reception flag is set in step D486 described above.
At step D524, the ack reception flag is cleared.
At step D525, the ack waiting timer is cleared.
In step D526, since the ack response has been received, various parameter settings are performed to correspond to the effect waiting for the ack response.

[Sub-sub presentation effect setting process]
Next, the details of the inter-subs effect setting process executed in step D23 in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D531 whether or not there is a sub-interchange request (that is, whether or not the sub-interchange request flag is set), and if there is sub-interaction request, step D532. The sub-intermediate effect request is not made (the sub-intermediate effect request flag is cleared), and the process returns. The inter-sub presentation effect request flag is set in the above-described Step D478.

In step D532, it is determined whether the value of the sub-interchange start waiting timer is 0 or not. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D533. If it is not 0, the sub-interchange start wait timer is updated in step D538 Return after reducing). The inter-sub presentation effect start waiting timer is a timer that is set in step D203 e described above.
At step D533, the data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT (hereinafter, the inter-sub command includes SB_MODE and SB_ACT) of the received inter-sub command is loaded, and the loaded data at the next step D534 is a sub-interactive notice. It is determined whether it is a system command, and if it is a sub-interlocking notice system command, the process proceeds to step D544, and if it is not a sub-interlocking notice system command, the process proceeds to step D535. The inter-subset interlocking notice system command is a command for interlocking the notice effect in a plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-subs communication.
The inter-subset interlocking notice system command corresponds to the other-apparatus effect command.

In step D544, the number of times of execution of the inter-subsequent notice corresponding to the content of the command (sub-interworking interlocked notice system command) is loaded. This is based on the sub-interlocking notification system command by the display device 41 based on the fact that the pachinko machine 1 (own game machine) receives the sub-interlocking notification system command (other-machine effect command) from another game machine. When a rendition is executed, the number of renditions of rendition based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command is counted, so the number of times of execution of the rendition is read.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 (own game machine) reads the number of times of effect execution based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command executed in the past.

Next, in step D545, an execution probability table corresponding to the content of the command and the number of times of execution is set. This sets an execution probability table corresponding to the content of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command and the number of times of execution of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command, for example, as shown in FIG. It is a thing.
The execution probability table shown in FIG. 159 sets the notice mode A, the notice mode B, and the notice mode C as the contents of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command, and the number of times of execution of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice command For example, in the case of the notice mode A, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), an example in which "0 to 4 times", "5 to 14 times", "15 to 29 times", and "30 times to" is set. It is. And, for example, in the case of the notice mode A, the execution probability is "0 to 4 times" = 90%, "5 to 14 times" = 60%, "15 to 29 times" = 40%, "30 times to" It is set to = 50%.
The execution probability is set as shown in FIG. 159 (b) and (c) for the other notice modes B and C as well.

Next, in step D546, a random number is generated. This is to generate a pseudo-random number by a calculation method using a rand function, and more specifically, a process of storing a random number generated by using a value randomly selected from 0 to 999 as rdm is executed.
Next, proceeding to step D547, a lottery is made based on the generated random number to determine whether to perform an effect based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command received from another gaming machine by inter-sub communication this time. This lottery is performed based on the execution probability table set in step D545.
In this lottery process, according to the notice mode based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command, the execution probability distributed according to the number of times of effect execution based on the past sub-interworking notice system command, and the generated random value (rdm value) And the random number value (the value of rdm) is within the range of the above execution probability, and the lottery result is to be implemented, and the random number (the value of rdm) is not within the range of the above execution probability. It will be the result.
Here, the fact that the random value (the value of rdm) is within the range of the execution probability is as follows.
As described above, since the value of rdm is generated as a value randomly selected from 0 to 999, for example, in the case of the implementation probability = 90%, a random value (value of rdm) in the range of 0 to 899 If there exists, it will be a lottery result that it will not be implemented if there is a random number value (value of rdm) in the range from 899 to 999. Therefore, in the case where the implementation probability = 90%, there is a random number value (rdm value) in the range of 0 to 899 and the situation where it is determined to be implemented is the random number value (rdm value) is the range of the above execution probability. It is said to be inside.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step D548, the lottery result is determined, and it is determined that the effect based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command received from another gaming machine this time through inter-subs communication is not performed to end the routine. Return On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command received from another gaming machine by inter-sub communication is determined to be performed this time, the process proceeds to step D549, and the other gaming machine is executed in inter-sub communication to be implemented this time. The number of times of effect execution based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command received from is updated by +1. This is based on the number of times of execution of the past effect (effect based on the sub-interlocking notice system command) and it is determined whether or not the effect is to be executed using a random number, so that the number of execution times of the present effect is counted It is.
Note that the execution of the effect here is the number of times of execution when the effect based on the inter-subset interlock notification system command received from another gaming machine by sub-sub communication is performed to the last.
After passing through step D549, the process proceeds to step D539 to set an effect operation table corresponding to the effect designated by the data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT of the inter-sub command loaded in step D533, and then proceeds to step D537. Note that the rendering operation table set in step D539 is used in step D924 and the like of the inter-subsequent interlocked notice editing process described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D534 that the data of the inter-sub command loaded this time is not the inter-sub together interlocking notice system command, the process proceeds to step D535.
Then, in step D535, it is determined whether the data of the inter-sub command loaded in step D533 is the customer waiting timing adjustment command, and if it is the customer waiting timing adjustment command, the process proceeds to step D540, and For example, the process proceeds to step D536. Note that the customer wait timing adjustment command is a command for causing a plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-sub communication to perform the effect of matching the timing of the customer wait demo display. In this case, the customer wait A is executed synchronously. Command to

At step D536, if the data of the inter-sub command loaded at step D533 has a normal value, parameters of various effects corresponding to this data are set, and then the process proceeds to step D537.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D540, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed (that is, whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed). Since the process should not be performed, the process proceeds to step D537, and if the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step D541 to adjust the customer waiting timing.
In step D 541, the demo status (information indicating the type of customer waiting demonstration effect being executed, etc.) of the relevant pachinko machine (that is, the own machine) that has received the inter-sub command is the symbol display (the customer waiting A described above) If it is determined that the symbol is displayed (waiting for customer A), the process proceeds to step D543. If the symbol is not displayed (waiting for customer A) (that is, if the movie is displayed (waiting for customer B)), the process proceeds to step D542.

At step D542, the demo control timer is set to the value of the movie end-of-immediate value, and the process goes to step D537. When the demo control timer is set to the value of movie immediate end, the movie display (guest waiting B) as the customer waiting demonstration display is immediately terminated, and the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (guest waiting A) is started.
In step D543, the demonstration control timer is initialized to a value for symbol display start, and then the process proceeds to step D537. When the demo control timer is initialized to the value of the symbol display start, the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (waiting for customer A) being executed is ended halfway, and the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (waiting for customer A) is from the beginning It is started.

  According to the above steps D542 and D543, in any case, the waiting for customer demonstration effect is started from the beginning of the symbol display (waiting for customer A). As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect is symbol display by the transmission source pachinko machine that has transmitted the customer waiting timing adjustment command determined in step D535 and the own machine and other pachinko machines that have received the customer waiting timing adjustment command. It starts synchronously from the beginning of (waiting customer A). The customer waiting demonstration effect started in this way is controlled by the customer waiting display editing process described later, and switches from the symbol display (customer waiting A) to the movie display (customer waiting B) when the prescribed time elapses, and further the prescribed time As the movie display (the customer waiting B) is switched to the symbol display (the customer waiting A) as time passes, two types of customer waiting demonstration effects are alternately executed as long as the customer waiting demonstration effect is continued.

Then, in step D537, the inter-sub presentation effect request flag is cleared, and then the process returns.
Note that, in this example, the processing of the effect to synchronize the preview effect and the processing of the effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demo effect are mentioned as specific examples of the processing for the sub-sub effect. However, the content of the inter-sub effect is not limited to such an aspect, and in place of or in addition to the aspect of the present example, the sub-inter-effect of other contents may be performed.
In the present example, in order to avoid complication, the setting process of the sub-sub effects of the other types is collectively illustrated in step D536, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

[Effect display editing process]
Next, details of the effect display editing process performed in step D24 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof as described in the main process. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands thus set are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D28 (instruction for screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, steps D551 to D569 are sequentially executed, and then return.

At step D551, a customer waiting display editing process (described later) is executed.
In step D552, initialization of the drawing area is performed.
At step D553, a background editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D554, a background notice editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D555, a symbol editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D556, notice editing processing 1 (described later) is executed.
In step D557, a pending editing process (described later) is performed.
At step D558, notice editing processing 2 (described later) is executed.
At step D559, an inter-subset interlocked notice editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D560, reduced symbol editing processing (described later) is executed.
In step D561, a fourth symbol editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D562, a big hit round editing process (described later) is executed.

At step D563, a drawing end declaration is executed. The drawing end declaration is a process of outputting, to the VDP 312, information indicating that various editing processes for one frame have been completed. As a result, it is reported to the VDP 312 that various editing processes for one frame have been completed.
In step D564, the top address of the left symbol control area is set as in step D767 described later.
At step D565, the variation parameter update process (described later) is executed based on the head address set at step D564.
In step D566, the top address of the middle symbol control area is set as in step D764 described later.
At step D567, the variation parameter updating process (described later) is executed based on the head address set at step D566.
In step D568, the top address of the right symbol control area is set, as in step D770 described later.
At step D569, the variation parameter updating process (described later) is executed based on the head address set at step D568.

  Here, the editing process from the background editing process of steps D553 to D561 to the fourth symbol editing process is a process of setting a command group for instructing the VDP 312 to display a character or the like displayed on the screen of the display device 41. Then, the processing is performed earlier as much as displayed in the back of the screen. This is because it is transmitted to the VDP 312 in the order of the set commands and drawing control is performed. For example, since the fourth symbol etc. should not disappear during the change, the process is performed last to display it on the foreground. Even in the case of the notice effect, there are those performed in front of the symbol, and those performed in the back, and so on, there are notice editing processes in several places.

  Note that in the case of such a flowchart, the number of editing processes changes depending on the model because it is necessary to provide the editing processes for all the layers in theory. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration (a configuration in which the drawing priority order is determined by the processing order), and for example, there is a method of controlling to change the processing order according to the effect at that time. In addition, when using the function of setting the drawing priority for each character, the processing order does not matter.

  In the example of the inter-sub-notice notice this time, the processing is performed with a high rendering priority so that the effect is noticeable (that is, the inter-sub interlock interlocked notice editing process is performed in the relatively backward step D559). Further, in order not to hide the fourth symbol or the reduced symbol by the display of the inter-link interlock notice, the priority of the inter-link interlock notice editing process is lower than that of the fourth symbol editing process (steps D560 and D561). However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, since it is conceivable to perform effects such as shadow painting in the back of the screen as a notice between sub-subframes, the processing order is changed according to the contents of the effect to be performed. It is also good. The order of processing may be similarly changed for other displays.

[Wait for customer display edit processing]
Next, the details of the customer waiting display editing process executed in step D551 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined at step D571 whether or not customer waiting display control is in progress (that is, customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed). . In addition, when the data of the above-mentioned ExMode is for instructing a waiting for customer demonstration, a waiting for customer demonstration effect is performed.

At step D572, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect should be initialized. If the customer waiting effect is to be initialized, steps D573 to D575 are sequentially executed and then the process proceeds to step D576 to initialize the customer waiting effect. If the state is not to be changed, the process proceeds to step D576 without executing steps D573 to D575.
The state in which the customer waiting effect is to be initialized is a state in which another effect other than the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed and the switching to the customer waiting A is to be performed. Specifically, the step of the initialization process 1 for each reception command described above If the information on the customer waiting A display start set in D197 is set in the display control flag area, it is determined that the customer waiting effect is to be initialized.

At step D573, update for increasing the customer waiting control pointer by 1 is executed. The customer waiting control pointer is a pointer for specifying a position in the customer waiting demonstration control table. The initial value of the customer waiting control pointer is set, for example, in step D197 or D198 of the above-described reception command-based initialization process 1 described above.
At step D574, a demo control timer corresponding to the customer waiting control pointer is set. That is, the value of the customer waiting demo execution time is read out from the information of the customer waiting demo registered in the specific position in the customer waiting demo control table specified by the value of the customer waiting control pointer at that time. Set the execution time value as the value of the demo control timer. Here, specifically, a time (for example, 30 seconds) for executing the customer waiting A is set. The demonstration control timer is a timer for counting the time for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect (that is, the customer waiting demonstration execution time).

The basic operation is that the customer waiting effect of this example (that is, customer waiting demonstration effect) alternately performs “stop symbol display state” (customer waiting A) and “movie display state by movie playback” (customer waiting B) It is. Each customer waiting demonstration execution time differs depending on the model, and for example, “stop symbol display” (customer waiting A) is set to 120 seconds, “movie display” (customer waiting B) to 30 seconds, and so on.
In step D575, since the wait for customer A is started, data indicating a symbol display (wait for customer A) is set as the demo status (information indicating the type, state, and the like of the wait for demonstration effect for customer).

At step D576, it is determined whether the demo status data is symbol display. If symbol display is performed, steps D577 and D578 are sequentially executed to execute symbol display, and then step D579 is performed. After steps D586 and D587 are sequentially executed to stop the operation, the process proceeds to step D579.
At step D577, a decorative symbol display flag is set.
At step D578, the pending display flag is set.
At step D586, the decorative symbol display flag is cleared.
At step D587, the pending display flag is cleared.

In step D579, update is performed to reduce the value of the demo control timer by 1 in order to clock the customer waiting demo execution time.
In step D580, it is determined whether the value of the demo control timer has become 0 (that is, whether the set customer waiting demo execution time has elapsed). After D581 to D582 are sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D583, and if the value of the demo control timer is not 0, the process returns.

In step D581, in order to switch from customer waiting A to customer waiting B or from customer waiting B to customer waiting A, the value of the demo status is switched to data indicating the type of customer waiting demonstration effect different from the current one.
At step D 582, update for increasing the customer waiting control pointer by one is executed to advance the customer waiting demonstration effect.
In step D583, it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting control pointer indicates the last data in the customer waiting demo control table. If it is the last, the customer waiting demonstration effect is repeatedly executed from the repeat position of the customer waiting demonstration control table. In step D584, after setting the pointer value of the repeat position as data of the customer waiting control pointer, the process proceeds to step D585, otherwise proceeds to step D585 without executing step D584.
In step D585, a demo control timer corresponding to the value of the customer waiting control pointer at that time is set, and then the process returns.

According to the above customer waiting display editing process, as long as the customer waiting display control is underway (that is, during the customer waiting demonstration effect), “stop symbol display state” (guest waiting A) and “demo display state by movie reproduction” ( The customer waiting B) is alternately executed for a predetermined customer waiting demonstration execution time.
Although not shown, BGM may be played only during the first loop movie display in the customer waiting demo display (because it is noisy every time), and by pressing the effect button 9, the current display is displayed. A function capable of skipping to the next section may be provided so that it can be used when it is desired to view the display of customer waiting B or when it is troublesome. In this case, the effect button 9 may be invalidated for a certain period of time so that the screen is not switched excessively, or may be switched by pressing a plurality of times like double clicking. In addition, to save power, if the waiting-to-wait effect continues for a certain period of time, turn off the lighting of the decoration lamps in the waiting-to-wait demonstration effect or output the sound, or turn the image into a still image display to reduce power consumption. It is good also as composition. At that time, if the color of the image is set in accordance with the drive characteristics of the liquid crystal panel, the effect is enhanced.

[Background editing process]
Next, the details of the background editing process executed in step D553 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined at step D591 whether background display control is in progress (that is, background display is being executed). Note that the determination in step D591 can be made based on, for example, whether or not NULL (no setting) is set as the value of the background control pointer. For example, if NULL is set as the value of the background control pointer, it can be determined that background display control is not in progress. The background control pointer is a pointer that designates data in a background control table described later.

In step D592, it is determined whether the background information set in the above-described received command-based initialization process 1 or received command-based initialization process 2 is not NULL (no setting), and is not NULL (that is, data is set) If steps D593 to D597 are sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D598, and if NULL, the process proceeds to step D598 without executing steps D593 to D597.
The “background information” contains, for example, data of a head address of a background control table of a new effect when there is an instruction to change the background. For example, when the variable display of the special view is performed, data of background information for that (steps of specifying a specific background control table, for example, data of the head address) is set as background information in the above-described steps D289 and D307. . Therefore, the processing of this group (steps D593 to D597) is processing for initial setting in the case of performing new background rendering.

In step D593, data of background information is set as an initial value of the background control pointer.
At step D594, data of background information is set as a background control pointer return value.
In step D595, the background information is set to NULL (no setting).
At step D596, a background control timer corresponding to the background control pointer is set.
At step D597, a background switching presence flag is set.

In step D598, it is determined whether or not switching initialization of background control data (that is, the processing in steps D593 to D597) has been performed immediately before. If YES, steps D599 to D602 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D603. If not, the process proceeds to step D603 after step D606 is performed.
At step D606, a background information update determination process (described later) is executed.
At step D599, a background CG number corresponding to the background control pointer is set as the background number. Here, "corresponding to the background control pointer" means "corresponding to the data in the background control table designated by the background control pointer" (the same applies hereinafter). The background CG number is the number of the image data for background among the image data (character data) stored in the image ROM 322.
In step D600, a background index number corresponding to the background control pointer (in this example, the background is basically the deepest 0) is set as the background index.
In step D601, an audio output request corresponding to the background control pointer is set.
In step D602, a moving image index setting process (described later) is executed.

In step D603, it is determined based on the background control pointer whether the image type of the background is a moving image. If it is a moving image, the process proceeds to step D607. If it is a moving image, the process proceeds to step D604.
In step D604, it is similarly determined whether the image type of the background is a still image. If it is a still image, the process proceeds to step D608. If it is a still image, the process proceeds to step D605.
In step D605, it is similarly determined whether the background image type is display off (no display). If display is off, the process proceeds to step D609. If display is off, the process returns.
At step D607, a background moving image data editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D608, a background still image data editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D609, a background off data editing process (described later) is executed.

Background Information Update Determination Processing
Next, the details of the background information update determination process executed in step D606 in the above-described background editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D611, the address of the background control area is set, and the process proceeds to step D612. The background control area is an area for storing background rendering control data for controlling background display.
In step D612, it is determined whether background display control is in progress (background display is being executed), and if background display control is not in progress, the process returns. If background display control is in progress, the process proceeds to step D613.

  In step D613, it is determined whether or not time control is displayed. If time control is displayed, the process proceeds to step D615. If time control is not displayed, the process returns. The display with time control is a display that changes with the passage of time even if there is no change instruction based on a command from the main substrate.

In step D615, the value of the display timer that counts the time from the previous background change is reduced by one, and the process proceeds to step D616.
In step D616, it is determined whether the display timer has timed out. If time is up, update is performed to increase the value of the background control pointer by 1 in step D617, and then the process proceeds to step D618. To return.
In step D618, in the data in the background control table designated by the background control pointer, it is determined whether the display status code representing the state of background display is a symbol display system code waiting for a customer and waiting for a customer If it is a symbol display system code, the process proceeds to step D619, and if it is not a symbol display system code waiting for a customer, the process proceeds to step D631.

In step D619, it is determined whether the display status code is the customer waiting symbol display (display of the customer waiting A described above). If it is the customer waiting symbol display, the process proceeds to step D620. Go to D628.
In step D620, the symbol display flag and the hold display flag are set, and in step D621, the background control pointer is updated by one, and then the process proceeds to step D631.
In step D628, the symbol display flag and the hold display flag are cleared, and in step D629, updating is performed to increase the background control pointer by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step D631. .

In step D631, it is determined whether the display status code is a normal update. If the display status code is a normal update, the process returns after performing step D634, and if it is not a normal update, the process proceeds to step D632.
At step D634, the background rendering control data of the pointer position of the background control pointer is stored in the background control area, and then the process returns.
At step D632, it is determined whether the display status code is to return to the return position. If it is to return to the return position, steps D635 and D636 are sequentially executed and then return is made. move on.

At step D635, the background control pointer return value is set as the value (pointer value) of the background control pointer. At step D636, background rendering control data of the pointer position of the background control pointer (ie, control data corresponding to the return value) is stored in the background control area, and then the process returns.
In step D633, it is determined whether the display status code indicates the end of background rendering. If background rendering is the end, null (no setting) is set as the value of the background control pointer in step D637, and the process returns. Otherwise return.
According to the routine described above, updating of the background display with time control is realized.

[Video index setting process]
Next, details of the moving picture index setting process executed in step D602 in the above-described background editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D641 whether the image type of the background is a moving image based on the background control pointer, and if it is a moving image, the process proceeds to step D642; Return
At step D642, it is determined whether compression expansion is stopped (operation of expanding compressed moving image data is stopped), and if compression expansion is not stopped, step D642 is repeatedly executed to stop compression expansion. If there is, steps D643 to D650 are sequentially executed and the process returns. That is, the processes of steps D643 to D650 are executed while the compression and expansion are stopped.

In step D643, width and height data corresponding to the background CG number (the background number set in step D599 described above) are set.
At step D644, the background index number set at step D600 is loaded. It is, for example, 128 characters (including a movie, a background image, a pattern, etc.) that can be arranged on one screen by the VDP 312, and serial numbers (referred to as index or index number) are given to these 128 characters. Basically, 0 is set as the first (innermost) index in the index number (that is, the background index number) in the case of the background image. However, since the background data is not drawn at this point, the target background data is set to the invalid state flag.

In general, the term "character" means characters or characters having a property or character, or a property or character, and may also mean characters as computer terms. However, in the present application, in the description of image display control using VDP in particular, a group of still images or moving images such as a series of movies, background images, images of symbols, images of characters, etc. are referred to as characters. Image data (still image or moving image data) may be referred to as character data.
At step D645, VRAM index table setting processing (not described) is executed.
At step D646, initialization of the decoding circuit (compressed data expansion circuit 604) is instructed.
In step D647, the start address of stream data for background moving image display is set.

In step D648, an index of the image expansion area (area for expanding the compressed character data) is set. The expansion area is, for example, three areas of 0 to 2, and the number of areas to be used is specified in the process of step D648. In the case of a movie, the number of regions used varies depending on how the movie is configured, but one region is used for only I frames, two regions for I and P frames, and three regions for I, P and B frames. The index to be set is the value of the index numbers 0 to 2 described above. I, P, B frames are terms in the video compression technology by inter-frame prediction.
At step D649, an execution option is set. The execution option is for instructing various settings in the VDP regarding video playback.
At step D650, the start address of the image development sub-region is set. The image development sub-area is a memory area used auxiliary to the development of an image.

[Background video data editing process]
Next, the details of the background moving image data editing process executed in step D 607 in the above-described background editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D661 to D665 are sequentially executed and then return.
At step D661, the above-mentioned index of the image data (character data) to be instructed to draw to the VDP 312 is set.

At step D662, the attribute of the image data is set. Here, basic information (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image data is set.
At step D663, a drawing effect (setting of transparency, depth information, etc.) used to display the image data is set.
At step D664, the sprite is pasted to the virtual drawing space. This is processing for displaying the image by so-called sprite drawing.
At step D665, a compression / expansion request flag is set. This is a process for requesting the VDP 312 to expand because the moving image is compressed.

[Background still image data editing process]
Next, details of the background still image data editing process executed in step D 608 in the above-described background editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D671 to D674 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
At step D671, the VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data (still image) to be drawn to the VRAM. Since character data (so-called character data) is compressed, it is developed after being developed in VRAM. When image data is specified, the VDP 312 automatically develops in the VRAM.

At step D672, the attribute of the image data is set. Here, basic information (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image is set.
At step D673, a drawing effect (setting of transparency, depth information, etc.) used to display the image is set.
At step D674, the sprite is pasted to the virtual drawing space. That is, the character data expanded on the VRAM is pasted to the frame buffer of the VDP 312. This is a process for displaying the image by so-called sprite drawing.

[Background off data editing process]
Next, the details of the background off data editing process executed in step D609 in the above-described background editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D681 to D683 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
At step D681, the fill color of the screen is set.
At step D682, a drawing effect is set.
At step D683, a sprite for painting the screen is pasted to the virtual drawing space.
The processes in steps D681 to D683 described above do not use data in the character ROM (image ROM 322) (i.e., character data) but perform drawing using the function of the VDP 312 (rectangle drawing etc.). This function is effective when the entire screen fades in or out in white or black.

[Background notice editing process]
Next, the details of the background notice editing process executed in step D554 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. In this routine, display setting of a notice character displayed at a position which is the front of the background and the rear of the special view is performed. In other words, the notice editing performed in the background is performed.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D691 whether background notice display control is in progress, and if background notice display control is not in progress (that is, background notice effect is not being executed), the process returns. If it is (that is, if the background preview effect is being executed), the address of the background preview information area is set in step D692, and the process proceeds to step D693.

  Here, the background notice information area is background notice data (described later) used for background notice display by the above-described received command-based initialization process 2 (especially, random number lottery processes A, B, C, and notice effect setting processes 1 and 2). In the notice control table, for example, address information specifying a row is set. Here, background notice data is, in principle, defined in the scenario table of the variation pattern corresponding to the command from the main board, or the detailed variation table of the left / middle / right symbol, and linked with the movement of the special figure It is configured to be written to the background notice information area at the timing. There are multiple types of preview effects performed at a certain timing, but using the preview data values determined in the random number lottery process (random number lottery processes A, B, C, etc.) described above, effects selected in advance can be performed. It is doing so.

In step D693, it is determined whether the background notice data is set in the background notice information area. If background notice data is set, steps D694 and D695 are sequentially executed based on the background notice data, and the process returns. If the background notice data is not set, the process returns without executing steps D694 and D695.
At step D694, advance notice information update determination processing (described later) is executed. At step D695, advance notice display data editing processing (described later) is executed.

[Notice Information Update Determination Processing]
Next, details of the notice information update determination process executed in step D694 (or steps D864 and D914 of notice edit processes 1 and 2 described later) in the above-mentioned background notice editing process will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. .
When this routine is started, first, at step D701, the data of the notice control table pointer indicated by the background notice data inputted in the notice control area (corresponding to the background notice information area at step D692) is loaded, and the process proceeds to step D702. .

Here, the data of the advance notice control table pointer is an address (for example, a top address) in which control data in the form of a table (hereinafter referred to as a notice advance control table) for controlling the notice effect is stored. That is, when the data of the notice control table pointer is determined, one of a plurality of notice control tables is determined (selected) corresponding to the data, and a specific position (row) in the notice control table is designated. It will be done. The pointer means a storage area of a RAM (in this example, the RAM 311a) in which data of an address such as a table address is stored. Also, control data such as the advance notice control table is stored in the ROM (PROM 321 in this example). The advance notice control table pointer stores the address of the storage area of the ROM in which the data of the advance notice control table is stored.
Then, various data types (for example, an image pattern table address for specifying the type of character, a coordinate table address for specifying the display position of the character, and transparency of the character are specified in the notice control table. There are a plurality of transmission table addresses, etc.), and a plurality of data (data such as parameters and table addresses) are set in order of progress for each data type, and effects are performed by appropriately referring to these data in order of progress. When the data set in the advance notice control table is a table address (information indicating a storage area in which the data of the table is stored), the data further corresponds to the area indicated by the data (that is, the address) of the table address. There is a type of control data table (for example, a coordinate table, an image pattern table, a transparent table), and effects are performed with reference to this control data table. Further, a plurality of different advance notice control tables are registered in advance, and one of the notice control tables is appropriately selected and used for the type of effect and each section (scenario) in effect. At that time, it is the data of the notice control table pointer (that is, the data stored in the storage area of the notice control table pointer) that designates which notice control table is to be used. Hereinafter, for example, the description “specified by the notice control table pointer” specifically means that the data of the notice control table pointer is specified.
As with the notice control table pointer as a pointer for specifying a notice control table, there is an image pattern control pointer as a pointer for specifying an image pattern table, and there is a coordinate control pointer as a pointer for specifying a coordinate table. There is a transparent control pointer as a pointer specifying a table.

  In step D702, in the notice control table designated by the notice control table pointer loaded in step D701, it is determined whether the notice status is continuation of notice control. If advance notice control is not continued, the process proceeds to step D721 to continue notice control. If so, the process proceeds to step D703.

In step D703, it is determined whether the value of the advance notice display start delay timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, update is performed to reduce the value of the notice display start delay timer by 1 in step D704. If it is not larger than 0 (in the case of 0 or less), the process proceeds to step D706.
In step D705, it is determined whether the advance notice display start delay timer has timed up (whether the value has become 0). If the time up has occurred, the sound number corresponding to the effect is set in the notice sound area in step D715 and then return is made. If the time is not up, the process proceeds to step D706.

  When it is desired to send the reflection of the notice effect from the reference time, the notice display start delay timer is set (in this example, it is set in step D725 described later). When this delay timer is not set (at the time of 0), effects are performed according to the reference time. For example, the timing at which the rendering is performed, such as the first step of the step-up notice, is basically determined substantially for each model. This is to prevent curtailment of curiosity falling as it is not possible to predict at each broken timing. However, even with the same SU1 effect, the type of characters appearing by distribution is changed, the reliability is changed, and the interest of the game is enhanced, and even if the effect at the same basic timing is different the effect time depending on the effect content In such a case, according to the notice display start delay timer, the start time of the effect can be finely adjusted, and the timing of the end of the effect can be matched.

  Step D 715 is a process for starting to sound at the advance start timing. In the case of proceeding to step D715, since the advance notice display start delay timer has timed up, the advance notice effect is started, but this is a process for starting to sound at the start timing. However, depending on the type of advance notice, the output of sound may not be required, and in this case, the process of step D715 is skipped.

In step D706, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more, steps D707 and D708 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step D709.
Here, the display frame counter will be described. There is also a scenario during one preview production, and it is necessary to set a time value for each section of the preview production. The display frame counter is a counter that counts the remaining time of the time value of each section. While the value of this display frame counter is 0 or more (that is, while there is the remaining time), it is necessary to update the type of the character, the display coordinates, etc. every frame, and the processing for that is step D707 and subsequent steps. It is a process.

In step D 707, if the preview effect currently being executed has not reached the final data, the image pattern control pointer is updated by 1 (that is, switching to the next data arranged in the order of progress in the above-described preview control table) Do the same for the control pointer of
In step D 708, if the currently performed advance notice effect has not reached the final data, update is performed to increase the coordinate control pointer by one.
If it progresses to step D709, it will be determined whether the setting of the transparent table (table-like transparent data) is present in the notice effect currently being executed, and if the transparent table is set, the process proceeds to step D710. Go to step D711.

At step D710, if the notice effect currently being executed has not reached the final data, update is performed to increase the transparency control pointer by one, and then the process proceeds to step D711.
In step D711, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is greater than 0. If the value is greater than 0, update is performed to reduce the value of the display frame counter by 1 in step D712, and then the process proceeds to step D713. The process proceeds to step D713 without executing step D712.

  In step D713, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is 0. If 0, update is performed to increase the value of the advance notice control table pointer by 1 in step D714, and then the process proceeds to step D721. If not 0, the process returns . Here, when the display frame counter = 0, the notice control table pointer is updated to shift to the next scenario. The flow of the scenario is defined in the advance notice control table, and the position (row) in the notice control table designated by the notice control table pointer is switched to the next one by updating to increase the value of the notice control table pointer by one.

In step D721, it is determined whether the advance notice status is initialized. If not initialized, the process proceeds to step D722. If the initialization is performed, steps D732 and D733 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D725.
At step D732, update is performed to increase the advance notice control table pointer by one.
At step D733, the value of the advance notice control table pointer at that time is set as a table pointer return value.
In step D722, it is determined whether the advance notice status is a normal update. If it is not a normal update, the process proceeds to step D723. If it is a normal update, the process proceeds to step D725.

In step D723, it is determined whether the advance notice status returns to the return position. If the return position is not returned to, the process proceeds to step D724.
At step D734, the control table pointer return value (the table pointer return value set at step D733) is set as the value of the advance notice control table pointer.

In step D724, it is determined whether the notice status indicates the end of the notice effect. If the notice effect is not ended, the process proceeds to step D725. If the notice effect is ended, step D735 sets NULL in the notice control table pointer. Go to D725. When NULL is set in the advance notice control table pointer, the execution of the advance notice effect ends.
At step D725, a notice display start delay timer is set, and at step D726, a notice display frame counter (the above-mentioned display frame counter) is set, and then the process goes to step D727.

  In step D727, it is determined whether the value of the advance notice display start delay timer is 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step D729. If it is 0, the corresponding audio output request is set in step D728, and the process proceeds to step D729. This is a process for immediately starting to make a sound, since the notice effect is started immediately when the delay timer = 0. Depending on the type of advance notice, it may be configured not to require sound output.

  At step D729, an image pattern control pointer is set, then at step D730, a coordinate control pointer is set, then, at step D731, a transparency control pointer is set, and then the process returns. Here, since a new effect (including continuation of a scenario) is to be performed, it is necessary to specify a new control data table corresponding to the effect. Steps D729 to D731 are processing to set the start address of the new control data table.

After step D731, the process proceeds to steps D1201 to D1208.
In step D1201, it is determined whether or not there is an inter-sub command setting, and if there is no setting, the routine ends and returns. On the other hand, if there is an inter-sub command setting, the process advances to step D1202 to set data corresponding to the contents of the command (inter-sub command). With data setting, set the rendering operation table for the own game machine (own device) to operate according to the contents of the command between the sub (a rendering operation table corresponding to the first command ), Or setting / clearing a sub-intermediate execution execution flag.
In addition, in the state where there is a setting of the command between the subs in step D1201, the notice that the interlocking notice effect is given while the variable display game based on the fluctuation command of the symbol transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 is being executed When it comes to the timing, it corresponds to the situation that the inter-sub command is defined on the advance notice table at that time, and at this time, the start condition of the inter-sub advance notice effect by the inter-sub communication is satisfied.

Here, an example of setting of the rendering operation table for the self-playing machine (own machine) to operate is shown as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 167 shows an example of setting of the advance notice operation table when it is determined that the other device executes the effect in response to the instruction of “inter-subset interlocked notice system command”.
First, FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of the advance notice operation table NJ of the own machine, and the contents thereof are as follows.
"Const": Modifier in c language to represent a constant.
"YOKOKU_INFO": Indicates a structure name defined by a user (here, a game machine developer, hereinafter the same).
The structure here refers to an assembly of one row of “sts ̃transmission p”. There are 4 lines in the same sequence, and it is defined as one table that summarizes them (the range enclosed by the first and last {}).
"S_YOK_NJ1A": Indicates the table name assigned by the user.
"//": In each line, the right of this mark indicates a comment.
Specifically, the structure name (YOKOKU_INFO, table name; s_YOK_NJ1A) indicates, for example, the notice operation table 1 specified in the first line of the left symbol fluctuation table (the opening fluctuation table).

  As main data types of the notice operation table NJ, as shown in FIG. 166, sts (status), start f (start frame), display f (display frame), sound (sound parameter), inter-sub command, image p There are (image pattern table address), coordinate p (coordinate table address), and transmission p (transmission table address). The details are as follows.

sts (status): A code representing control contents in each row.
If this code is "sINI", it means start of control (if necessary, perform initialization). If it is "1", notice control continues (goes to the next line when control of the current line is finished) And means "sEND" to mean control termination.
Start f (start frame): indicates the number of frames corresponding to the waiting time (set value of the advance notice display start delay timer (delay timer)) until starting the rendering operation of the current line.
If the value of the start f (start frame) is “0”, it immediately starts (delay time is 0), and if it is other than “0”, it is a time multiplied by a frame switching cycle (for example, 1/30 second). If this start frame is, for example, “45” and the frame switching cycle is 1/30 seconds, the delay time is 1.5 seconds (= 45/30 seconds).

Display f (display frame): represents the time to execute the current line.
That is, it is the number of frames corresponding to the time from the start to the end of the control process of the current line.
In the case of the interlocking advance notice command (for example, “inter-subset interlocked notice system command”), after waiting for the lapse of a predetermined delay time (start f minutes) in anticipation of the time taken to transmit the interlocking advance notice command The own machine is set to start rendering (in this example, 2f).
Sound (sound parameter): Indicates a phrase number of voice (for example, corresponding to a voice number).
If this is "0", it means no voice output request.
Sub-sub command: When sending an inter-sub command, this is a parameter for setting a command to send. If you do not want to send inter-sub commands, set "0". For example, YOK_NJ1 is set in the case of sending the “inter-subset interlocked notice system command”. The command to be set is data in the form of SB_MODE, SB_ACT (refer to the packet configuration example of inter-sub communication shown in FIG. 158).

Image p (image pattern table address): information corresponding to an address of an image data table for specifying character data (image data) to be displayed on the display device 41 as a rendering operation.
If this is "NULL", there is no table (no character drawing), which means that there is no image display in the rendering operation.
Coordinate p (coordinate table address): information indicating an address of a coordinate data table (specifying a display position) of a character to be displayed.
If this is "NULL", there will be no table (no character drawing).
Transparent p (Transparent Table Address): Information corresponding to the address of the transparent data table for specifying the transparency of the character to be displayed.
If this is "NULL", it means that the transparency setting is not performed.

Next, FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the notice operation table when it is determined that the other machine executes the rendering in response to the instruction of “inter-subset interlock notice system command”, the contents of which are as follows.
The structure name (YOKOKU_INFO) of the advance notice operation table of another machine is s_YOK_NJ1B, and the main data types of the notice action table NJ1B are the same as those shown in FIG. 166, sts (status), start f (start There are a frame), a display f (display frame), a sound (sound parameter), an inter-sub command, an image p (image pattern table address), a coordinate p (coordinate table address) and a transparent p (transparent table address).
In this example, the parameters of the inter-sub command are all "0", and the inter-sub command is not sent to other gaming machines.
When the other device receives the "inter-subset interlocked notice system command", the notice effect instructed by the "sub-subset interlocked notice system command" is executed without providing a delay time. Therefore, all parameters of the display f (display frame) are “0”.
Although the type of the advance notice operation table is not limited to one type as shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, this specific example is described as a representative example in order to simplify the description.

Next, in step D1203, it is determined whether inter-sub data transmission is in progress. If transmission is not in progress, the process proceeds to step D1204 to determine a transmission destination ID based on the content of the command. This is for specifying the ID of the other party (other game machine) to which data is to be transmitted by inter-sub communication. In the case of transmitting a command for waiting for customer effects, etc. I will specify the ID. In that case, an ID for all units (except the own machine) is determined as the transmission destination ID.
As shown in the example of the packet configuration in FIG. 158, in this example, when all IDs in the same group of islands are specified, “0F” is set as the terminal ID of the transmission destination, and all terminals are targets. Notify that there is. Also, in the case of an effect such as communicating with a specific one, the ID of that one is specified.
On the other hand, if inter-sub data transmission is in progress in step D1203, the routine ends and returns.
After passing through step D 1204, the process advances to step D 1205 to perform inter-sub transmission data edit processing (FIG. 120). Next, at step D1206, the inter-sub transmission request flag is set. The inter-sub transmission request flag is used in the determination of step D461. When the inter-sub transmission request flag is set, inter-sub transmission is started.

Next, in step D1207, it is determined whether the sub-interval command to be transmitted this time is a command for waiting for ack, and if it is not a command for waiting for ack, the process returns. On the other hand, if the command is to wait for ack, the process proceeds to step D1208 to set the initial value of the ack waiting timer.
As described above, in this example, the sub-sub command of the customer waiting demo synchronization contains the content for requesting the reply of ack, but the same applies to the “sub-interlock notification system command”, so the steps are performed. In D1207, it is determined whether or not the command is for waiting for ack, and if it is the same command, the initial value of the ack waiting timer is set.
In this way, a certain fluctuation pattern is to be performed in the own machine, and for example, when the notice mode A is drawn, the symbol change of the special figure proceeds and the occurrence time of the notice mode A comes, the notice mode A A table for executing is set in the notice control area and notice is executed. Then, although the scenario of the notice mode A is defined on the table in the own machine, if the transmission command to another machine (for example, “inter-subset interlocking notice system command”) is also defined in the table, it is described above In step D1201, it is determined that there is an inter-sub command setting.
In addition, as another machine receives the “Inter-subset interlocking notice system command”, and when it is decided to execute the effect for the instruction of the command (sub-subgroup interlocking notice system command), the notice operation table is set and I will give notice.

[Notice Display Data Editing Process]
Next, details of the notice display data editing process executed in step D695 (or steps D865 and D915 of the notice editing processes 1 and 2, which will be described later) in the background notice editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of creating a drawing instruction command (command to VDP 312) of a character of preview effect (including a movie, etc. The image is stored in the character ROM (image ROM 322)). The same applies to the processing of the subsequent drawings (FIGS. 135 to 147).
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D741 whether the value of the advance notice display start delay timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the process returns. If it is not greater than 0 (if it is less than 0) Go to step D742.

In step D742, it is determined whether the data in the image pattern table designated by the image pattern control pointer is NULL (no setting). If NULL, the process returns. If not NULL, steps D743 to D745 are sequentially executed. Go to step D746.
At step D743, various parameters (image data ID, width, height, etc.) of the image data (ie, character data) are acquired from the image pattern table.
At step D744, coordinate data of the image data is acquired from a coordinate table designated by the coordinate control pointer.
In step D745, transmission data without transmission is set. Although the transmission data is set in step D747 described later as necessary, here, no transmission is set as a default value of the transmission data.

In step D746, it is determined whether the data in the transparent table designated by the transparent control pointer is NULL (no setting). If NULL, the process proceeds to step D748. If not NULL, the process proceeds to step D748 after performing step D747. .
In step D 747, the transmission data (that is once set to no transmission in step D 745) is replaced with data (which may have no transmission) corresponding to the transmission table.

In step D748, steps D748 to D752 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
At step D748, the loading of image data (character data) corresponding to the parameter acquired at step D743 to the VRAM is instructed.
In step D749, the attribute (number of colors, color pallet, coordinates, etc.) of the image data is set in accordance with the parameters acquired in step D743 and the coordinate data acquired in step D744.
In step D750, transmission parameters of the image data (such as whether or not to perform transmission control to make an image having transparency, degree of transparency, etc.) are set according to the transmission data.
In step D751, the drawing effect (the setting of transparency, depth information, etc.) of the image data is set.
At step D752, the sprite is pasted to the virtual drawing space. This is processing for displaying the image (character) by so-called sprite drawing.

[Symbol editing process]
Next, the details of the symbol editing process executed in step D555 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D761 whether the data of the symbol variation table area (for example, the information of the top address of the symbol variation table) is NULL (no setting). If it is NULL, the process returns. If not, the process proceeds to step D763 after step D762 is performed. Here, in step D761, "left symbol variation table area" in step D781 described later, "variation table area in left symbol control area" in step D782, "middle symbol variation table area" in step D785, and "step symbol D786" It is checked whether all six areas of the variation table area in the middle symbol control area, the "right symbol fluctuation table area" in step D789 and the "variation table area in right symbol control area" in step D790 are all NULL.
In step D762, symbol information expansion processing (described later) is executed based on the data of the symbol variation table specified by the data of the symbol variation table area.

  In the symbol variation table, a plurality of address data for specifying a symbol control table to be described later is set in the form of a table. In the above-mentioned received command separate initialization process 1 and received command separate initialization process 2, a table corresponding to a command from the main board is selected from a plurality of symbol variation tables, and which row (record) on this table is selected Whether to use is determined by random number lottery processing (random number lottery processing A, B, C described above). Then, information indicating the symbol fluctuation table and the line (record) determined in this manner is written as data of the symbol fluctuation table area. The symbol variation table includes types such as an early stage variation table, a first half variation table, and a second half variation table. Further, the symbol variation table includes a left symbol variation table, a middle symbol variation table, and a right symbol variation table.

In addition, there is a symbol variation table pointer as a pointer for storing data of the symbol variation table (that is, a pointer for specifying the symbol control table). Here, for example, table-like control data (hereinafter referred to as a symbol control table) for controlling symbol variation (variation display of a special figure (decorative symbol) on the display device 41) is stored as data of the symbol variation table Address (for example, the start address). That is, when the data of the symbol variation table pointer is determined, one of a plurality of symbol control tables is determined (selected) for this data, and a specific position (line) in the symbol control table is designated. It will be In this symbol control table, various data types (for example, symbol operation pattern, symbol update information, number of control frames, control repeat number, coordinate table address for specifying symbol display position (X coordinate table address and Y There are coordinate table addresses), transparent table addresses for specifying the transparency of symbols, etc.) A plurality of data (parameters, table addresses and pattern data) are set in order of progress for each of these data types. The symbol variation is performed with appropriate reference to the progression order. When the data set in the symbol control table is a table address, a control data table of the corresponding type (for example, X coordinate table, Y coordinate) is further displayed in the area indicated by the data of the table address (ie address). There is a table, a transparent table), and symbol variation is performed with reference to this control data table.
A coordinate control pointer (X coordinate table pointer and Y coordinate table pointer) is a pointer for specifying the coordinate table (X coordinate table, Y coordinate table), and a transparent table pointer is a pointer for specifying the transparent table.

  In step D763, it is determined whether or not decorative design display (display for special effects) is performed based on the processing result in step D762, and if there is not, the process returns. If there is not, steps D764 to D772 are sequentially executed. I will return later. In this step D763, for example, when all the data of each symbol variation table is NULL (all determination results of steps D781, D785, D789 described later are YES), it is determined that there is no execution of the decoration symbol display and returns It will be done.

At step D764, the start address of the middle symbol control area is set. The middle symbol control area is an area in which the address of the symbol control table designated for the middle symbol is stored in the symbol information expansion process (step D786 described later). That is, in this step D764, the top address of the symbol control table designated for the middle symbol is set to display the middle symbol. In addition, the symbol control table of the middle symbol is designated (selected) by the data of the symbol variation table pointer described above (specifically, the data of the middle symbol variation table).
In addition, the symbol control area (middle symbol control area, left symbol control area, and right symbol control area) is not only the table address (data of the symbol variation table pointer), but also the display symbol number, stop symbol number, current frame counter A group (structure) of a storage area in a RAM (in this example, a RAM in the CPU 311) in which data such as a table pointer of a coordinate table is stored, and is constituted by a plurality of bytes. For this reason, the inside of each symbol control area is divided into a plurality of areas. Among them, the area storing the table address (data of the symbol variation table pointer) is referred to as a "variation table region". The "variation table area" is provided for the early stage fluctuation table, the first half fluctuation table, and the second half fluctuation table, respectively, for a total of three areas. Further, in each symbol control area, an area for storing data of a table pointer (X coordinate table pointer, Y coordinate table pointer) of a coordinate table or data of a table pointer (transparent table pointer) of a transparent table, respectively It is called "X coordinate table area", "Y coordinate table area", and "transparent table area".
In step D765, the current symbol display editing process (described later) is executed on the middle symbol based on the setting in step D764, and the next symbol display editing process (described later) is performed on the middle symbol in step D766.

At step D767, the start address of the left symbol control area is set. The left symbol control area is an area where the address of the symbol control table designated for the left symbol is stored in the symbol information expansion process (step D782 described later). That is, in this step D767, the top address of the symbol control table designated for the left symbol is set to display the left symbol. The symbol control table of the left symbol is designated (selected) by the data of the symbol variation table pointer (specifically, the data of the left symbol variation table) described above.
At step D768, the present symbol display editing process (described later) is executed for the left symbol based on the setting of step D767, and the next symbol display editing process (described later) is similarly executed for the left symbol at step D769.

At step D770, the start address of the right symbol control area is set. The right symbol control area is an area in which the address of the symbol control table designated for the right symbol is stored in the symbol information expansion process (step D790 described later). That is, in step D770, the top address of the symbol control table designated for the right symbol is set to display the right symbol. In addition, the symbol control table of the right symbol is designated (selected) by the data of the symbol variation table pointer (specifically, the data of the right symbol variation table) described above.
At step D771, the present symbol display editing process (described later) is executed for the right symbol based on the setting of step D770, and the next symbol display editing process (described later) is similarly executed for the right symbol.

  The "actual symbol" is a symbol of a special figure displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center) in the scroll direction, and the "next symbol" is a special symbol displayed at the predetermined position next to the present symbol. It is a symbol of a figure, and "previous symbol" is a symbol of a special figure displayed in the said predetermined position in front of the present symbol. In this routine (and other related routines), only the processing of the "current symbol" and the "next symbol" is illustrated and described for simplicity of explanation, but the symbols in the same row are displayed on the screen 3 In the case of a model in which symbols can be seen, it is necessary to execute the display editing process of "previous symbol" in the same manner. This point needs to be adaptive according to the model specification, and there may be various modes. For example, in the case of a model in which four symbols or more may be seen, the display editing process is further increased.

[Symbol information development processing]
Next, the details of the symbol information expansion processing executed in step D762 in the above-mentioned symbol editing processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D 781 whether data in the left symbol variation table area (that is, address information for specifying a symbol control table for left symbol) is NULL (no setting), and is NULL In step D785, if not NULL, steps D782 to D784 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D785.

In step D782, the table address indicated by the data in the left symbol variation table area is set in the left symbol control area. Specifically, the table address indicated by the data of the symbol variation table region in each variation table region (for the early stage variation table, for the first half variation table, for the second half variation table) in the left symbol control region (left symbol variation table in the early stage variation table The address of the left symbol variation table in the first half variation table, the address of the left symbol variation table in the second half variation table) are set.
At step D783, NULL is set in the left symbol variation table area.
In step D784, various control parameters of the left symbol are acquired and stored from the symbol control table for the left symbol designated by the table address set in the left symbol control area in step D782.
Here, in the various control parameters of the symbol, as described in the description of the symbol control table, the motion pattern, symbol update information, the number of control frames, the number of control repeats, the X coordinate table pointer, the Y coordinate table pointer, the transparency table There is a pointer etc. Here, the symbol update information is information for controlling whether or not the symbol is updated, and the number of control frames and the number of control repeats are parameters used in the variation parameter update process described later.

At step D785, it is determined whether the data of the middle symbol variation table area (that is, the address information for specifying the symbol control table for middle symbol) is NULL (no setting), and if it is NULL, the procedure proceeds to step D789. If not NULL, steps D786 to D788 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D789.
In step D786, the table address indicated by the data in the middle symbol variation table area is set in the middle symbol control area. Specifically, the table address indicated by the data of the symbol variation table region in each variation table region (for the early stage variation table, for the first half variation table, for the second half variation table) in the middle symbol control region (middle symbol variation table in the early stage variation table The address of the middle symbol variation table in the first half variation table, the address of the middle symbol variation table in the second half variation table) are set.
At step D787, NULL is set in the middle symbol variation table area.
In step D788, various control parameters of the middle symbol are acquired and stored from the symbol control table for the middle symbol designated by the table address set in the middle symbol control area in step D786.

In step D 789, it is determined whether the data of the right symbol variation table area (that is, the address information for specifying the symbol control table for the right symbol) is NULL (no setting), and if NULL, return and not NULL In this case, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D790 to D792.
In step D790, the table address indicated by the data in the right symbol variation table area is set in the right symbol control area. Specifically, the table address indicated by the data of the symbol variation table region in each variation table region (for the early stage variation table, for the first half variation table, for the second half variation table) in the right symbol control region (right symbol variation table in the early stage variation table The address of the first symbol variation table, the address of the right symbol variation table in the first half variation table, and the address of the right symbol variation table in the second half variation table) are respectively set.
In step D791, NULL is set in the right symbol variation table area.
In step D792, various control parameters of the right symbol are acquired and stored from the symbol control table for the right symbol designated by the table address set in the right symbol control area in step D790.

[Current symbol display editing process]
Next, the details of the current symbol display editing process executed in steps D765, D768 and D771 in the above-mentioned symbol editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D801 to D803 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D804.
In step D801, a CG number (ID of image data) corresponding to a symbol number (symbol number to be displayed on the display device 41 as a present symbol) is set as a CG number of the present symbol. If only numbers are symbols, this setting is changed in step D821 described later.
In step D802, data of width and height in normal size and data of no transparency are set for the current symbol. The setting here is a setting as a default value, and is changed when step D816 or the like described later is executed.

In step D803, data of X coordinate and Y coordinate in the symbol control table corresponding to the control table pointer (data corresponding to the X coordinate table pointer and the Y coordinate table pointer acquired in the above-mentioned step D784 etc.) is acquired and set Do. The setting here is a setting as a default value, and is changed when step D817 or the like described later is executed. Further, the data of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate is data for determining the display position on the screen of the display device 41.
In addition, as the coordinate data (data of X coordinate and Y coordinate), in principle, data (absolute coordinate data) of the display position of the symbol in each frame unit is a coordinate table (X coordinate table, Y coordinate table) It is lined up by the necessary number of frames above. Here, if all the coordinate data for the number of frames of the entire rendering time are defined in a list, it is only necessary to sequentially use the data, so coordinate control can be performed very easily (for example, control processing is simplified Become). However, in this case, there is a demerit that the amount of data in the coordinate table becomes enormous. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the table is divided and defined for each place where the movement is periodically repeated, and the table corresponding to the operation Is appropriately selected and used. With this configuration, it is necessary to set a table according to the situation and control to repeat the same operation, but the amount of coordinate data can be extremely reduced and the capacity of the expensive memory (ROM) is significantly reduced. Benefits such as being able to contribute significantly to cost reductions. For example, since the same movement is repeated for a while while the symbol scrolls down rapidly at high speed, a coordinate table is defined in which one set of coordinate data for the number of frames when moving from top to bottom is provided, The amount of data can be extremely reduced because the high speed scroll period is sufficient if the coordinate table is repeatedly used. Although coordinate control of symbols is possible with either configuration, as described above, control is performed with the latter configuration in this embodiment. Also, in this embodiment, X-coordinate and Y-coordinate tables are defined separately, and each table is selected as required (for example, left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol are aligned, but high-speed When scrolling downward, the X coordinate of each symbol is different but the Y coordinate is the same, so the X coordinate table uses a different table for each symbol, and the Y coordinate table can use the same table. However, the X coordinate and Y coordinate, and other display parameters may be defined in the same table. Further, although an example in which control is performed using absolute coordinates has been presented, control may be performed using relative coordinate data (movement amount data from the previous position, distance data from a reference object, or the like). The configuration of the coordinate control (the configuration of the coordinate table, etc.) described above is not limited to the design, and the same applies to coordinate control of all objects (characters) displayed on the screen.
In step D804, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern acquired in step D784 or the like indicates the non-display, and if it is non-display, the symbol is not displayed and the process returns.

In step D805, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates reduced screen corner display. If reduced screen corner display is displayed, no further setting is necessary, so that the process returns. Go to D806.
In step D806, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates an enlarged display. If the data is enlarged display, steps D816 and D817 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D809. If not enlarged, the process proceeds to step D807.
In step D816, the width and height data in enlarged size is set for the current symbol.
In step D817, Y coordinate data at the time of enlargement is calculated and set for the current symbol.

In step D807, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates a return operation to the normal size. If the return operation is to the normal size, steps D818 and D819 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D809 If the return operation is not performed, the process proceeds to step D808.
In step D818, width and height data corresponding to the current size are calculated and set for the current symbol.
At step D819, Y coordinate data corresponding to the current size is calculated and set.

When the process proceeds to step D808, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates only numerals, and if only numerals are symbols, steps D820 and D821 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D809. If not only numerals, step D809 Go to
In step D820, only the numbers are set with width and height data in the symbol.
In step D821, only the number corresponding to the symbol number is changed to the CG number of the symbol.

At step D809, it is determined whether the transparent data of the current symbol is not NULL. If it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D811. If it is not NULL, the transparent data (set at step D784 etc.) is obtained at step D810. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step D811. In step D811, steps D811 to D815 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
At step D811, the loading of image data of the current symbol (corresponding to the CG number set at step D801 or D821) to the VRAM is instructed.

In step D812, the attributes (the number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image data are set based on the processing results so far.
In step D813, the transmission parameter of the image data is set based on the transmission data.
At step D814, the drawing effect of the image data is set.
At step D815, the sprite of the image is pasted to the virtual drawing space.
To VDP 312 for drawing (displaying) the "current symbol" (left symbol, middle symbol or right symbol) corresponding to the data of various control parameters stored in the above-mentioned steps D784, D788, D792 by the above processing Is edited.

[Next symbol display editing process]
Next, the details of the next symbol display editing process executed in steps D766, D769, and D772 in the above-mentioned symbol editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D831, a symbol number (for example, the number following the symbol number of the current symbol in step D801) is loaded as the number of the next symbol, and then the process proceeds to step D832.
In step D832, it is determined whether or not the number obtained by adding 1 to the symbol number loaded in step D831 is greater than the symbol number upper limit, and if it is not greater, the procedure proceeds to step D834. After changing the symbol No. loaded in step D831 to 0, the process proceeds to step D834.

In step D834, steps D834 to D836 are sequentially performed, and then the process proceeds to step D837.
At step D834, the CG number (ID of the image data) corresponding to the load value is set as the CG number of the next symbol.
In step D 835, data on width and height in normal size and data on no transparency are set for the next symbol. The setting here is a setting as a default value, and is changed when step D849 described later is executed.

At step D836, based on the coordinate data of the current symbol set in the above-mentioned present symbol display editing process, data of X coordinate and Y coordinate of the next symbol are relatively calculated and set. The setting here is a setting as a default value, and is changed when step D850 or the like described later is executed.
In step D837, it is determined whether the data of the motion pattern acquired in step D784 or the like indicates the non-display, and if it is non-display, the symbol is not displayed and the process returns. If it is not non-display, the process proceeds to step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates reduced screen corner display. If reduced screen corner display is displayed, no further setting is necessary, so that the process returns. Go to D839.
In step D838, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates only numerals, and if it is only numerals, no further setting is necessary, and if it is not only numerals, the operation proceeds to step D840. .

In step D840, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates an enlarged display. If the data is enlarged display, steps D849 and D850 are sequentially executed and then the process proceeds to step D842. If not enlarged, the process proceeds to step D841.
In step D849, width and height data in enlarged size are set for the next symbol.
In step D850, Y coordinate data at the time of enlargement is calculated and set for the next symbol.

In step D841, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates a return operation to the normal size. If the return operation is to the normal size, steps D851 and D852 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D842 and the normal size If it is not a return operation, the process proceeds to step D842 without executing steps D851 and D852.
In step D851, width and height data corresponding to the current size are calculated and set for the next symbol.
At step D852, Y coordinate data corresponding to the current size is calculated and set for the next symbol.

In step D842, it is determined whether the next symbol transparent data is not NULL. If it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D844, and if it is not NULL, the transparent data is acquired in step D843 and then the process proceeds to step D844. In step D844, the processes in steps D844 to D848 are sequentially performed, and then the process returns.
In step D844, the loading of the image data of the next symbol (corresponding to the CG number set in step D834) to the VRAM is instructed.

At step D845, the attributes (the number of colors, color palettes, coordinates, etc.) of the image data are set based on the processing results so far.
In step D846, the transmission parameter of the image data is set based on the transmission data.
At step D847, the drawing effect of the image data is set.
At step D848, the sprite of the image is pasted into the virtual drawing space.
By the above processing, the "next symbol" (left symbol, middle symbol or right symbol) is drawn (displayed) for the "current symbol" corresponding to the data of various control parameters stored in the above-mentioned steps D784, D788, D792. The command to VDP 312 to make it be edited is edited.

[Notice Editing Process 1]
Next, details of the notice editing process 1 executed in step D556 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. In this routine, display setting of a notice character displayed at a position on the front side of the special view and on the rear side of the hold display is performed.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D861 whether the advance notice display control is in progress, and if the advance notice display control is not in progress (that is, if the advance notice effect is not being executed), If the notice effect is being executed), the address of the notice information area is set in step D862, and the process proceeds to step D863.
Here, the notice information area is, for example, an area in which notice data (for example, information of a head address of a notice control table) to be used for notice display in the above-described initialization processing by reception command 2 is set.

At step D863, it is judged whether or not the notice data is set in the notice information area. If the notice data is set, steps D864 and D865 are sequentially executed based on the notice data, and then the process proceeds to step D866. If it is not set (if it is NULL), the process proceeds to step D866 without executing steps D864 and D865.
At step D864, the above-described advance notice information update determination process is executed. At step D865, the above-mentioned notice display data editing process is executed.
At step D866, the address of the next notice information area is updated. At step D867, it is determined whether all the notice information areas have been edited. If completed, the process returns. Return to D863 and repeat the process.

[Hold editing process]
Next, the details of the pending editing process executed in step D557 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D871, the special view 1 suspension display editing process (to be described later) for executing the suspension display of starting storage of special view 1 is executed, and then in step D872 the special view The special view 2 pending display editing process for executing the pending display of the start memory 2 is executed, and then the process returns. In addition, since the difference between the special figure 1 reserve display editing process and the special figure 2 reserve display editing process is the difference in the type of the decorative special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), about the special figure 2 reserve display edit process Description of is omitted.

[Special figure 1 reservation display editing process]
Next, the details of the special view 1 suspension display editing process executed in step D871 in the above-described suspension editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D881 whether or not pending display control is in progress (ie, pending display execution is in progress). If not in control, return.
In step D882, width and height data of the hold image data are set.

In step D883, steps D883 to D895 are repeatedly executed until the final value 4 is reached while incrementing the value of num from the initial value -1 by an increment of 1, and then the process returns. That is, at step D883, the value of num is set to 1 immediately after the routine starts, and the process proceeds to step D3884. In step D895, when the value of num is less than 4, the process returns to step D883, and when the value of num is 4, the process returns. Then, returning to step D883, the value of num is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step D884.
In this example, in order to perform the same type of decoration display on both sides of the four suspension displays (actual suspension), the process of steps D883 to D895 is repeated a total of six times.
Hereinafter, each process of steps D884 to D894 will be described.

At step D884, a pending display pattern editing process (described later) is executed.
At step D885, the CG number corresponding to the display pattern for the hold display or the decoration display is set corresponding to the value of num.
At step D886, it is instructed to load image data (character data of the CG number) into the VRAM.
At step D887, the attribute of the image data is set.
At step D889, the drawing effect of the image data is set.
At step D890, the X coordinate, Y coordinate, width and height data of the image data are calculated corresponding to the value of num.

In step D891, it is determined whether there is movement of the holding coordinates (the above-mentioned hold display movement control). If there is movement, step D892 and D893 are sequentially executed and then the process proceeds to step D894. Do not go to step D894. The hold display movement control is set to none at steps D203, D210, D235, D259, D276, etc. described above.
At step D 892, the coordinates of the image data are changed according to the hold movement table pointer. The holding movement table pointer is a pointer for controlling the holding display, similarly to the above-mentioned symbol variation table pointer and the like.
At step D893, if the data of the pending moving table pointer is not the end of the table, the pending moving table pointer is updated.
At step D894, the sprite of the image data is pasted to the virtual drawing space.
In step D895, as described above, when the value of num is less than 4, the process returns to step D883, and when the value of num is 4, the process returns.

[Holding display pattern editing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, details of the suspension display pattern editing process executed in step D884 in the special view 1 suspension display editing process described above will be described. Note that this routine is executed for one pending display (or decoration display) corresponding to the value of num described above.
When this routine is started, first, in step D901, a display pattern of hold off / on is set for the hold display (or decoration display) corresponding to the value of num. Note that when the display pattern (character information indicating a non-pending state) of pending / off is set in this routine, a character indicating a non-pending state is displayed, and when step D906 described later of this routine is executed, A display pattern of lighting (character information indicating a holding status) is set, and a character indicating a holding status is displayed. Depending on the specification of the gaming machine, the hold character may be displayed only when there is a hold to be controlled, and the hold character may not be displayed when there is no hold to be controlled. In such a mode, when the display pattern of the hold off is set, there may be a mode in which the control regarding the character display of the target number of holds is not performed after the process exits this routine.

After step D901, the process proceeds to step D902, in which it is determined whether the input parameter (value of num) is within the range of actual holding. As described above, since the actual retention is four excluding both sides, if it is 0 or more and less than 3, it becomes the range of the actual retention. Then, if it is not in the range of real retention, it is always good to turn off, so the process returns, and if it is in the range of real retention, the process proceeds to step D903.
In step D903, it is determined whether the current number of reservations (the latest value of the number of reservations of starting storage instructed by a command from the main board) is larger than the input parameter (value of num). If it is larger than the value of num, the process proceeds to step D904. On the other hand, if the current number of reservations is equal to or less than the value of num, the process returns because the actual holding corresponding to the value of num should not be lit.

In step D904, the display pattern is loaded from the hold information area (corresponding to the color information area in step D265 described above) corresponding to the input parameter (value of num), and the display pattern loaded in the next determination in step D905 is hold off If so, the process returns, and if the loaded display pattern is not hold off, the process proceeds to step D906.
Then, in step D906, a display pattern of hold normal lighting is set for the hold display (or decoration display) corresponding to the value of num, and then the process returns.
Here, in the above-mentioned pending information area, data of the display pattern (pending off or pending lighting based on the latest value of the pending number of starting storage instructed by the command from the main board by the process of step D265 described above) (Including the information) is properly updated and registered.
In the above step D906, the setting of step D268 described above is used to set the lighting color of the hold display, or to change the hold display to a character shape different from normal, etc. You may perform pre-reading effect (effect which announces a big hit etc.) by the difference in a display.

[Notice Editing Process 2]
Next, the details of the notice editing process 2 executed in step D558 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. In this routine, display setting of a notice character displayed at a position on the front side of the hold display and on the rear side of the reduced symbol or the fourth symbol is performed. The effect display has been pushed out to the front to make it stand out as a notice, but since it is more on the back than the reduced pattern or the fourth pattern, it is considered that the player can view the pattern while performing this effect It is done.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D911 whether the front notice display control is in progress (that is, the front notice effect is being executed). If the front notice display control is not in progress, the process returns. The address of the front notice information area is set and the process proceeds to step D913.
Here, the front notice information area is an area in which, for example, front notice data (for example, information on the head address of the control table for the front notice) used for the front notice display in the above-described reception command-based initialization process 2 is set. .

In step D913, it is determined whether the setting of the front notice data (for example, the setting in step D425 described above) is present in the front notice information area. If there is the setting of the front notice data, step D914 is performed based on the front notice data. , D915 after sequentially executing, and if there is no setting of the front notice data (i.e., if NULL), the process returns without executing steps D914 and D915.
At step D914, the above-described advance notice information update determination process is executed. At step D915, the above-mentioned notice display data editing process is executed.

[Inter-interactive notice editing process]
Next, the details of the inter-subset interlocked notice editing process executed in step D559 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, this routine is arranged to be displayed before the front notice with the intention of making the sub-interlock notice notice more prominent than the front notice (by the notice editing process 2). The character display of the interlocking advance notice is not limited to this position. The inter-subsequent interworking notice may be, for example, an effect form in which a character appears in the background, or may be an effect form intertwining with a special view. When an effect such as a message display for the player is given as a sub-interlocking advance notice, the display position as in this embodiment has an advantage that the message is not hidden by a symbol or the like.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D921 whether inter sub interlocking advance notice display control is in progress (that is, sub inter interlock advance notice generation effect is being executed), and if inter sub inter interlock advance notice display control is not performed, the process returns. If notice display control is in progress, the address of the sub-interlocking notice information area is set in step D922, and the process proceeds to step D923.
Here, the inter-sub interlocking advance notice information area is, for example, the inter-interlock interlocking notice data (for example, the information of the head address of the control table for the inter-interlock interlocking notice) used for the sub-interlock interlocking notice display in the initialization processing 2 for each received command. ) Is an area to be set.

At step D923, it is determined whether the sub-interlocking advance notice data area is set in the inter-interlocking advance notice information area. If there is the inter-interlocking advance notice data set, steps D924 and D925 are executed based on the inter-interlock advance notice data. Is sequentially executed, and if there is no setting of inter-subset interlock notification data (ie, if it is NULL), the process returns without executing steps D924 and D925.
At step D924, the above-described advance notice information update determination process is executed. At step D925, the above-mentioned notice display data editing process is executed.

[Reduced symbol editing process]
Next, the details of the reduced symbol editing process performed in step D560 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the reduction symbol is a decorative symbol (for example, in a form in which a normal symbol is reduced) to be displayed in a small size so as to clearly indicate the change in the screen corner of the display device 41 at the time of movie effects during reach. There are left, middle and right symbols). This routine is processing for fluctuating display of the reduced symbol.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D931 whether reduced symbol display control is in progress (that is, reduced symbol display is being executed), and if reduced symbol display control is not in progress, the process returns. To D937 and then return.

At step D932, the start address of the above-mentioned left symbol control area is set.
In step D933, a reduced symbol display editing process (not described) is performed on the middle symbol based on the setting in step D932.
At step D934, the start address of the above-mentioned middle symbol control area is set.
In step D935, a reduced symbol display editing process (not described) is performed on the middle symbol based on the setting in step D934.
At step D936, the start address of the above-mentioned right symbol control area is set.
In step D937, a reduced symbol display editing process (not described) is performed on the right symbol based on the setting in step D936.

[Fourth pattern editing process]
Next, details of the fourth symbol editing process executed in step D561 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. The fourth symbol is a decorative symbol (in a form different from a normal symbol) which is displayed in a small size so as to clearly indicate that it is changing at the screen end of the display device 41 at the time of movie effect or the like. In this example, there are a pair of upper and lower symbols for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (that is, the special figure 1 for the fourth figure, the special figure 1 for the fourth figure, the special figure 2 for the fourth figure, the special figure 2 for the fourth There is a pattern below).
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D941 whether the fourth symbol display control is being performed (that is, the fourth symbol display is being executed), and if the fourth symbol display control is not being performed, the process returns. If so, the process proceeds to step D942. If the fourth symbol status is set during change in step D275 described above, it is determined in step D941 that the fourth symbol display control is being performed.

At step D942, it is determined whether the variation initialization flag (flag set at step D274 of the above-described received command separate initialization process 2) is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step D945 and is set. Then, after steps D943 and D944 are sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D945.
At step D943, the variation initialization flag is cleared.
At step D944, the fourth symbol variation parameter (fourth symbol variation timer, symbol number for variation) is initialized.

At step D945, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol upper and special figure 1 fourth symbol lower) is in motion, and if it is in motion, the symbol for variation of special figure 1 in step D954. After the CG number corresponding to the number is set, the process proceeds to step D947. If it is not changing, the CG number corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol number is set in step D946, and the process proceeds to step D947.
At step D947, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol upper and special figure 2 fourth symbol lower) is in movement, and if it is in fluctuation, the figure for special figure 2 in step D955 After setting the CG number corresponding to the number, the process proceeds to step D949, and if it is not changing, the CG number corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol number is set in step D948, and the process proceeds to step D949.

At step D949, the fourth symbol variation timer is updated by one and updating is performed, and the process proceeds to step D950.
In step D950, it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth symbol variation timer is larger than the switching determination value, and if it is larger, step D951 is performed and then the process proceeds to step D952.
At step D951, updating is performed to increase the variation symbol number by one.
In step D 952, it is determined whether or not the symbol number for variation is greater than the upper limit value. If it is greater, the symbol number for variation is set to 0 in step D 953, and then the procedure proceeds to step D 961. Do not go to step D961.

In step D 961, steps D 961 to D 980 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
At step D961, the coordinates (data of X coordinate and Y coordinate) on the special figure 1 fourth symbol are set.
At step D 962, VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data on the special figure 1 fourth pattern (image data of the CG number set at step D 946 or D 954) into the VRAM.
At step D963, the attribute of the image data is set.
At step D964, a drawing effect to be used for displaying the image data is set.
At step D965, the sprite of the image data is pasted to the virtual drawing space.
The data set in the steps D961, D963 and D964, for example, uses data preset as a prescribed value (hereinafter, the same applies to the other fourth symbols).

At step D966, the coordinates under the special figure 1 fourth symbol are set.
In step D967, the VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data under the special figure 1 fourth pattern (image data of the CG number set in step D946 or D954) into the VRAM.
At step D968, the attribute of the image data is set.
At step D969, a drawing effect used to display the image data is set.
At step D970, the sprite of the image data is pasted to the virtual drawing space.

At step D971, the coordinates on the special figure 2 fourth symbol are set.
In step D972, the VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data on the special figure 2 fourth pattern (image data of the CG number set in step D948 or D955) into the VRAM.
At step D973, the attribute of the image data is set.
At step D974, the drawing effect used to display the image data is set.
At step D975, the sprite of the image data is pasted to the virtual drawing space.

In step D976, the coordinates under the special figure 2 fourth symbol are set.
In step D977, VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data under the special view second symbol (image data of the CG number set in step D948 or D955) into the VRAM.
At step D978, the attribute of the image data is set.
At step D979, a drawing effect to be used for displaying the image data is set.
At step D 980, the sprite of the image data is pasted to the virtual drawing space.

[Big hit round editing process]
Next, the details of the big hit round editing process executed in step D562 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process for a big hit presentation including a big hit fanfare, an interval, and a presentation at the ending in addition to the big hit round. Further, the processing of this routine is processing for controlling the time value or the like of each scene rather than editing what is to be drawn. Even in the same round, there is a flow of effects such as displaying a message or playing back an animation, and this processing is to control this flow. In addition, the data which needs to be set changes with presentation contents. In the case of the jackpot effect, there are a change instruction of a moving image, an audio change instruction and the like, and it is this routine that controls the flow.

When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D991 whether round display control is in progress (that is, whether a jackpot effect including fanfare, interval, and ending is in execution), and if not in control, the process returns. If it is in control, the process proceeds to step D992.
In step D992, effect contents (that is, the round control pointer) corresponding to the round control pointer (for example, the pointer indicating the position of the control data in the big hit control table set in the above-described received command separate initialization process 2) It is determined whether or not the effect content determined by the above control data specified is a jackpot effect start, and if the effect start is not started, the process proceeds to step D996. If the effect start is performed, steps D993 to D995 are performed and the process proceeds to step D996.

At step D993, updating is performed to increase the value of the round control pointer by one.
At step D994, the value of the demo control timer corresponding to the round control pointer is set.
At step D995, various other data corresponding to the round control pointer are set.
At step D996, the value of the demo control timer is reduced by one and updated at step D997. At step D997, the value of the demo control timer is determined.

In step D998, it is determined whether the value of the round control pointer designates the last data of the big hit control table. If it is the last data, the round control pointer is set to the value of the effect return position in step D1000. After setting, the process proceeds to step D1001, and if it is not the last data, the process proceeds to step D1001 without executing step D1000.
At step D1001, the value of the demo control timer corresponding to the round control pointer is set, and at step D1002, various other settings corresponding to the round control pointer are performed.

[Variation parameter update processing]
Next, the details of the variation parameter updating process executed in steps D565, D567, and D569 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIGS. This routine is a process for updating the parameter in symbol variation.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D1011 whether the data of the symbol variation table area (for example, information of the top address of the symbol variation table) is NULL (no setting). If not, steps D1012 to D1015 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1016.

In step D1012, the data of the motion pattern is loaded from the motion pattern area of the symbol control area set in the immediately preceding step (any one of steps D564, D566, and D568) in the effect display editing process described above.
In steps D1013 to D1015, data of symbol update information, the number of control frames, and the number of control repeats are loaded from the corresponding region of the symbol control region.

At step D1016, the data of the X coordinate table pointer is read from the X coordinate table area of the symbol control area. If this data is NULL, the process proceeds to step D1018. If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D1017.
At step D1017, if the control data in the X coordinate table specified by the value of the X coordinate table pointer at that time is not the last data in the X coordinate table, the value of the X coordinate table pointer is increased by one. And then proceed to step D1018. By this update, the designated position in the X coordinate table becomes the next position, and the control data of the next position in the X coordinate table is designated.

At step D1018, the data of the Y coordinate table pointer is read from the Y coordinate table area of the symbol control area. If this data is NULL, the process proceeds to step D1020. If not, the process proceeds to step D1019.
At step D1019, if the control data in the Y coordinate table specified by the value of the Y coordinate table pointer at that time is not the last data in the Y coordinate table, the value of the Y coordinate table pointer is increased by one. And then proceed to step D1020. By this updating, the designated position in the Y coordinate table becomes the next position, and the control data of the next position in the Y coordinate table is designated.

At step D1020, the data of the transparent table pointer is read from the transparent table area of the symbol control area. If this data is NULL, the process proceeds to step D1022, and if it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D1021.
At step D1021, if the control data in the transparency table specified by the value of the transparency table pointer at that time is not the last data in the transparency table, update is performed to increase the value of the transparency table pointer by 1 and then Go to step D1022. By this update, the designated position in the transparent table becomes the next position, and the control data of the next position in the transparent table is designated.

At step D1022, updating is performed to reduce the number of control frames by one, and then the process proceeds to step D1023. The control frame number is a value loaded in step D1014.
In step D1023, it is determined whether the number of control frames is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D1024. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step D1031.
At step D1024, the control repeat number is updated by reducing it by 1. Next, at step D1025, the X coordinate table pointer, the Y coordinate table pointer, and the transparent table pointer are initialized (that is, After the process of resetting to the initial value to be specified is performed, the process proceeds to step D1026. The control repeat number is a value loaded in step D1015.

At step D1026, the data of the symbol update information loaded at step D1013 is read, and if the data of the symbol update information is 1, the procedure proceeds to step D1027, and if it is not 1 (i.e., 0 in this example) Go to step D1030. Here, the data of the symbol update information indicates the added value of the display symbol number for switching the symbol which changes (for example, scrolls up and down) to the next symbol, and in this example, it is a value of 1 or 0 It is. For example, while the scroll is in progress, the switching operation of the main symbol of the symbol on which the next symbol is displayed is repeated, but the value to be added at that time is 1 in this example. Thereby, each symbol switches so that it becomes main sequentially. And when it is not the timing to switch symbols, when the same symbol is scrolled, or when the same symbol is fluctuating to shake, etc., the symbol update information is set to 0, and the symbols are not switched. It has become. The symbol update information may have two or more values. For example, when the value of symbol update information is 2, the symbols may be switched by skipping one.
At step D1027, the symbol number of the symbol to be displayed is increased by one, and then it is determined at step D1028 whether the symbol number exceeds the symbol upper limit, and if it exceeds, the symbol number is incremented at step D1029. After setting the value to 0, the process proceeds to step D1030. If not exceeded, the process proceeds to step D1030 without executing step D1029. Note that display of symbol variation in which symbols are switched while being scrolled up and down, for example, is realized by updating (switching of symbols) of step D1027 or updating (moving of symbol positions) of steps D1017 and D1019. Steps D1028 and D1029 are processing for returning to the first symbol after one round of fluctuation of the symbol.

At step D1030, control frame number data is acquired from the corresponding position of the symbol control table and stored, and at step D1031 it is determined whether the control repeat number is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D1041 and 0 If not, it returns.
If it progresses to step D1041, a symbol variation table pointer will be updated, and it will progress to step D1042 after that. When the symbol variation table pointer is updated, each parameter (motion pattern, symbol update information, etc.) is switched to the next position (next line) of the symbol control table. In this example, as can be understood from the above description, the control repeat number decreases in step D1024 every time the control frame number becomes 0. As a result, when the control repeat number becomes 0, the process proceeds to step D1041 and subsequent steps. Therefore, updating of the symbol variation table pointer by proceeding to step D1041 is executed when the number of control frames and the number of control repeats both become zero.

In step D1042, it is determined whether the operation pattern is the table replacement code (first half). If it is the table replacement code (first half), the procedure proceeds to step D1043. The operation pattern here is the value loaded in step D1012.
In step D1043, the symbol variation table is switched to the first half variation table corresponding to the data of the operation pattern, data of the head address of this first half variation table is set as the value of the symbol variation table pointer .

In step D1044, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a table replacement code (second half). If the table replacement code (second half), the process proceeds to step D1045. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1046.
At step D1045, the symbol variation table is switched to the latter half variation table corresponding to the data of the operation pattern, the data of the head address of this second half variation table is set as the value of the symbol variation table pointer .

  In step D1046, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a symbol replacement code, and if it is a symbol replacement code, the procedure proceeds to step D1047, and otherwise proceeds to step D1050.

In step D1047, steps D1047 to D1049 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1050.
At step D1047, the symbol number to be replaced is calculated back from the stop symbol based on the symbol feed number.
At step D1048, the symbol number calculated at step D1047 is stored in the display symbol area.
At step D1049, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.

In step D1050, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a reach line display code. If it is a reach line display code, the process proceeds to step D1051. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1053.
In step D1051, steps D1051 to D1052 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1053.
At step D1051, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.
At step D1052, a decorative symbol notice editing process (detailed explanation is omitted) for displaying a reach line is executed.

In step D1053, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a hold display move code, and if it is a hold display move code, the process proceeds to step D1054, and otherwise proceeds to step D1056.
In step D1054, steps D1054 to D1055 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1056.
In step D1054, a hold display movement table (corresponding to the above-described hold movement table) for performing hold display movement control is set. Thereby, for example, it is determined in the determination of step D891 described above that there is movement of the holding coordinates, and movement of the holding coordinates (that is, holding display movement control) is executed.
At step D1055, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.

In step D1056, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a hold display off code. If the hold display off code, the process proceeds to step D1057. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1059.
In step D1057, steps D1057 to D1058 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1059.
At step D1057, the data of the hold display table is set to NULL. Thereby, for example, it is determined that the hold display control is not in progress in the step D881, and the hold display is not performed.
At step D1058, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.

In step D1059, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a reach name display code. If it is a reach name display code, the process proceeds to step D1060. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1062.
In step D1060, steps D1060 to D1061 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1062.
In step D1060, the reach name display table corresponding to the reach type number is set in the front notice information area. Thereby, reach name display is executed by the notice editing process 2.
In step D1061, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.

In step D1062, it is determined whether the data of the symbol variation table indicated by the symbol variation table pointer updated by steps D1041, D1049, D1051, D1055, D1058, D1061 is NULL (no setting), and if NULL, return If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D1063.
In step D1063, it is determined whether the motion pattern pointer is the last data in the table (that is, whether or not the data position of the currently designated motion pattern is the last in the motion pattern item of the symbol control table). If it is, the value of the symbol variation table pointer is reduced by 1 in step D1064, and then the process proceeds to step D1065. If it is not final data, the process proceeds to step D1065 without executing step D1064. Here, according to steps D1063 and D1064, when the final data is reached, control is performed so as to return to the position of the second line from the last line and to repeat the operation of the second line. However, not limited to such a configuration, for example, the return position may be set to be different for each operation. In the case of this mode, in step D1064, for example, a process of “setting the symbol variation table pointer to the value of the return position” is executed.

At step D1065, data of various control parameters (motion pattern, symbol update information, etc.) are acquired from the corresponding position in the symbol control table (ie, the position designated by the symbol variation table pointer) and stored. Then, it is determined in step D1066 whether there is a sound request. If it is determined in step D1066 that there is a sound request, the process returns after executing step D1067, and if it is determined that there is no sound request, the process returns without executing step D1067.
At step D1067, a corresponding symbol sound output request is set.
According to step D1065, whenever the line of the symbol control table changes (that is, whenever the symbol variation table pointer is updated), the data of the line of this symbol control table is ROM (in this example, PROM 321) Are copied to the symbol control area of the RAM (in this example, the RAM in the CPU 311). Thereafter, necessary data (including data of the pointer) is taken out (loaded) from the symbol control area of the RAM and the symbol display control processing is performed based on the data until the next line of the symbol control table is moved. This is because the value of the table address currently being processed, the timer value, etc. can not be updated unless in the RAM.

  The present routine described above gives setting examples of various effects linked to the movement of the symbol during symbol variation. For example, replace the symbols at the moment when the high-speed fluctuation is finished and the symbols become slow (if it is the specification to send 3 symbols after slowing down, replace with the symbol number three symbols before the stop symbol) operation realized by the steps D1046 to D1048 etc. Be done. In addition, by the steps D1066, D1067, etc., it is possible to make a stop sound at the time of stop. Other than this example, there may be an aspect in which a character such as a person appears.

[Sound control process]
Next, the details of the sound control process executed in step D30 in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, four channels from 0 to 3 are used, and two tracks are used for each channel to make stereo.
When this routine is started, steps D1071 to D1080 are repeatedly executed until the final value 3 is reached while incrementing the channel number from the initial value 1 by an increment 1 and then the process returns. That is, in step D1071, the channel number is set to 1 immediately after the start of the routine, and the process proceeds to step D1072. In step D1080, if the channel number is less than 3, the process returns to step D1072, and if the channel number is 3, the process returns. Then, returning to step D1071, the value of the channel number is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step D1072.

At step D1072, the song number is loaded from the song information area corresponding to the channel number, then it is determined at step D1073 whether the loaded song number is not 0. If it is 0, the procedure proceeds to step D1076; After D1074 to D1075 are sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D1076.
At step D1074, the song information area is cleared to zero.
At Step D1075, based on the music number loaded at Step D1072, sound output processing (described in detail later) for setting the sound output to the sound source LSI 313 is executed.

At step D1076, the sound effect number (ie, the effect number) is loaded from the effect information area corresponding to the channel number, then at step D1077 it is determined whether the loaded effect number is not 0. The process advances to step D1080 after sequentially executing steps D1078 to D1079 if not 0.
At step D1078, the effect information area is cleared to zero.
At Step D1079, based on the effect number loaded at Step D1076, sound effect output processing (to be described in detail later) for setting the sound effect output to the sound source LSI 313 is executed.
In step D1080, as described above, if the channel number is less than 3, the process returns to step D1071. If the channel number is 3, the process returns.

[Sound output processing]
Next, the details of the sound output process executed in step D1075 in the above-mentioned sound control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D1091 to D1095 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1096.
At step D1091, the channel number is doubled to calculate the track number. Since two tracks are used in stereo, in the case of stereo, the odd track is the left channel and the even track is the right channel.

In step D1092, the phrase number corresponding to the sound number (corresponding to the music number loaded in step D1072 described above) is acquired.
In step D1093, monaural / stereo information corresponding to the sound number is acquired.
At step D1094, loop information corresponding to the sound number is acquired.
In step D1095, audio fade information corresponding to the sound number is acquired.
In step D1096, it is determined whether the channel number is 0. If it is not 0, the process goes to step D1099.

In step D1097, it is determined whether the phrase corresponding to the phrase number acquired in step D1092 is the same as the one currently output, and if it is the same, the setting is unnecessary, and if it is not the same, the process returns in step D1098. After storing the phrase number as the current output phrase, the process proceeds to step D1099. When the step D1098 and the step D1107 described later are executed, the output is switched to the phrase corresponding to the phrase number.
In step D1099, steps D1099 to D1108 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

At step D1099, loop data (data for loop reproduction to repeat sound) corresponding to the track number calculated at step D1091 and the loop information obtained at step D1094 are set.
At step D1100, the track number and M / S data (data for controlling whether to be monaural or stereo) corresponding to the monaural / stereo information acquired at step D1093 are set.
At step D1101, the left channel volume corresponding to the track number is set.
At step D1102, the right channel volume corresponding to the track number is set.

At step D1103, the reproduction of the corresponding track is stopped. The stop here means the end of the old voice. In step D1107 described later, a new sound is set, and in the next step D1108, reproduction of the new sound is started.
In steps D1104 to D1107, the loop data, the M / S data, the audio fade information, and the phrase number are set in the registers of the sound source LSI 313, respectively.
Then, in step D1108, reproduction of the corresponding track is started.

[Sound effect output processing]
Next, the details of the sound effect output process executed in step D1079 in the sound control process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the channel number is first doubled in step D1111 to calculate the track number, and then the process proceeds to step D1112.
In step D1112, it is determined whether the effect number is 1 (reproduction stop). If it is 1, the reproduction of the corresponding track is stopped in step D1115, and the process proceeds to step D1116.
In step D1116, it is determined whether the channel number is 0. If it is not 0, the process returns. If it is 0, the sound effect number (ie, effect number = 1) is stored as the sound effect number of the current output phrase Return

In step D1113, it is determined whether the effect number is 2 (fade in). If it is 2, the process proceeds to step D1118. If it is not 2, the process proceeds to step D1114.
In step D1118, fade interval data is set in the register, and in step D1119, the tone generator LSI 313 is instructed to execute fade-in of the corresponding track, and then the process returns.
In step D1114, it is determined whether the effect number is 3 (fade out). If it is 3, the process proceeds to step D1120. If it is not 3, the process returns.
In step D1120, fade interval data is set in the register, and in step D1121, the tone generator LSI 313 is instructed to execute fade-out of the corresponding track, and then the process returns.

[Inter-sub reception interrupt processing]
Next, the inter-sub reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this routine, for example, one reception data (one byte of data in this example) is stored from the wireless module 360 in a serial reception buffer (not shown) of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, and the reception flag is set. An interrupt is generated and started. The reception flag is a register in the CPU 311, and is set when reception data is stored in the serial reception buffer (that is, data indicating that the flag is set is set in the register).
When this routine is started, first in step D1131, one received data is read from the serial reception buffer, and the process goes to step D1132.

  At step D1132, it is determined whether the number of receptions exceeds by accepting received data read at step D1131. If the number of receptions exceeds, the procedure proceeds to step D1135, and if the number of receptions does not exceed, the procedure proceeds to step D1133 move on. The number of receptions will be exceeded if the data capacity of all the received data (the number of received data corresponding to the value of the reception counter to be described later) exceeds the capacity of the inter-sub communication data buffer area to write the received data by inter-sub communication. is there. The capacity of the inter-sub communication data buffer area may be equal to or larger than the packet size (12 bytes in this example) of data transmitted / received in the inter-sub communication (that is, inter-sub communication data). In the case of this example, the capacity of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area may be 12 bytes or more. For example, N inter-sub-communication data may be simultaneously stored and held as 12 × N bytes.

  At step D1133, the data read at step D1131 is stored in the address of the inter-sub communication data buffer area corresponding to the reception counter, and at step D1134, the value of the reception counter is increased by one. Go to The reception counter is a counter that counts the number of effective reception data of inter-sub communication, and is initialized to 0 immediately after activation of the effect control device 300. The address of the inter-sub communication data buffer area corresponding to the reception counter is, for example, the first 1 byte in the inter-sub communication data buffer area when the value of the reception counter is 0 (the number of valid reception data is 0). This is the address of the minute area, and the address of the second 1-byte area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area when the value of the reception counter is 1 (the number of valid reception data is 1), When the value of the counter is M (when the number of valid reception data is M), the address of the M + 1th 1-byte area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area.

  In step D1135, an initial value is set in the received packet index, and the process proceeds to step D1136. The received packet index is a pointer for specifying in which address of the inter-sub communication data buffer area the head data (STX) of the inter-sub communication data is located. In other words, assuming that the start data (STX) of the inter-sub communication data is present at the address specified by the received packet index, the received packet analysis process described later is executed. Therefore, in step D1135, for example, the first 1-byte address (that is, the top address) in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area is set as the initial value of the reception packet index.

In step D1136, the received packet analysis process is performed on the received data specified by the received packet index, and the process proceeds to step D1137.
In the received packet analysis process, it is analyzed whether the received data is normal as inter-sub communication data and whether normal data for one packet (12 bytes in this case) is not received. Then, if it is not normal, the reception counter subtraction value is returned to discard the data received at least this time in step D1151. If the data for one packet is normal but has not been received yet, reception should be continued. Return the continuation code. If the data is normal and one packet of data is received, registration of the received data (copying to a predetermined area) is performed, and 0 is returned as the reception counter subtraction value (described in detail later).

At step D1137, it is judged whether the analysis result by the received packet analysis process at step D1136 is reception continuation (that is, reception continuation code has been returned), and if reception continues, processing proceeds to step D1141; Go to D1138.
In step D1138, the reception counter subtraction value returned from the reception packet analysis processing in step D1136 is subtracted from the current reception counter value, and the calculation result is set as a new reception counter value, and then step D1139. Go to

In step D1139, it is determined whether the value of the reception counter has become 0. If it is 0, there is no valid reception data, so the process proceeds to step D1141. After updating to (a position shifted away from the beginning by one packet), the process returns to step D1136 to repeat the processing.
In step D1141, it is determined whether the received packet index has been updated in step D1140 as a result of the analysis in step D1136. If updated, step D1142 and D1143 are performed and then the process returns. Returns without executing steps D1142 and D1143.

In step D1142, valid data in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area is padded forward. That is, when the process proceeds to step D1142, in the inter-sub communication data buffer area, the received data at the head side of the address indicated by the value of the received packet index updated in step D1140 is analyzed and registered as necessary. Since it is not necessary anymore, all data present after the address is shifted to the top side by unnecessary data and stored again by overwriting the unnecessary received data.
In step D1143, the above-mentioned reception flag is cleared (that is, data indicating that the flag is cleared is set in the register).

[Received packet analysis process]
Next, details of the received packet analysis processing executed in step D1136 in the above-described inter-sub reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D1151, the value of received data (in this example, 1 byte data) corresponding to the value of the received packet index is loaded, and the process proceeds to step D1152. move on.

  In step D1152, it is determined whether the value of the received data loaded in step D1151 is the specified value (for example, 02H) of the packet start code (STX). If it is the specified value, the process proceeds to step D1153, and if it is not the specified value. For example, in order to discard one received data, the process returns after returning 1 as the reception counter subtraction value in step D1162.

  In step D1153, it is determined whether the value of the reception counter is smaller than 2 (that is, 1 or less). If smaller than 2, there is only one valid received data (only packet start code (STX) data) After returning the reception continuation code in step D1163, the process returns and, if not smaller than 2 (ie, in the case of 2 or more), the process proceeds to step D1154.

  The reception counter subtraction value returned in step D1162 is used in step D1138 described above, the value of the reception counter is reduced by that amount, and new reception data is calculated in step D1133 described above by this reception counter subtraction value. Since the storage position is shifted to the front side, the reception data is overwritten with new reception data and discarded by the value of the value. However, if the determination result in step D1152 is YES, the discard of the received data in step D1162 is not performed.

  For example, when the reception data is only the first one in the inter-sub communication data buffer area (the value of the reception counter is 1), the reception counter is not this value (for example, 02H) of the packet start code (STX). The value of is decremented by 1 and becomes 0, and then the received data read in step D1131 is to be overwritten at the beginning again at step D1133, and the data at the beginning (data that is not packet start code (STX)) Is discarded. However, in this case, if the determination result in step D1152 is YES, step D1153 is performed, step D1163 is executed, and reception is continued, and then the received data read in step D1131 is stored next to the head in step D1133. As a result, the first data (data that is the packet start code (STX)) is not discarded. Note that the effect of discarding the received data by the subtraction of the reception counter in this manner is the same as in steps D1164, D1166, D1167, D1180, and D1182 described later.

  At step D1154, the value of the data length (that is, the value of the number of inter-sub transmission data (SIZE)) is loaded from the data length area in the inter-sub communication data buffer area, and then the process proceeds to step D1155. The address of the data length area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area is determined as a relative position to the address (storage position of packet start code (STX)) indicated by the received packet index. That is, in one packet of inter-sub communication data, the relative positional relationship (order of transmission) of each data is constant as shown in FIG. 158 described later, so the number of inter-sub transmission data (SIZE) from this relative positional relationship Naturally, the address of the data length area in which the) should be stored is known (the same is true for other data areas). In this case, the data length area is one byte behind (in the direction away from the head) the address (the storage position of the packet start code (STX)) indicated by the received packet index.

In step D1155, it is determined whether the value loaded in step D1154 is a specified value (12 bytes in this example). If it is the specified value, the process proceeds to step D1156. If it is not the specified value, the reception counter is determined in step D1164. It returns after returning 1 as a subtraction value.
In step D1156, it is determined whether or not the capacity of all reception data obtained from the value of the reception counter is smaller than the specified value (12 bytes in this example) of the data length of one packet of inter-sub transmission data If the received data is insufficient (12 bytes of received data are not stored yet), return is made after returning the reception continuation code in step D1165. If not, the received data for one or more packets is returned. Since there is, it proceeds to step D1157.

In step D1157, the value of the end of packet code (ETX) is loaded from the ETX area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area, and then the process proceeds to step D1158.
In step D1158, it is determined whether the value loaded in step D1157 is a specified value (for example, 03H). If it is the specified value, the process proceeds to step D1159. If it is not the specified value, 1 is set as the reception counter subtraction value in step D1164. It returns after returning.
At step D1159, a checksum from the beginning of the packet of received data to data length-2 (that is, a checksum of data from STX to STS) is calculated, and then at step D1160, sum in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area Load the checksum (SUM) data from the area, and then proceed to step D1161.

In step D1161, the data loaded in step D1160 is compared with the data calculated in step D1159 to check the checksum, and it is determined whether they match or not. If they do not match, the entire packet for the specified data length of the received data is abnormal, so that the data length specified value (12 in this example) is returned as the reception counter subtraction value in step D1167 and then the process returns. At step D1167, all the received data for one packet is discarded.
At step D1171, the data of the transmission destination ID (DID) is loaded from the transmission destination ID area of the inter-sub communication data buffer area, and the upper bits of the loaded data are extracted as the group ID, After extracting as an ID, the process proceeds to step D1172.

In step D1172, it is determined whether the value of the group ID extracted in step D1171 is a specified value of the group ID. If the value is a specified value, the process proceeds to step D1173, and if it is not a specified value, the process proceeds to step D1182. Here, in step D1172, it is checked whether the received data is from game machines in the same group as oneself. Then, in the case of received data from a gaming machine (for example, a machine of another maker or a model difference of the same maker) which is not the same group as oneself, in the present embodiment, the process proceeds to step D1182 to discard all received data. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when an old game machine (or a game machine of a different type) of the company is installed, such a game machine is determined by a maker code or a model code. In the case of received data from a gaming machine, it is not discarded but additional effects corresponding to the received data (may be sub-interlinked effects, for example, it affects the normal effects such as the effect of increasing reach type in sorting by sub substrates ) May be performed. In this way, it is advantageous to purchase a plurality of types of in-house gaming machines and install them in the game arcade (or purchase and install side-by-side with the in-house gaming machines that have been remodeled and the old in-house gaming machines before model change) Benefits) can be produced.
In step D1173, it is determined whether the value of the terminal ID extracted in step D1171 matches with its own terminal ID. If the values match, it is normal, so steps D1175 to D1181 are performed to produce effects corresponding to the received data. Is executed, and if no match is found, the process proceeds to step D1174.

  In step D1174, it is determined whether the value of the terminal ID extracted in step D1171 is a broadcast code (data for which all terminals in the same group (that is, all pachinko machines) are transmission targets). Therefore, after performing steps D1175 to D1181 to perform rendering corresponding to the received data, the process returns, and if not a broadcast code, the process proceeds to step D1182.

In step D1175, data of a transmission source ID (SID) is copied from the transmission source ID area of the inter-sub communication data buffer area to the inter-sub command transmission source ID area.
At step D1176, data of the inter-sub command MODE (SB_MODE) is copied from the sb_mode area of the inter-sub communication data buffer area to the SB_MODE area.
At step D1177, data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT) is copied from the sb_act area of the inter-sub communication data buffer area to the SB_ACT area.
At step D1178, data of the game state STS is copied from the game state area of the inter-sub communication data buffer area to the inter-sub command game state area.

In step D1179, the inter-sub reception request flag (the flag used in step D471 described above) is set.
In step D1180, an operation of subtracting the specified value (12 in this example) of the data length from the value of the current reception counter is performed, and the result of this operation is set as a new reception counter value. Thus, one packet of the received data (normal data) processed in the process up to step D1179 is discarded.
At step D1181, 0 is returned as the reception counter subtraction value.
In step D1182, the data length specified value (12 in this example) is returned as the reception counter subtraction value, and then the process returns. Since the process proceeds to step D1182 when the received data is abnormal invalid data, the data length specified value is returned as a reception counter subtraction value in order to discard all the received data (one packet, 12 bytes). ing.

[Inter-sub transmission interrupt processing]
Next, inter-sub transmission interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In this routine, for example, a serial transmission buffer (not shown) of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 becomes empty (that is, all transmission data of the serial transmission buffer is transmitted and erased by the serial communication function of the CPU 311). When is set, an interrupt is generated and started. The transmission flag is a register in the CPU 311, and is set when the serial transmission buffer becomes empty (that is, data indicating that the flag is set is set in the register).

  When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D1191 whether the number of data transmissions to be transmitted (the number of transmission data in 1-byte units) is 0. If 0, the inter-sub transmission interrupt is inhibited in step D1196 and then the process returns. If it is not 0, steps D1192 to D1195 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. Note that the inter-sub transmission interrupt that starts this routine is permitted in the above-described step D465 when the need for inter-sub transmission arises.

  At step D1192, the data of the inter-sub transmission buffer area corresponding to the inter-sub transmission pointer is written to the serial transmission buffer. Here, the data written to the serial transmission buffer is transmitted to the effect control device of another pachinko machine via the wireless module 360 by the serial communication function of the CPU 311. The inter-sub transmission pointer is a pointer for which the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is set as an initial value in the above-described step D514. The inter-sub transmission buffer area is a buffer area including the inter-sub transmission buffers 0 to 11 described in the above steps D501 to D510 and the like.

In step D1193, in order to transmit data of the next address of the inter-sub transmission buffer area, the value of the inter-sub transmission pointer is increased by one for updating.
At step D1194, since one 1-byte data has been transmitted, updating is performed to reduce the number of data transmissions determined at step D1191 by one.
At step D1195, the above-mentioned transmission flag is cleared.

[Example of packet configuration of inter-sub communication]
Next, a packet configuration example of inter-sub communication will be described with reference to FIG.
The packet configuration of the inter-sub communication in this example has a data configuration as shown in the upper table of the figure. A description of each data is given at the bottom of the figure. That is, 1-byte data is no. 1 to No. There are a total of 12 up to 12, and the total capacity (the capacity of one packet) is 12 bytes.

No. Reference numeral 1 denotes data (for example, 02H) of a packet start code (STX) representing the packet head.
No. 2 is data of the packet size, that is, the inter-sub transmission data number (SIZE) (in this case, data indicating 12 bytes).
No. 3 is data (terminal ID and group ID) of transmission source ID (SID).
No. 4 is data (terminal ID and group ID) of a transmission destination ID (DID). In the data of the transmission source ID (SID) and the transmission destination ID (DID), the upper bits of 1 byte are the group ID, and the lower bits are the terminal ID (and broadcast). Here, the range of the terminal ID is a hexadecimal number, for example, in the range of 00 to 0E, and when the data of the lower bit is 0F, it is handled as the data of the broadcast code.

No. Reference numeral 5 is data of a sub manufacturer code (MAKER).
No. 6 is data of the year code (YEAR) (for example, the last two digits of the year).
No. 7 is data of the inter-sub model code (TYPE).
No. 8 is data of the inter-sub command MODE (SB_MODE).
No. 9 is data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT).
No. 10 is STS data representing the game state of the player.
No. 11 is a checksum of data from STX to STS.
No. 12 is data (for example, 03H) of an end of packet code (ETX) indicating the end of packet.
Note that the packet configuration example of the inter-sub communication described above is merely an example, and there may be various aspects. For example, each piece of data may not have a 1-byte configuration (e.g., make the machine type code into a plurality of bytes), and the order of transmission is not limited to the above configuration example. Also, data having other meanings may be present, and conversely, the number of data may be smaller than that in the above configuration example. Also, in the order of transmission, for example, the “maker code” may be brought second. In this mode, commands from game machines of other makers are efficiently discarded, and conversely, processing is efficiently performed by branching to the corresponding reception processing (other maker command reception processing) in order to collaborate with other makers. Can be Here, the other maker command reception process is a process for receiving a command corresponding to the command form of another maker when the command form is different for each maker.

By executing each program as described above, a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the variable display game by the display device 41 is executed.
Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the start winning opening 25 or 26 of the special view during the game of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, when there is the start winning of the special view), a command to command the variation effect of the special view Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the variation display of the special view (decorative special view) is performed on the display section 41a, and a big hit occurs if the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode. In the case of an off, stop with the off symbol.
Here, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is one that does not start the effect by itself and exerts the effect in a group, but it is described, for example, Command + symbol designation command etc. In the following description, "design designation command" may be described in short as "design command" as appropriate.

When the variation pattern command and the symbol command are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 based on the start winning of the special figure, the effect control device 300 produces the effect of the special figure based on the transmitted command. Take control.
The variation pattern command and the symbol command respectively correspond to a first command and a second command that exert an effect in combination.
In addition, when the starting opening SW is turned on during start of symbol change and start memory is generated, the information indicating the special drawing reserve number = "1" is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 and the prefetch command and special figure reserve number A command is transmitted from game control device 100 to effect control device 300.
If reception of a plurality of sets of commands (for example, "variation pattern command + symbol designation command") is normal, that is, the fluctuation pattern command sent first and the symbol designation command sent later are received normally Then, it is determined that a set of commands has been established, and the effect control device 300 produces a symbol variation on the display device 41 based on the set of commands.

Here, the types, contents, and the like of commands forming a set will be described.
The commands to be combined include the following, which will be described separately for each effect.
(1) Symbol variation This is transmitted at the start of variation, and a combination of "variation pattern command" + "stop symbol command" is established. The "stop symbol command" is appropriately written as a symbol command.
(2) Big hit, medium effect In this, according to the production section, the combination is formed with "effect screen command" + "big hit symbol command".
In addition, the effect screen command includes the following.
(B) Start of fanfare = Fanfare command (B) Start of each round = Round command corresponding to the number of rounds (C) Interval start = Interval command (D) Ending start = Ending command "Stop symbol command" = There is also a case of "big hit symbol command".
Here, although the combination of two commands of "variation pattern command" + "stop symbol command" is effective as described above, it is not limited to this but, for example, the command is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied even if the effect is exhibited in the form in which three or more are combined.
The "stop command" is a command for instructing to stop a symbol such as during variation, but this is a single command, and the set is not configured.

Here, in the present embodiment, not only the variable display game performed by one pachinko machine 1 as described above is performed on the display device 41, but also inter-sub communication is performed between a plurality of gaming machines installed on the island. Control is performed such that the effects of the display devices 41 of the respective units are synchronized (for example, synchronization of demonstration effects for waiting for customers, synchronization of advance effects, etc.), which will be described in detail.
As described above, inter-sub communication is communication (in this example, wireless) performed using the wireless module 360 between sub-boards (in this example, the effect control device 300) of pachinko machines having different game arcades. Communication).
The programs related to inter-sub communication include the following.
The communication between sub communication is mainly as follows.
・ Inter-sub transmission start processing (Fig. 118)
・ Inter-sub receive task processing (Fig. 119)
・ Inter-sub transmission data editing process (Fig. 120)
・ Inter-sub ack response task processing (Fig. 121)
・ Sub-interaction setting process (Fig. 122)
-Sub-interlocking notice editing process (Fig. 144)
・ Inter-sub reception interrupt processing (Fig. 154)
・ Inter-sub transmission interrupt processing (Fig. 157)
・ Example of packet configuration of inter-sub communication (Fig. 158)
Also, a part of the routine related to inter-sub communication is as follows.
· Received command separate initialization process 1 (Fig. 103)
・ Received packet analysis processing (Fig. 155)
・ Received packet analysis processing (Fig. 156)

Next, a specific example of the effect using inter-sub communication will be described.
Although there are various effects in sub-sub communication, first, simultaneous transmission in which the other party is not specified will be described.
Although the case of transmitting the “waiting customer timing adjustment command” to another gaming machine by inter-sub communication using the wireless module 360 will be described here, the case of transmitting the inter-sub interlocking notification system command to the other gaming machine The procedure is also similar in the outline.
The process of simultaneous transmission is as follows.
When the effect control device 300 receives a “wait for customer demo command” or a “power on command” from the game control device 100 (main substrate) (your own game machine, your own game machine, your own machine, or just your own “Awaiting customer timing adjustment command” is wirelessly transmitted by inter-sub communication using the wireless module 360 to the effect control device 300 of another peripheral gaming machine (also referred to as another machine). This is performed by simultaneous transmission which does not specify the other party.
In addition, since the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) is equipped with the wireless module 360, data can be exchanged with effect control devices of other game machines in the vicinity, however, data communication for effect only In such a configuration, it is impossible to do anything that affects the outcome of the game (for example, there is nothing that can be easily hit).

Also, as described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) performing simultaneous transmission is its own gaming machine, which is also referred to as a self-playing machine, an own-machine, an own-machine or simply self, and other games in the vicinity A machine is referred to as another machine, another game machine, or another game machine.
The "other game machines in the vicinity" are a plurality of game machines different from the self. In this embodiment, it refers to another game machine which is installed in the same island as the own machine, and basically, the game machine manufacturers are the same and the model is also the same. This is because commands and effects transmitted / received between the own machine and another game machine are unified if it is the same model, and it is easy to control.
Furthermore, in the market, if the game machine is of the same model, the program of the effect control device 300 is the same, so the processing relating to inter-sub communication is all included in the program of one model.

However, even if the game machines have the same name, those with different performance (for example, the machines with the same name “CR ○○ FA” and “CR ○○ GL” may have slightly different performance) There is a possibility that the programs of the effect control device 300 are not the same program. In this case, basically, the program associated with the specific presentation due to the performance difference is different, and although the part related to inter-sub communication is basically the same, it can not be said that there is no possibility of change. Therefore, the gaming machines having different portions relating to inter-sub communication are not used for the effect using inter-sub communication in the present embodiment.
In many cases, game machines are often installed on both sides of the island with the back side facing the inside of the island, in which case the effect screens of the respective units are simultaneously facing the same direction toward the aisle side. Since it is desirable that they are the same effect screen, it is common for game machines of the same model, arranged in parallel on the aisle side of the island, to perform effects using inter-sub communication and synchronize the effect screens (or Synchronize only if necessary.

Now, returning to the main subject, when the effect control device 300 receives a "wait for customer demo command" or a "power on command" from the game control device 100 of its own game machine, A process of transmitting a customer waiting timing adjustment command by inter-sub communication, but setting such a “customer waiting timing adjustment command” with its own gaming machine and transmitting it, and other gaming machines “customer waiting timing adjustment command The processing locations of the program of the effect control device 300 when “1” is received are as follows.
First, when the effect control device 300 receives a "wait for customer demo command" from the game control device 100 of its own game machine, the effect control device for the other game machines in the vicinity communicates a "wait for customer timing adjustment command" The process in the case of transmitting by is demonstrated.
<Implementation place when receiving a customer waiting demo command> on your own machine>
· Location where a command is set: Step D203a to Step D203f of FIG. 103, FIG.
・ The place where the command is sent: Fig. 118, Fig. 157
Ack response: step D480a to step D491 in FIG. 119; step D203d in FIG. 120;

That is, when the effect control device 300 receives a "wait for customer demo command" from the game control device 100 in its own machine, first, in steps D203a to D203f of initialization processing 1 for each received command shown in FIG. Prepare the inter-sub command (broadcast transmission setting) of (sub-sub synchronization in the customer waiting demo display), edit the prepared inter-sub command (inter-sub transmission data editing process: Fig. 120), and set initial value to ack waiting timer Is set, an inter-sub presentation effect start waiting timer is set, and an inter-sub transmission request flag is set.
In this way, the setting of the sub-interval command of the customer waiting demo synchronization is performed.
The above-mentioned inter-member command of the customer waiting demo synchronization corresponds to the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”. Therefore, in this case, it is described that "sub-interval command of customer waiting demo synchronization" = "customer waiting timing adjustment command".

  Next, in the process of simultaneously transmitting the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” from the own game machine, the program of the inter-sub transmission start process shown in FIG. 118 and the inter-sub transmission interrupt process shown in FIG. As a result, simultaneous transmission of the "waiting timing adjustment command for customer wait" by inter-sub communication is performed from the own game machine to the effect control device 300 of another game machine in the vicinity.

Here, whether or not the sub-board (effect control device) of another gaming machine that has received the inter-sub command returns an ack to the sub-board of its own machine that has transmitted the inter-sub command varies depending on the type of command. In the present embodiment, the "wait for customer timing adjustment command" contains the content for requesting an ack reply. That is, in the present embodiment, the “waiting timing adjustment command for customer” is a command that requires an ack response.
That is, as the program related to the ack response, steps D480a to D491 of the inter-sub reception task processing shown in FIG. 119, the inter-sub transmission data editing processing shown in FIG. 120, step D203d of initialization processing 1 for each reception command shown in FIG. In these programs, "wait wait timing adjustment command" is a command that requires an ack response.
In the present embodiment, the “wait for customer timing adjustment command” is a command that requires an ack response, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not require an ack response may be employed.
In addition, even if an ack response is returned, nothing is done in principle in this embodiment, but if the ack response is not originally returned to another gaming machine, the "waiting timing adjustment command for customer wait" is again performed. It may be configured to send.

Next, processing of the program of the effect control device when another gaming machine receives the “waiting timing adjustment command for customer” is performed as follows. Although the effect control device for another game machine is not shown, the game machine of one's own may operate as another game machine, so in the following, the program for the effect control device 300 of one's own game machine is taken as an example Explain.
<Receiving / synchronizing customer wait timing adjustment commands of other gaming machines>
・ A place to receive a command: FIG. 154 to FIG. 156
・ Location where command is analyzed: Fig. 119
· Location where customer waiting synchronization is set: step D535 to step D543 in FIG. 122
-Subsequent processing: customer waiting display edit processing of FIG. 124

That is, when another gaming machine receives the “waiting timing adjustment command for customer wait”, first, the inter-sub reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 154 and the received packet analysis process shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 are performed. As a result, the "waiting for customer wait timing adjustment command" is received.
Next, inter-sub-reception task processing shown in FIG. 119 is performed. As a result, the “waiting for customer wait timing adjustment command” is analyzed.
When the customer waiting timing adjustment command is analyzed, the customer waiting timing adjustment command is analyzed as a command for causing the plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-sub communication to perform the timing for displaying the customer waiting demonstration display. In this case, it becomes a command to execute customer waiting A from the beginning.

Next, steps D535 to D543 of the inter-sub presentation effect setting process shown in FIG. 122 are executed. After that, it is left to the customer waiting display editing process shown in FIG.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed (that is, whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed), and if the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed, processing of the customer waiting timing adjustment I do. Then, the demo status (information indicating the type etc. of waiting customer demonstration effects being executed) of the corresponding pachinko machine (that is, another gaming machine) that has received the command between subs is the symbol display (the waiting customer A described above) If it is determined that the symbol is displayed (waiting for customer A), the demo control timer is initialized to the value of the symbol display start. When the demo control timer is initialized to the value of the symbol display start, the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (waiting for customer A) being executed is ended halfway, and the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (waiting for customer A) is from the beginning It is started.
On the other hand, if it is not symbol display (waiting for customer A) (ie, if movie display (waiting for customer B) is being executed), the demo control timer is set to the value of movie immediate end. When the demo control timer is set to the value of movie immediate end, the movie display (guest waiting B) as the customer waiting demonstration display is immediately terminated, and the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (guest waiting A) is started.

  Thus, the customer waiting demonstration effect is synchronized from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A) with the transmission source gaming machine that has transmitted the customer waiting timing adjustment command and the other gaming machines that have received this customer waiting timing adjustment command. Will be started. In addition, the customer waiting demonstration effect started in this way is controlled by the customer waiting display editing process shown in FIG. 124, and switches from the symbol display (customer waiting A) to the movie display (customer waiting B) when the prescribed time elapses. As time passes, the movie display (Wait for customer B) is switched to the symbol display (Wait for customer A), and so on, as long as the customer waiting demonstration effect is continued, two types of customer waiting demonstration effects are alternately executed. .

In the above, when the effect control device 300 receives the “wait for customer demo command” from the game control device 100 of the own game machine, the effect control device for the other game machines in the vicinity is “wait for customer timing adjustment command” Since the process in the case of transmitting by communication has been described, next, when the effect control device 300 receives a “power on command” from the game control device 100 of its own game machine, the effect control device of another game machine in the vicinity The process in the case of transmitting "a customer waiting timing adjustment command" by inter-sub communication will be described.
The process when the effect control device 300 receives the “power on command” from the game control device 100 is basically the same as the process when the “waiting customer demo command” is received from the game control device 100, but However, the “power on command” is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 when the game control apparatus 100 is activated by clearing the RAM.
Here, the RAM clear is to turn on the RAM clear switch 504, which initializes the RAM and the like inside the gaming microcomputer 101, when it is explained based on the configuration of the first embodiment. Is completely cleared, the existing game state data is cleared, and the gaming machine is reset to the initial state.
Specifically, if the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on when the power is turned on and confirmed immediately after the program of the game control apparatus 100 is activated, the RAM area such as the user work RAM in the game microcomputer 101 and Information stored in the same RAM area in the payout control device 200 is initialized.

It should be noted that the power-on time of the gaming machine and the power-off recovery time are different, and are distinguished as follows.
When the power is turned on: This refers to the time when the gaming control device 100 is activated by clearing the RAM.
· At the time of power failure recovery: This refers to the time when the gaming control device 100 recovers from the previous power-off state and starts.
Therefore, apparently, it can be said that the synchronization of the customer waiting demonstration effect by the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is unnecessary.
On the other hand, if the customer wait timing adjustment command is sent from the respective units by inter-sub communication without thinking about anything even if it is the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect, all units simultaneously start transmission in the inter-sub communication This will cause traffic congestion.
Therefore, in the present invention, the "waiting timing adjustment command for customer waiting" is not transmitted to the other at the time of the power failure recovery, and the congestion of the inter-sub communication is avoided. In particular, unlike when the power is turned on (when starting with clear RAM), all units start simultaneously at the time of power failure recovery, so it seems that the traffic between sub-subs may become severe as the large stores with a large number of game machines installed .
In addition, when the commercial power source suddenly shuts down due to a lightning strike or the like during the operation of the game arcade, it is necessary to maintain the gaming status of each unit, restore the gaming state before the power outage, and resume the business. Therefore, at the time of such a power failure restoration, since the game state before the power failure is restored without performing the RAM clear, the state of each unit is individually different. Therefore, it is not necessary to synchronize the effects of each unit at the time of the power failure restoration after the commercial power supply suddenly shuts down due to a lightning strike or the like. Therefore, when the power failure is restored in such a case, the "waiting timing adjustment command for customer waiting" is not transmitted from the own game machine to the other peripheral machines in the vicinity.
In addition, since it is necessary to manually press the RAM clear switch 504 when performing the RAM clear, activation is performed one by one. When the power is turned on in the RAM clear where the start timing is disjointed, processing of synchronizing the effects of the respective units is performed.

Next, the procedure for setting (synchronizing) the customer waiting demonstration effect with the own gaming machine and other gaming machines in the vicinity will be specifically described.
First, basically, in the customer waiting demonstration effect, two types of screens, a symbol display period and a movie period, are alternately displayed at each specified time.
It should be noted that, in practice, there are divisions such as turning on / off of BGM (background music), enabling / disabling of the presentation button 9, etc. Although internally divided, the screen of the display device 41 for the player Since there are two types of appearances to, the following description will be made on the assumption that two types of screens, a symbol display period and a movie period, are alternately displayed for each specified time.

As described above, when the "game waiting timing adjustment command" is transmitted by the inter-sub communication from the own gaming machine to another gaming machine in the vicinity, the sender of the "waiting customer timing adjustment command" (the own gaming machine) It is sufficient to start the customer waiting demonstration effect on the display device 41.
On the other hand, the other gaming machines in the vicinity, to which the “waiting timing adjustment command for customer wait” has been sent, will perform processing for synchronizing the waiting waiting demonstration effects of the respective customers with the waiting waiting demonstration effects of the sender (own game machine). .
In that case, when another gaming machine receives the “waiting for customer wait timing adjustment command”, if the player (here, another gaming machine) is executing a customer waiting demonstration effect, the same effect is sent to the same person Correspond to (process) to synchronize with the one).
It should be noted that if the special view is in an effect that can not be dealt with during the variable display or the like, the corresponding (process) to synchronize the effect with the customer waiting demonstration effect of the sender (own game machine) is not performed. This is to judge whether or not during the customer waiting demonstration effect (that is, during the customer waiting demonstration effect or not) in step D540 of the sub-inter-effect setting process shown in FIG. 122, and the customer waiting demonstration effect If it is not in the middle, the customer waiting timing adjustment should not be performed, so the process proceeds to step D537 (in step D537, the sub-period presentation request flag is cleared and returned), and during the customer waiting demonstration effect, the customer waiting timing adjustment is performed. This is because the process proceeds to step D541 in order to carry out.

On the other hand, as described above, when another gaming machine receives the "waiting timing adjustment command for customer wait", if the player (here, another gaming machine) is executing a waiting for customer demonstration effect, the same effect is produced. The following processing is performed in order to make it correspond to that of the sender (the own game machine).
As described above, since the customer waiting demonstration effect is such that two types of screens of the symbol display period and the movie period are alternately displayed at each specified time, the “waiting for customer wait timing adjustment command” is received. Depending on the timing, divided into either case. They are described as (A) and (B).
(A) In the case of symbol display When the "waiting customer timing adjustment command" is received during symbol display, the timer in the symbol display period is returned to the initial value and redisplayed from the beginning (that is, the symbol display Stop the production, and start producing the design from the beginning again). Therefore, for the player, as the appearance of the screen of the display device 41, it seems that the symbol display period is extended.
That is, in this case, the demonstration control timer is initialized to the symbol display start value in step D543 of the sub-subs effect setting process shown in FIG. 122, and then the process proceeds to step D537 (in step D537, the inter-sub effect request flag is cleared) Then, the effect of the symbol display is started again from the beginning.

(B) In Case of Movie When the “waiting for customer timing adjustment command” is received during the movie period, the timer in the movie period is set to the end value, and the process immediately shifts to the symbol display period.
That is, in this case, the demonstration control timer is set to the value of movie immediate end in step D 542 of the sub-subs effect setting process shown in FIG. 122, and then the process proceeds to step D 537 (in step D 537, the inter-sub effect request flag is cleared) Since the timer in the movie period is set as the end value, the process immediately shifts to the symbol display period.
In addition, when the demonstration control timer is set to the value of movie immediate end, movie display (customer waiting B) as customer waiting demonstration display is ended immediately, and customer waiting demonstration effect of symbol display (customer waiting A) is started.
Therefore, for the player, as the appearance of the screen of the display device 41, the movie appears to be forcibly terminated.
Note that the processing for enabling / disabling the effect button 9 and for playing / not playing the effect button 9 or BGM (background music) will be appropriately handled.

  As described above, although the customer waiting demo effect is such that two types of screens of the symbol display period and the movie period are alternately displayed at each specified time, the other has received the "customer waiting timing adjustment command" In the game machine of, even if the reception timing is during the period of any effect (pattern display or movie), it restarts from the effect of symbol display (that is, the customer waiting demonstration effect of symbol display (wait for customer A)) It will be. Therefore, the other gaming machines in the vicinity that have received the simultaneous transmission of the “waiting for customer timing adjustment command” in the inter-sub communication restart from the waiting for demonstration effect of the symbol display (waiting for customer A). The production will be synchronized to match the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing in the case where the RAM clear is performed in one gaming machine at the time of power on and in synchronization with the effect of demonstration waiting for customers is configured as follows.
That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of synchronizing the customer waiting demonstration effects of each unit, when the effect control device 300 receives the “waiting customer demonstration command” from the game control device 100 of one gaming machine, the other peripheral devices It only sends the "wait for customer timing adjustment command" at the same time to the inter-sub communication to the effect control device of the gaming machine, regardless of the number of times the past effect is executed as shown in FIG. 160 to FIG. Instead of performing processing to determine the presence or absence of inter-sub preliminary notice execution by a random number based on the execution probability for the preliminary notice mode set in, the customer waiting demonstration effect is synchronized with other gaming machines Therefore, the control of the gaming machine side intended to synchronize each customer waiting demonstration effect may be simple.

As described above, the inventive concept of the configuration for transmitting the “waiting customer timing adjustment command” to the effect control devices of other peripheral gaming machines by inter-sub communication to synchronize the waiting customer demonstration effects Is represented by
A game control device that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device for effecting a variable display game by an effect means based on a command transmitted from the game control device,
The effect control device is
Communication means for communicating with other gaming machines;
Synchronization control means for synchronizing the effect by the effect means with another game machine through the communication means;
A game machine characterized by comprising.

In addition, by simultaneously transmitting "wait for customer wait timing adjustment command" by inter-sub communication from one game machine to another nearby machine, it is possible to synchronize the wait for waiting demonstration effects of each machine, so wait for customers It is convenient because synchronization of demonstration effects can be performed extremely easily.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
A game machine characterized by synchronizing an effect of waiting for a customer by the effect means with another game machine by means of a synchronization control means.

In addition, when synchronizing the customer waiting demonstration effect of each unit, when the effect control device 300 receives the “waiting customer demo command” from the game control device 100 of one gaming machine, the effect control of the other gaming machines in the vicinity Since all the customer waiting demonstration effects can be synchronized by transmitting the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” to the device through inter-sub communication, control of the gaming machine side intended to synchronize the customer waiting demonstration effects can be simplified. .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
A game characterized by transmitting simultaneously information for synchronizing the effect of waiting for the customer by the effect means to the other gaming machine through the communication means when receiving the information about the effect of waiting for the customer from the game control device. Machine.

Also, with other gaming machines that have received the “waiting customer timing adjustment command”, the timer (or the timer during the movie period) during the symbol display period of waiting for customer effects is returned to the initial value, and redisplayed from the beginning. By synchronizing the customer waiting demonstration effects of each unit, the control of the gaming machine side that has received the command for synchronizing the customer waiting demonstration effects can be simplified.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
When the information for synchronizing the effect of waiting for the customer by the effect means is received from another gaming machine via the communication means,
A game machine characterized by synchronizing an effect of waiting for a customer by the effect means with another game machine by the synchronization control means.

In addition, when a power failure occurs, and power is restored after all the power is turned off, "wait for customer A" is displayed as a customer waiting demonstration effect on the display device 41 at the same time for all devices triggered by a power failure recovery command. If RAM clearing is performed on one gaming machine, another game is played based on the effect control device 300 receiving a “power on command” from the gaming control device 100 of that gaming machine. In the other gaming machines that send "waiting customer timing adjustment command" to the machine by inter-sub communication and receive the "waiting customer timing adjustment command", the waiting customer demonstration effect is synchronized from the beginning of the symbol display (waiting customer A). Control to be started. As a result, even if RAM clearing is performed on one gaming machine, it is possible to synchronize all the customer waiting demonstration effects.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
When a command regarding an initial screen at the time of power on is received from the game control device, the information for synchronizing the effect of waiting for the customer by the effect means is simultaneously transmitted to another game machine through the communication means. Gaming machine.

Also, when a power failure occurs and power is restored after all the power is turned off, a game waiting command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 all at once triggered by the power failure recovery command. In the master effect control device 300, when the customer waiting command is received, the display of “waiting for customer A” is started on the display device 41 as the customer waiting demonstration effect. The configuration is such that the adjustment command is not transmitted by inter-sub communication. Thereby, the effect of "waiting for customer A" is performed on all the display devices 41, and the same effect contents are obtained.
On the other hand, only when the RAM clear is performed in one gaming machine, another gaming machine transmits the "customer waiting timing adjustment command" to the other gaming machine through inter-sub communication, and the other gaming which receives the "customer waiting timing adjustment command" The machine is configured to control to start the customer waiting demonstration effect synchronously from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A). In this way, it is possible to synchronize all the customer waiting demonstration effects in synchronization with RAM clearing in one gaming machine.
Therefore, the "waiting timing adjustment command for customer waiting" is transmitted to the other gaming machines only when the RAM is cleared instead of the power failure recovery, so that the control can be simplified.
In addition, by not sending the “waiting timing adjustment command for customer wait” to another gaming machine at the time of power failure recovery, traffic congestion can be made less likely to occur. Furthermore, the burden on the CPUs of the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 is also reduced, so that efficient control can be performed.
In particular, since the number of installed gaming machines is large in a large store, it is serious when traffic jams occur, but in the present embodiment such an adverse effect can be suppressed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
When the power supply of the gaming machine is shut down and then restored,
At the time of power failure recovery, information for synchronizing the effect of waiting for the customer by the effect means is not transmitted to the other gaming machines via the communication means,
Only when the game control apparatus is initialized, the information for synchronizing the effect of waiting for the customer by the effect means is simultaneously transmitted to other game machines through the communication means.

<Background explanation>
Next, the subject of the presentation which is the background of the present invention will be described.
First, conventionally, there was no function to synchronize effects among gaming machines.
Therefore, the applicant of the present invention has proposed and filed an invention in which effects are synchronized between a plurality of game machines on an island by inter-sub communication.
By the way, although the invention of synchronizing effects between game machines by inter-sub communication is excellent, there are still room for improvement in the following points.
When synchronizing the effects between gaming machines by inter-sub communication, for example, when performing effects on the display device 41 by the advance effect command, not only the effects of the variable display game by random number lottery in the own machine, but also from other gaming machines Even when the instruction by the inter-communication is sent, the notice effect command and the like are sent, and when the effect on the display device 41 of the own device is made to appear, only the appearance frequency of the effect increases.
That is, not only the effect lottery within the player's own machine, but also an instruction by inter-sub communication from another gaming machine will cause an effect such as a notice to appear, the number of appearances of the notice etc. will simply increase.
However, since the notice that appears under the instruction from the other unit does not participate in the big hit lottery of the own machine, it is almost a departure except for those appearing by the effect draw of the own machine. Therefore, no matter how much the effect is made to appear by an instruction from another unit, the probability that the player will hit the jackpot does not increase, and as a result, the reliability of the notice effect etc. is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. There is a risk.
In particular, as the number of installed gaming machines increases, the number of times of communication by inter-sub communication increases, and the notice effect etc. appearing by instructions from other machines increases, so the above problem becomes more noticeable.

  Therefore, the present invention solves the above-mentioned problem by determining whether or not to perform the effect based on the number of past executions of the effect instructed from another game machine and executing the effect. As a result, the reliability of the presentation is not impaired, and there is no risk of lowering the interest of the game.

Next, a specific operation of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command will be described.
In this embodiment, the actual number of executions of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocked notice system command instructed from another gaming machine in the same group of the inter-sub communication is counted for each type of notice (by the contents of the presentation) ( That is, not the number of times of reception of the command but counting the number of times of execution of the effect) whether or not to perform the effect for the instruction of the command (inter-subordinate interlocking notice system command) is based on the number of the effects performed in the past When a lottery result of performing lottery and performing an effect is selected, the number of times of effect execution is updated by +1 to prepare for reception of the next inter-subsequent interlocking notification system command.
In addition, when the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command is executed, for example, the effect is performed based on the effect operation table of FIG. 166 in the own machine, and the effect operation table of FIG. Production is performed. However, the rendering operation tables of FIGS. 166 and 167 are merely examples of the rendering, and the present invention is not limited to such a rendering example.

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of execution probability distribution based on the number of effects executed in the past, and particularly shows an execution probability table.
In the execution probability table shown in FIG. 159, the notice mode A, the notice mode B, and the notice mode C are set as the contents of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command.
Further, as the number of times of effect execution based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command, for example, in the case of the notice mode A, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), “0 to 4 times”, “5 to 14 times”, “15 "29 times" and "30 times" are set. And as an execution probability of notice mode A, it sets to "0-4 times" = 90%, "5-14 times" = 60%, "15-29 times" = 40%, "30 times ~" = 50%. ing.

Also, with regard to the other notice modes B and C, the implementation probabilities are set as shown in FIGS. 159 (b) and (c), respectively.
The notice mode A, the notice mode B, and the notice mode C perform different notice effects, and for example, the notice mode A, the notice mode B, and the notice mode C are controlled in such a manner that the notice tends to appear in this order.
The notice is not limited to the three types of notice mode A, notice mode B, and notice mode C, and may be configured to include many more, and include an effect mode that is referred to as a rare thing.

Next, a specific operation of the effect by inter-sub communication will be described.
<A case where the gaming machine A instructs the notice mode A to another machine>
FIGS. 160 to 162 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the case where the game machine A instructs the notice mode A to another machine.
In FIGS. 160 to 162, reference symbols (A) to (D) denote the timing of operation.
In FIG. 160, when gaming machines A to D are installed on an island, each platform is in the following situation at timing (A). In addition, on the lower side of each gaming machine A to D, the number of past executions and the execution probability of effects instructed from other gaming machines are divided into notice modes A to C and displayed in tabular form, as necessary. There is. The same applies to the drawings after FIG. 160.

・ A game machine A
It is in the state of the symbol display (customer waiting A) of "7, 6, 7" by the customer waiting demonstration direction.
Further, the number of past executions of the effect instructed from another gaming machine is four for the notice mode A, three for the notice mode B, and two for the notice mode C.
Since the gaming machine A is scheduled to transmit an inter-subset interlocking notification system command to another machine by inter-sub-communication at the next timing (B) as its own machine, the execution probability is omitted here and not shown. On the other hand, as for the gaming machines B to D which are other machines, since they are the side receiving the inter-subset interlocking notice system command by the inter-sub communication, the execution probability is also shown.
・ Game machine B
During the jackpot game The number of past executions of the effects instructed from other gaming machines is 14 for the notice mode A, 3 for the notice mode B, and 2 for the notice mode C. The execution probability of the notice mode A is 60%, the execution probability of the notice mode B is 95%, and the execution probability of the notice mode C is 100%.
・ A game machine C
During the special figure change, the number of past executions of the effects instructed from the other gaming machines is eight for the notice mode A, six for the notice mode B, and two for the notice mode C. The execution probability of the notice mode A is 60%, the execution probability of the notice mode B is 70%, and the execution probability of the notice mode C is 100%.
・ Game machine D
It is in the state of the symbol display of "2, 4, 1" (waiting for customer A) by the customer waiting demonstration effect.
As for the number of past executions of the effects instructed from the other gaming machines, the notice mode A is 0 times, the notice mode B is 0 times, and the notice mode C is 0 times. In addition, the execution probability of the notice mode A is 90%, the execution probability of the notice mode B is 95%, and the execution probability of the notice mode C is 100%.

Next, at timing (B) shown in FIG. 161, in the gaming machine A (corresponding to own machine), the player starts playing from the state of customer waiting demonstration effect, and the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 It is assumed that the fluctuation command of is transmitted, and the start condition of the inter-subsector notice effect by the inter-sub communication is satisfied. At this timing (B), the same effects are continued in the other gaming machines B, C, D in the same gaming state as the timing (A).
In addition, the establishment of the start condition of the sub-intermediate advance notice effect, as described above, is performed, for example, while performing the variable display game based on the change command of the symbol transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 When it is time to execute the advance notice, since the inter-sub command is defined on the advance notice table at that time, the inter-sub command is set in step D1201. It becomes a state where the start condition of advance production is established.
Next, at timing (C), the inter-subset interlock notification system command is simultaneously transmitted from the gaming machine A (preliminary execution gaming machine) to the other gaming machines B, C, D as the inter-subtime preliminary announcement command. Assuming that the sub interlocking advance notice system command at this time is the content instructing the execution of the notice mode A, in the other gaming machines B, C, D, based on the execution probability of the notice mode A set in each base The presence or absence of inter-sub-announcement notification (presence mode by the inter-sub-link interlocking instruction command, hereinafter the same) is determined.

Next, at the timing (D) shown in FIG. 162, in the gaming machine A (notice execution gaming machine), the notice effect of the notice mode A (in FIG. 162, the notice mode A is indicated by the symbol YA) is started, An effect of displaying the notice mode A (here, a tiger character) is performed. When the gaming machine A executes the effect of the notice mode A drawn by itself, the number of times of execution is not counted (updated).
This is to separately manage the occurrence notice in the own game machine (notice execution game machine) and the occurrence of the notice based on the reception of the inter-subset interlock notice system command from another game machine.
On the other hand, in the other gaming machines B, C, and D, the presence or absence of inter-sub notice execution is determined using a random number based on the execution probability for the notice mode A set in each machine. For example, in the gaming machine B, as a result of performing a lottery using random numbers for the presence or absence of inter-sub-announcement execution based on the execution probability with respect to the announcement mode A, as a result of winning the execution, even during the big hit presentation round In the middle of the screen, insert the notice mode A (Tiger character) on the screen, and display it superimposed. This makes it possible to synchronize with the effect of the gaming machine A (notice execution gaming machine). In addition, since the gaming machine B executes effects based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command instructed from the gaming machine A (notice execution gaming machine) in the same group of the inter-sub communication, the next execution count of the notice mode A is Update by +1. Therefore, the number of times of the next execution of the notice mode A is updated from "14" to "15".

In the gaming machine C, as a result of performing a lottery using a random number for the presence or absence of inter-sub-announcement execution based on the execution probability with respect to the announcement mode A, even if the special figure fluctuates, The notice mode A is not inserted into the screen. In addition, since the gaming machine C does not execute the effect based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command instructed from the gaming machine A (notice execution gaming machine) in the same group of the inter-sub communication, the next execution of the notice mode A There is no update of the number, and the next execution number of the notice mode A remains "8" and there is no change.
In the gaming machine D, as a result of performing a lottery using a random number for the presence or absence of the notice execution between the subs based on the execution probability for the notice mode A, as a result of being an execution winning, the customer waiting demonstration effect "2, 4, 1" In the state of symbol display (waiting for customer A) of "", notice mode A (character of tiger) is inserted in the screen of the symbol display (waiting for customer A) of "2, 4, 1" and superimposed and displayed. This makes it possible to synchronize with the effect of the gaming machine A (notice execution gaming machine). Further, in the gaming machine D, since the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command instructed from the gaming machine A (notice execution gaming machine) in the same group of the inter-sub communication is executed, the next execution count of the notice mode A is Update by +1. Therefore, the number of times of the next execution of the notice mode A is updated from "0" to "1".

As described above, when the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command is simultaneously transmitted from the gaming machine A (notice execution executing gaming machine) to the other gaming machines B, C, D as the inter-subtime notice command, the inter-sub interlocking notice system command In the other gaming machines B, C, and D, the presence or absence of the execution of the inter-sub notice is notified to the past on the basis of the execution probability of the notice aspect A set in each platform. The lottery is performed by using a random number based on the execution probability for. Then, when execution is determined, the notice mode A (the character of the tiger) is inserted in the middle of the production of the other gaming machine, and displayed in an overlapping manner, thereby synchronizing with the production of the gaming machine A (the announcement execution gaming machine). Can take
In addition, in the gaming machine which executes the effect based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command instructed from the gaming machine A (preceding execution gaming machine) in the same group of the inter-sub communication, the number of execution times of the next notice mode A Is updated by +1 to prepare for the next inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command.

In this case, in the present embodiment, in the other gaming machines B, C, and D which have received the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command, a lottery using random numbers based on the execution probability for the past notice mode A set in each stand Therefore, since the presence or absence of the execution of the notice between the subs is determined, it is suppressed that the effect of the notice between the subs appearing as many as possible by the instruction from the other machine, and the effect of the notice between the subs appears at an appropriate frequency Can be
That is, the notice appearing by the instruction from the other machine is not involved in the big hit lottery of the own machine, and except for the one appearing by the effect drawing of the own machine, it means that it is almost off, the instruction from the other machine No matter how much the rendition appears, the probability that the player will hit the jackpot does not increase, but in the present embodiment, the rendition of the rendition to appear automatically by an instruction from another is eliminated, and the past which is past past performance results Since the presence or absence of the execution of the notice between the subs is determined based on the execution probability for the notice mode A, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice effect etc. from being lost as a result, which may lower the interest of the game. It can be eliminated.
Also, as the number of installed gaming machines increases, the number of times of communication by inter-sub communication increases, and notice effects etc. appearing by instructions from other machines increase, but in this embodiment, games within the same group of inter-sub communication Since all the machines are configured to make a lottery using a random number based on the execution probability with respect to the notice mode A and determine the presence or absence of the notice of the inter-sub, the above problem can also be solved.

Next, the operation of the case where the gaming machine C is to be the preliminary execution gaming machine will be described.
<Case where the gaming machine C instructs the notice mode C to another machine>
FIGS. 163 to 165 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the case where the game machine C instructs the notice mode C to another machine.
In FIGS. 163 to 165, symbols (E) to (H) indicate the timing of operation.
In FIG. 163, when the gaming machines A to D are installed on the island, each platform is in the following situation at timing (E).

・ A game machine A
During the special figure change, the number of past executions of the effects instructed from the other gaming machines is four for the notice mode A, three for the notice mode B, and two for the notice mode C. In addition, the execution probability of the notice mode A is 90%, the execution probability of the notice mode B is 95%, and the execution probability of the notice mode C is 100%.
・ Game machine B
During the jackpot game The execution number of the effects instructed from the other gaming machines is 15 for the notice mode A, 3 for the notice mode B, and 2 for the notice mode C. The execution probability of the notice mode A is 40%, the execution probability of the notice mode B is 95%, and the execution probability of the notice mode C is 100%.
・ A game machine C
It is in the state of the symbol display (customer waiting A) of "7,5,2" by the customer waiting demonstration direction.
Further, the number of past executions of the effects instructed from the other gaming machines is eight for the notice mode A, six for the notice mode B, and two for the notice mode C.
Since the gaming machine C is scheduled to transmit an inter-subset interlocked notification system command to another machine by inter-sub-communication at the next timing (F) as its own machine, the execution probability is omitted here and not shown.
・ Game machine D
It is in the state of the symbol display of "2, 4, 1" (waiting for customer A) by the customer waiting demonstration effect.
As for the number of past executions of the effects instructed from the other gaming machines, the notice mode A is 1 time, the notice mode B is 0 time, and the notice mode C is 0 time. In addition, the execution probability of the notice mode A is 90%, the execution probability of the notice mode B is 95%, and the execution probability of the notice mode C is 100%.

Next, at timing (F) shown in FIG. 164, in the gaming machine C (corresponding to the own machine), the player starts playing from the state of customer waiting demonstration effect, and the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 It is assumed that the fluctuation command of is transmitted, and the start condition of the inter-subsector notice effect by the inter-sub communication is satisfied. At this timing (F), the same effects are continued in the other gaming machines A, B and D in the same gaming state as the timing (E).
Next, at timing (G), the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command is simultaneously transmitted from the gaming machine C (preliminary execution gaming machine) to the other gaming machines A, B, D as the inter-subtime notice command. Assuming that the sub interlocking advance notice system command at this time is the content instructing the execution of the notice mode C, in the other gaming machines A, B, D, based on the execution probability of the notice mode C set in each base Thus, it is determined whether or not the inter-sub advance notice (the advance notice mode by the instruction of the inter-linked interlock notice command) is to be executed.

Next, at the timing (H) shown in FIG. 165, in the gaming machine C (notice execution gaming machine), the notice effect of the notice mode C (in FIG. 165, the notice mode C is indicated by the symbol YC) is started, and the display device is displayed. An effect of displaying the notice mode C (here, a tiger character) is performed. When the gaming machine C executes the effect of the notice mode C drawn by itself, the number of times of execution is not counted (updated).
On the other hand, in the other gaming machines A, B, and D, the presence or absence of inter-sub notice execution is determined using a random number based on the execution probability for the notice mode C set in each platform. For example, in the gaming machine A, as a result of performing a lottery using random numbers for the presence or absence of inter-sub-announcement execution based on the execution probability with respect to the announcement mode C, as a result of the execution winning, the special figure A mode C is inserted and displayed overlapping. This makes it possible to synchronize with the effect of the gaming machine C (notice execution gaming machine). Further, in the gaming machine A, since the effect based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command instructed from the gaming machine C (notice execution gaming machine) in the same group of sub-sub communication is executed, the next execution count of the notice mode C is Update by +1. Therefore, the number of times of the next execution of the notice mode C is updated from "2" to "3".
In the gaming machine B, as a result of performing a lottery using a random number for the presence or absence of sub-announcement execution based on the execution probability with respect to the announcement mode C, as a result of winning the execution, even in the middle of the round hit The notice mode C (Tiger character) is inserted in the screen and displayed overlapping. This makes it possible to synchronize with the effect of the gaming machine C (notice execution gaming machine). Further, in the gaming machine B, since the effect based on the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command instructed from the gaming machine C (notice execution gaming machine) in the same group of sub-sub communication is executed, the next execution number of the notice mode C is Update by +1. Therefore, the number of times of the next execution of the notice mode C is updated from "2" to "3".

  In the gaming machine D, as a result of performing a lottery using a random number for the presence or absence of sub-subcommittee execution based on the execution probability with respect to the precaution mode C, when it becomes the execution winning, the customer waiting demonstration effect, "2, 4, 1" In the state of symbol display (waiting for customer A) of "", notice mode C (character of tiger) is inserted in the screen of the symbol display (waiting for customer A) of "2, 4, 1" and superimposed and displayed. This makes it possible to synchronize with the effect of the gaming machine C (notice execution gaming machine). Further, in the gaming machine D, since the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command instructed from the gaming machine C (notice execution gaming machine) in the same group of sub-sub communication is executed, the next execution count of the notice mode C is Update by +1. Therefore, the number of times of the next execution of the notice mode C is updated from "0" to "1".

In this manner, the sub-interlocking notification system command for instructing the effect of the notification mode C is simultaneously transmitted from the gaming machine C (preliminary execution gaming machine) to the other gaming machines A, B, D as the sub-subtraction notice command. Even in the same manner as when instructing execution of the above-described notice mode A, it is possible to synchronize with the effect of the gaming machine C (notice execution gaming machine).
Also, in the present embodiment, in the other gaming machines A, B, and D which have received the inter-subsequent interlocking notice system command, the sub-game is performed by lottery using random numbers based on the execution probability for the past notice mode C set in each table. Since the presence or absence of the execution of the inter-announcement has been determined, it is suppressed that the sub-interim announcement effect will appear as many as possible by the instruction from another unit, and the inter-sub announcement event will be made to appear at an appropriate frequency. be able to.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid losing the reliability of the advance notice and the like, and it is possible to eliminate the possibility of lowering the interest of the game.

According to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) In the present embodiment, the inter-subsequent notification command is used as an inter-subsector notice command for instructing sub-subsector notices from other gaming machines from a gaming machine (notice executing gaming machine) in the same group of inter-sub communication. In the other gaming machines transmitted by communication and having received the inter-subset interlocking notice system command, the presence or absence of the execution of the inter-subprecedence by lottery using random numbers based on the execution probability for the previous sub-subdivision notice set in each machine Since it is determined, the instruction from the other units can be used to suppress the presentation of the inter-sub-announcement announcement as much as possible, and the inter-sub-announcement presentation can be made to appear at an appropriate frequency.
That is, in accordance with the number of times of execution of the sub-intermediate announcement effect performed in the past, the number of executions of the inter-interval advance announcement effect can be appropriately limited.
In particular, as the number of gaming machines in the same group performing inter-sub communication increases, the frequency of sub-interactive notices increases and the number of appearing effects increases. There is a risk of lowering the degree of reliability and lowering the interest of the game.
In this embodiment, since the number of appearances is increased (moderately) while appropriately maintaining the reliability of the sub-intermediate notice, the interest of the game is enhanced.
In addition, since the number of installed gaming machines in the same group performing inter-sub communication is not affected, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the performance (representation balance) of the gaming machines differs from one game arcade to another.
The reason is that the notice that appears under the instruction from the other unit is not related to the jackpot lottery of the player's own machine, and it means that it is almost off except for the ones that appear due to the effect lottery of the player's machine. No matter how much the effect is made to appear by the instruction, the probability that the player will not hit the jackpot does not increase, and in this embodiment, it is not possible to make the effect appear automatically by the instruction from the other machine, and the past effect Since the presence or absence of the execution of the notice between the subs is decided based on the execution probability for the notice between the pasts which is the result in the past, as a result it is possible not to lose the reliability of the notice effect etc. There is no risk of lowering the
Therefore, unlike the conventional case where the gaming machines are independent and do not cooperate with each other, in this embodiment, effects such as cooperation among the gaming machines can be performed, and the range of effects can be expanded.
That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can obtain a new game effect technique and perform effects such as cooperation between gaming machines.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device for effecting a variable display game by an effect means based on a command transmitted from the game control device,
The effect control device is
Communication means for communicating with other gaming machines;
An effect control means for causing an effect means to execute an effect based on the other-machine effect command when a predetermined condition is satisfied when another-machine effect command is received from another game machine via the communication means;
A game machine characterized by comprising.
Here, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied" means that in the gaming machine (corresponding to the player's own machine), the player starts the game from the state of the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 The variation command of is transmitted, which corresponds to a state in which the start condition of the inter-sub-accommodation announcement effect by the inter-sub-communication is satisfied.

(2) In the present embodiment, the actual number of executions of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command instructed from another gaming machine in the same group of the inter-sub communication is counted by notice type (by effect contents). If the effect of the command (sub inter-link advance notice system command) is to be made, whether or not to draw, based on the number of times of the effect performed in the past, if the lottery result to perform the effect is selected, Since the number of executions of is updated by +1 to prepare for the reception of the next inter-subset interlocked notice system command, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the execution of the inter-subsent notice reflecting the actual performance of the past, and as a result the notice It is possible to avoid losing the reliability of the effect and the like, and it is also possible to eliminate the possibility of lowering the interest of the game.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
When it is determined that the effect based on the other machine effect command is to be executed by the effect means based on the other machine effect command received from the other gaming machine, the effect frequency counting which counts the number of times of effect execution based on the other machine effect command Means,
When the other machine effect command is received from the other gaming machine via the communication means, it is determined whether or not the effect is to be executed according to the number of times of effect execution based on the other machine effect command counted by the effect frequency counting means Execution determination means for
Equipped with
The effect control means is
A game machine characterized in that, when the execution determination means determines the execution of the effect, the effect means executes the effect based on the other-machine effect command.

(3) In the other gaming machines that have received the inter-subset interlocking notice system command, the presence or absence of the execution of the inter-subsector notice is determined by lottery using random numbers based on the execution probability for the previous inter-subclass notice set in each machine Therefore, the appearance of the unlimited presentation of the notice between the subs can be suppressed, and the presentation of the notice between the subs can be made to appear at an appropriate frequency.
That is, it is possible to prevent sub-predictions from occurring frequently, and to reduce the reliability of the sub-subsidiary presentation.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The execution judgment means is
Perform a lottery to determine whether to execute the effect using random numbers based on the number of times the past effect has been executed, and if a lottery result indicates that the effect is to be executed, execute the effect based on the other machine effect command A game machine characterized in that it is determined.

(4) In the present embodiment, in the case of synchronizing the customer waiting demonstration effects of the respective units, when the effect control device 300 receives the “waiting customer demonstration command” from the gaming control device 100 of one gaming machine, the other one around The “waiting time adjustment command for customer wait” is simultaneously transmitted to the effect control device of the game machine by inter-sub communication, and it is irrelevant to the number of times the past effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 160 to 162. Since the waiting-to-wait demonstration effect is synchronized with other gaming machines without performing processing of determining presence / absence of sub-sub preliminary notice execution by random drawing using random numbers based on the execution probability for the set preliminary notice mode. The control on the side of the gaming machine intended to synchronize the presentation of each customer waiting demo can also be simplified.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
When the information for synchronizing the effect of waiting for the customer by the effect means is received from another gaming machine via the communication means,
The effect control means is
A game machine characterized by synchronizing the effect means with the effect of the customer waiting screen with another game machine regardless of the number of times the past effect has been executed and without waiting for the judgment of the execution determination means.

(5) In the gaming machine (notice executing gaming machine) serving as the transmission source that transmits the inter-subset interlocking notice system command to the other gaming machines in the same group of the inter-sub communication, the gaming machine displays the effect of the notice mode randomly selected Since the number of executions is not counted (updated) when performed by oneself, the number of executions of the own gaming machine can be prevented from being added to the number of counts of the rendering results according to the instructions from the other past Since it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the execution of the notice between the subs while making the number of counts of the effect performance by the instruction from the stand accurate, as a result, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the notice effect etc. from being lost. The possibility of lowering can also be eliminated.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect frequency counting means is
A game machine characterized in that when the effect is executed by the effect means based on the command transmitted from the game control device, the execution of the effect is not included in the count of the number of times of effect execution.

(6) The number of actual executions of the effect based on the inter-subset interlocking notice system command instructed from another gaming machine in the inter-sub communication is divided and divided (counted) by notice type (by effect contents), and notice Based on the number of executions divided by type (by effect content) and based on the number of executions, effects based on inter-subset interlocking notification system commands are executed using random numbers of different lottery probabilities corresponding to by notice type (by effect content) Since it is judged whether or not it is, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the execution of the notice between the sub-items by finely reflecting the effect performance by the previous notice type in the past, so as not to impair the reliability of the notice effect etc. It is possible to eliminate the possibility of lowering the interest of the game.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect frequency counting means is
When the effect based on the other-machine effect command is executed by the effect means based on the fact that the other-machine effect command has been received from another game machine,
The number of execution times of the effect based on the other machine effect command is divided and counted for each effect type,
The execution determination unit
Based on the number of times the effect is counted separately for each effect type by the effect frequency counting means, it is determined whether or not an effect based on another machine effect command is to be executed using random numbers of different lottery probabilities corresponding to the effect type A gaming machine characterized by having.

Next, the above embodiment has the following additional effects.
(1) The unique ID (individual identification information) can identify that it is the gaming microcomputer 101 (arithmetic processing device), and at the same time it can identify each gaming machine, as in the present embodiment, the unique ID If the legitimacy is determined by outputting the information to the outside (for example, the management device 140), the game arcade can manage the individual game machines, and the fraudster There is an effect that security is improved because it is necessary to make modifications.
In addition, as in the present embodiment, the game program created for each model and written to the arithmetic processing device is provided with a function for outputting the unique ID, so that the output form and output of the unique ID can be achieved by changing the game program. Improvements and changes in timing can be made quickly and inexpensively.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) The gaming machine can be applied not only to the example as in the embodiment but also to a sealed ball type gaming machine, as long as it plays a game using a pachinko ball.
(2) In addition, a display device capable of displaying a decorative special figure may be provided as a game machine. Therefore, the present invention can be widely applied to a general game machine provided with an image device such as a liquid crystal display.
(3) The display device is only required to change the display content, and the image may be configured to be able to change the screen content such as character display or video display.
(4) The display device is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, and for example, an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7-segment LED, a member using materials bent such as electronic paper, etc. Anything will do.
(5) In addition, the present invention is not limited to gaming machines using pachinko balls, but is applicable to so-called pachislot machines (thumbnail type slot machine gaming machines) that play games using coins (or medals) can do.

Next, a modification of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In the above embodiments, inter-sub communication is performed by wireless communication. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, inter-sub communication by wired communication may be performed.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, although the waiting for demonstration effect for customers is synchronized in all units using inter-sub communication, the present invention is not limited to this. If there is an effect to be synchronized, the present invention can It can be applied to the effects that you want to make.

(3) The number of times the sub-intermediate notice effect is executed and the lottery probability may be changed according to the inter-annual notice reliability set in the inter-subsidiar notice itself instructed by the inter-sub together interlock advance notice system command.
Originally, since the notice effect is to notice whether the effect as shown in the notice is given or not, if the notice reliability that the effect as shown on the notice is given is high (for example, the possibility of becoming a big hit in the big hit notice effect) In the case of being high), the lottery probability of the inter-subsequent notice may be changed to be higher.

(4) If the self-playing machine receives a notice of sub-sales from another game machine, the reliability of the notice of the inter-sales notice received from the other machine and the gaming state in the self-playing machine at the time of reception (eg probability state or game state) Based on (a game state such as time saving), a pending read-ahead state, etc.), it may be determined whether or not the inter-sub preliminary notice is to be executed, and the content of the inter-sub preliminary notice (the notice mode).
For example, when a high heat advance notice synchronization command is received from another machine, if the self game machine is in the normal mode and the display game result in the holding memory is only so-called "due", the probability of not executing the inter-sub notice is higher. Is desirable, but if the self-playing machine is in a specific state (for example, a short time etc.) or if there is a high expectation of a big hit in the holding memory, the lottery probability of the notice between the sub Make settings such as high.
In addition, by making the mode of the notice between subs received from another game machine change with the self-playing machine, the effect of the notice between subs in the self-playing machine is performed. For example, even if the same scroll notice is given, effects are made such that the color, size, etc. of the scrolls are different.
By doing this, it is possible to produce an announcement between subs matching the actual game situation.
In addition, as a notice between subs matching the actual game situation, for example, during a waiting for customer demonstration effect or a jackpot effect, a notice between subs is not made to appear. Because it is highly probable that the gaming guest is not in front of the gaming machine during the demonstration for waiting for a guest, it is considered that it will be useless even if the announcement between subs appears (while no one sees the subs The number of occurrences of the notice increases, and it does not match the reality).
On the other hand, even if it is such a platform (empty platform), it is possible to think that it is interesting because the notice between subs is made to appear and synchronized with other platforms, so it can be considered as such. An advance notice may be made to appear.

(5) As a response to the case where the notice synchronization command (inter-sub link interlocking notice system command) is simultaneously received from other plural game machines, for example, the notice synchronization command is received from other plural game machines at just (simultaneous) timing Since it is considered that there is almost no problem, it may be processed so that the previously received notice synchronization command has the highest priority.

(6) Even if the notice between sub-games received from another game machine is the same notice between the sub-games, in the self-play machine, the result of the display game is hit or missed after the appearance of the notice between the sub-games, or it leads to a big hit The lottery probability of the inter-sub-annual notice may be different depending on whether it is an advance notice or an advance notice at the time of disconnection.
By doing this, it is possible to produce an announcement between subs matching the actual game situation.

(7) The advance notice synchronization command (inter-subset interlock notice system command) may be divided into two steps and received from another game machine.
This is the first-stage command for transmitting the contents of the sub-intermediate notice (for the preparation of the presentation preparation period, etc.), and the second-stage command starts the execution of the inter-sub-announcement presentation It is a command of instruction. Then, in the game machine on the receiving side, when receiving the first stage command, the sub-intermediate announcement effect can be executed at any time, and when the second stage command is received, the inter-intermediate announcement effect is executed immediately However, specifically, it is configured to further perform the following fine processing.
That is, the first stage command is transmitted at the start of variation of the special figure, the lottery between sub-notices is performed at the timing of the first stage command, and only the gaming machine for which the advance notice is determined to be executed is the second stage. The announcement effect may be executed by receiving a command.
The background is as follows.
The command received by the effect control device from the main board (game control device) has a higher priority than the advance notice synchronization command received by sub-sub communication, so even when the sub-sub communication command is received, the main board at the same time If a command from the (game control device) has been received, it is necessary to perform processing with high priority based on the command, and a situation may be considered in which the inter-sub-notice notice command can not be immediately executed.
Then, after the above priority processing is finished and processing for the sub-intermediate notice command can be executed, production is already started on other machines even if preparation for presentation is started, and only the game machine concerned is shifted. There is a risk that they will
Therefore, when it is intended to perform effects simultaneously among a plurality of gaming machines by configuring to receive the advance notice synchronization command in two steps, such a situation (a command from the main board, and the like on a specific table) Even if a coexistence with the advance notice synchronization command occurs, it is possible to synchronize the presentation of the notice between the subs without any problem.

(8) The gaming machine side that has received the advance notice synchronization command (inter-subset interlocking notice system command) from the other game machine not only determines whether or not to execute the effect of the inter-sub notice, and On the side of the gaming machine that transmits between, the gaming machine that transmits the sub-intermediate notice may be determined by drawing from among a plurality of gaming machines in the same group of inter-sub communication.
That is, instead of the configuration in which the receiver of the inter-sub-notice judges and determines whether or not to execute, the sending side of the inter-sub-notice determines the sending / doing not transmit, and the effect of inter-sub-prediction is limited.
In this way, the processing load on the gaming machine on the side receiving the advance notice synchronization command is reduced.
Moreover, since the number of times of inter-sub communication is reduced, traffic congestion can be reduced.

(9) A master gaming machine may be selected from a plurality of gaming machines in the same group of the inter-sub communication and arranged, and in this master gaming machine, the notice appearance management may be controlled.
In this way, in addition to being able to centrally manage the appearance of notices in the master gaming machine, it is easy to control other gaming machines.

(10) With regard to the effect by inter-sub communication that you absolutely want to perform, such as synchronization of error notification caused by the occurrence of fraud, do not consider the number of performance results by instructions from other machines in the past; It may be configured to be always executed.
Specifically, in the case where fraud (for example, magnet fraud) occurs in a specific gaming machine among a plurality of gaming machines in the same group of inter-sub communication, the effect control device from the gaming control device of the gaming machine When the command concerning the fraud is transmitted to the, and the command concerning the fraud is received in the effect control device, the command for synchronizing the effect of the fraud notification by the display device to a plurality of other gaming machines in the same group by inter-sub communication Broadcast simultaneously. Thereby, in the other gaming machines, upon receiving a command for synchronizing the effect of the informing notification, the display device displays an error notification notifying the injustice, and synchronizes the informing notification within the same group.

Among the above configurations, the inventive concept relating to a fraudulently generated gaming machine is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
A game machine characterized by simultaneously transmitting information for synchronizing the effect of the informing of the injustice by the effect means to the other gaming machine through the communication means when receiving a command concerning the injustice from the game control device.
Among the above configurations, the inventive concept of a gaming machine that receives a command to synchronize the effect of the unauthorized notification is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
When a command related to fraud is received from another gaming machine via the communication means,
A game machine characterized by synchronizing, with the other game machine, the effect of the unauthorized notification by the effect means by the effect control means.

(11) Although the above embodiment of the present invention is an example in which the operation of video, audio, decoration, and character is controlled by one effect control board, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, control is performed by a plurality of effect control boards A configuration may be adopted, or a plurality of CPUs may be mounted on the same substrate for sharing control.
By doing so, the processing speed of each CPU is reduced as the processing load on each CPU is reduced. In addition, the program size of each CPU can be reduced.

Next, the inventive concept extracted from the above-described embodiment and modification will be described.
For convenience of explanation, the present invention is referred to as inventive concept W, and other inventive concepts are distinguished by a code different from W.
"Invention concept A1"
In the first embodiment, when the variation control command and the symbol command to be combined are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, storage for effect at the time when the effect control device 300 receives the change pattern command sent earlier. If the area is set to the default value and the symbol command sent later is missed, the command to be a set does not hold, so the effect control device 300 uses the default value of the storage area for the effect and uses the special figure (the decoration special figure The production of) is performed.
Therefore, even if the symbol command sent later is missed, by performing the special figure change based on the default value, the special view change is rendered at the same timing as the usual game, and hence the game Will not give a sense of distrust to
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game;
An effect control device that performs an effect of a variable display game in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on a display device and stopped based on a command transmitted from the game control device;
Equipped with
The game control device transmits a command to the effect control device based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening to execute the variable display game, and the stop mode of the variable display game becomes the specific display mode. In a gaming machine to which a benefit is given,
The effect control device is
Default value setting means for setting a storage area related to effect to a default value based on reception of a command sent earlier among a plurality of sets of commands;
When receiving a command to be sent later among a plurality of sets of commands, an effect is performed based on the plurality of sets of commands,
Effect control means for performing an effect based on the default value set by the default value setting means, if the reception of the command to be sent later is missed;
A game machine characterized by comprising.

"Invention concept A2"
In the first embodiment, when the symbol designation command to be sent later is received, it is determined that a set of commands has been established, and the default value stored in the storage area related to the effect (symbol stop state in the missing symbol) Is processed to the information corresponding to the regular command (design designation command).
Then, in the effect control device 300, the effect of the variable display control of the symbol is performed based on the establishment of a plurality of commands (a fluctuation pattern command sent earlier and a symbol specification command sent later) as a set. In this case, the symbol designation command to be sent later is rewritten from the default value and becomes a normal command (design symbol designation command), and the symbol effect is executed based on the respective commands forming these groups.
Therefore, the effect based on the regular command is performed, and the game proceeds normally.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
And a rewriting unit that rewrites the default value stored in the storage area related to the effect into information corresponding to the normal command based on the reception of the group command sent from the game control device.
A game machine characterized in that the effect control means effects variation display of a symbol based on a previously sent command and information rewritten by the rewriting means.

"Invention concept A3"
In the first embodiment, even if the symbol command sent later is missed, the symbol stop state with the out-of-out symbol is set as the default value in the storage area related to the effect when the command received earlier is received. And make a special figure change based on this default value.
Therefore, since the default value is set to a value such as the symbol stop state with the removal symbol, even if the symbol command is missed, the special figure effect can be performed without contradiction with the game result.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The default value setting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the default value is set to information such that a symbol stop state with an off symbol is to be made.

"Invention concept A4"
In the first embodiment, when the change pattern command and the symbol command are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, first, when the effect control device 300 receives the change pattern command sent earlier, the storage area related to effect Is set as the default value to the symbol stop state with the out-of-pattern, and then, when the symbol designating command to be sent later is dropped, the special figure fluctuation is performed based on the default value (the symbol stop state with out-of-edge symbol).
Therefore, even if the symbol command is missed, the special figure variation is performed based on the default value, so that it is possible to stop with the out symbol without contradiction to the game result.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The command transmitted from the game control device is composed of a first command and a second command that are effective in combination,
The first command is sent first, and the second command is sent later,
Each of these commands is a screen change command and a result mode command,
A game machine characterized in that the default value setting means sets, based on the reception of the first command, information for producing effects with a default pattern as a default value in a storage area related to effects.

"Invention concept A5"
In the first embodiment, when the symbol designation command to be sent later is received, it is determined that a set of commands has been established, and the default value stored in the storage area related to the effect (symbol stop state in the missing symbol) Is processed to the information corresponding to the regular command (design designation command).
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The rewriting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when a command to be sent later is received, it is determined that a set of commands is established, and the default value is rewritten to information corresponding to a regular command.

"Invention concept A6"
In the first embodiment, a command (first command) to be sent first among a plurality of sets of commands in either case of out-of-pattern variation (in-out stop) or big-hit symbol variation (in-big stop) is selected. At the time of reception, the default value is set in the storage area related to the effect.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid troubles such as displaying a big hit symbol even though it is lost.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The default value setting means is
A game characterized by setting a default value in a storage area related to rendering based on reception of the first command, regardless of the type of command corresponding to performing the symbol variation or the rendering of the specific display mode. Machine.

"Invention concept A7"
In the first embodiment, when the change pattern command and the symbol command are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, first, when the effect control device 300 receives the change pattern command to be sent earlier, storage related to effect The area is set to a default value (for example, the symbol stop state with the off symbol), and then, when the symbol designating command to be sent later is received, it is judged that the command to be a group is established, The default value of is rewritten to the information corresponding to the regular command (design designation command).
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The default value setting means is
Default storage area for effect that stores information for an effect whose content is determined by the first command and the second command based on the reception of the first command of the first command and the second command that exert effects in a set A game machine characterized by setting a value.

"Invention concept A8"
In the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are sequentially transmitted from the skill control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 performs the special drawing based on the plurality of commands as the transmitted set. Perform effect control of. In this case, the symbol command to be sent later is rewritten from the default value to become a normal command (design designation command), and symbol rendering is performed based on each command forming these groups.
However, when the symbol command sent later is missed, the special value is rendered by using (adopting) the default value.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control means of the effect control device is
Among the plurality of sets of commands, on the basis of the reception of a command to be sent later, the effect of the symbol variation display is produced based on the plurality of sets of commands.
A game machine characterized by performing variation display of a symbol based on a default value set by the default value setting means when a command sent later is missed.

"Invention concept A9"
As a modification of the first embodiment, when the command sent earlier is received, the effect control device 300 sets a default command as a default value in the command storage area of the RAM 311 a of the main control microcomputer 311, and thereafter, When the subsequent regular command is received (received), the default value may be overwritten and rewritten with the command (received command), and an effect may be performed based on the previously sent command and the rewritten command.
This inventive concept is expressed as follows.
The default value setting means of the effect control device is
Set the command storage area to a default value based on the reception of a command sent first among a plurality of sets of commands,
The rewriting means rewrites the default value stored in the command storage area into a normal command based on the reception of the command sent later,
An effect control means performs an effect based on a previously sent command and a command rewritten by the rewriting means.

"Invention concept B1"
In the first embodiment, the variation pattern command and the symbol command to be combined are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control is performed based thereon, but not limited thereto. For example, the following symbol command is missed In such a case, if the following modification is performed, the inventive concept B1 is derived.
That is, it is determined whether or not the time from the end of the previous symbol fluctuation to the current reception of the fluctuation pattern command is within a prescribed time (for example, one second) when the effect control device 300 receives the fluctuation pattern command sent earlier. If it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol change to the current reception of the change pattern command is determined to be within the specified time, the symbol change processing is started even if the symbol command sent later is missed. If it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol fluctuation to the current reception of the fluctuation pattern command exceeds the specified time, processing may be performed in which the fluctuation of the symbol is not started.
According to the concept of the present invention, it is possible to provide a special figure effect that does not give the player a stress as much as possible.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game;
An effect control device that performs an effect of a variable display game in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on a display device and stopped based on a command transmitted from the game control device;
Equipped with
The game control device transmits a command to the effect control device based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening to execute the variable display game, and the stop mode of the variable display game becomes the specific display mode. In a gaming machine to which a benefit is given,
The effect control device is
A determination unit that determines whether or not the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the current reception of the command is within a specified time based on the reception of the command sent earlier among the plurality of sets of commands;
If it is determined by the determination means that the time from the end of the previous symbol change to the current command reception is within the specified time, processing of starting the change of the symbol is performed even if the command sent later is missed
Effect control means for controlling so as not to start the fluctuation of the symbol when it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol fluctuation to the current reception of the command exceeds the specified time;
A game machine characterized by comprising.

"Invention concept B2"
In the invention concept B1, the pattern stop result mode (deterioration or big hit) is judged from the variation pattern command, and basically there is only one type of stop symbol command of the removal, so even if the design command is dropped, even the variation pattern command can be received If it is, it is set as the composition which can start symbol variation.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The command transmitted from the game control device is made up of a first command and a second command that exert effects in combination,
The first command is sent first, and the second command is sent later,
Each of these commands is a screen change command and a result mode command,
The effect control means determines the stop mode of the variable display game based on the first command based on the reception of the first command, and determines the symbol of the change so as to become the determined stop mode. Machine.

"Invention concept B3"
In the invention concept B1, when the pattern stop result mode (off or big hit) is judged from the fluctuation pattern command, and it is judged that the pattern stop result mode is off, the time from the end of the previous symbol fluctuation to the current fluctuation pattern command reception If it is determined that it is within the time, even if it receives the symbol command sent later, it starts symbol variation as continuous variation, but when it is judged as a big hit from the symbol stop result mode, it has been from the previous symbol variation end If it is determined that the time until the fluctuation pattern command is received is within the specified time, even if the symbol command sent later is dropped, after the fluctuation is started, it is forced to stop in a non-probable variation pattern (normal pattern) The design is to determine the symbol.
With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the sense of discomfort from the game and minimize the stress on the player as much as possible in the case of a break or a big hit.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control means determines the stop mode of the variable display game based on the reception of the previous command, and starts the change when the display mode becomes the out-of-page display mode.
When it comes to a hit display mode as a specific display mode, the game machine is characterized in that the variation is started and the stop mode is controlled to be a normal hit pattern.

"Invention concept B4"
In the invention concept B1, when it is determined as a big hit as a symbol stop result mode from the variation pattern command, it is forcibly stopped at a non-probable variation symbol (for example, “444”).
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid such a problem that the definite variation symbol is stopped due to the start effect of the big hit but the definite variation is not made.
After that, when the fanfare command and the symbol command are received by the effect control device 300 as a command relating to the next effect, the actual jackpot symbol designated by the symbol command is displayed based on the reception of the symbol command. And make a jackpot effect.
With this configuration, when a big hit occurs, it is possible to perform a big hit without a sense of discomfort in the game, regardless of whether it is a normal symbol or a odd symbol.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control means determines the stop mode of the variable display game based on the reception of the previous command, and starts the change when it becomes a hit display mode as a specific display mode,
A game machine characterized by performing control to stop and display symbol variation with an actual hit symbol designated by a command received thereafter after the start of symbol variation.

"Invention concept B5"
In Inventive concept B1, when it is judged that it is a fluctuation pattern exclusive to a probability variation symbol when it is judged from the fluctuation pattern command that a symbol stop result aspect (disappearance or big hit), it is via an effect forcibly stopping at a non probability variation symbol Without changing, start the continuous fluctuation of the design, it is decided that the design is decided in the stop mode which becomes the odd change design.
With this configuration, it is possible to proceed with an easy-to-understand, comfortable game.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control means determines the stop mode of the variable display game based on the reception of the above-mentioned command, and when it becomes a hit display mode with probability change as a specific display mode, starts the change and the stop mode is A game machine characterized by performing control to be a hit symbol with probability fluctuation

"Invention concept B6"
In the invention concept B1, a configuration is adopted in which the number-of-holds check is added to the continuous fluctuation determination.
That is, when the variation pattern command is received, the number of reservations is checked, and if the number of special views is 0, it is determined that the current variation pattern command is an invalid command (illegal determination) and the previous stop command If the number of special drawing reservations accompanied by the starting winning combination is “1” before receiving “1”, control is performed such that it is determined that reception of the current variation pattern command is valid.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of symbol variation based on an incorrect variation pattern command by performing the number of reservations check when the variation pattern command is received.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device
A start winning memory storing means for storing, in a predetermined range, the number of start winnings based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening;
The effect control device is
The game control apparatus further includes start winning memory determination means for determining whether or not the start winning memory exists based on reception of a command sent earlier, when information on the start winning memory sent from the game control device is received,
The effect control means is
A game machine characterized by adding a judgment result of the start winning memory memory judging means to judge whether or not to start fluctuation of the symbol.

"Invention concept B7"
In the invention concept B1, when the condition of continuous fluctuation is satisfied and the current fluctuation is outlier fluctuation, fluctuation start without waiting for the next symbol command reception (4 ms later) simultaneously with fluctuation pattern command reception. Start various settings.
With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of checking the consistency of the command when the out-of-design changes. Therefore, there is an advantage that it is possible to spare time for setting of effect data and to allow a processing time of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 to have a margin.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control means of the effect control device is
If it is determined that the time from the previous symbol variation end to the current command reception is within the specified time by the determination means, the setting for the start of the symbol variation is immediately made without waiting for the reception of the command sent later A gaming machine characterized by performing processing to be started.

"Invention concept C1"
In the first embodiment, a gaming machine provided with a game control apparatus 100 for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control apparatus 300 for controlling the presentation means based on a command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to produce an effect. In the (pachinko machine 1), the parent module and the child module respectively execute type determination of whether or not the value of the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is within the predetermined range for each type of command, and each module It is a necessary condition for executing processing for controlling the rendering means according to the command that the type determination result in is within the predetermined range.
For this reason, since the command can be limited first by the type determination (range check) and unnecessary data and programs can be reduced, it is possible to efficiently create a program (including various data necessary for processing) of analysis processing of the command. .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine comprising: a game control device for controlling the progress of a game; and a presentation control device for controlling a presentation means based on a command transmitted from the gaming control device,
The analysis process of the command executed by the effect control device having received the command is a parent module that is a routine that controls the analysis process, and a child module that is a routine that is called and executed from the parent module Configure
The type determination of whether or not the value of the command is in a predetermined range for each type of command is executed in each of the parent module and the child module,
A game machine characterized in that the type determination result in each module is within the predetermined range as a condition for executing a process for controlling the effect means according to the command.

"Invention concept C2"
In the first embodiment, the parent module has a narrower range of checking, and is limited to a narrow range before branching, so there is an advantage that the corresponding processing can be easily subdivided.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined range which is a reference of the type determination is narrower in the parent module than in the child module.

"Invention concept C3"
In the first embodiment, when it is determined that the MODE is not within the predetermined range in step D93, D99, etc. of the type determination, and the determination results are all NO, ExMode is not set and the process returns through step D147. The command is not adopted, and as a result, the command is discarded.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the type determination result is out of the predetermined range, the command is discarded or invalidated.

"Invention concept I1"
In the first embodiment, when there is a command reception interrupt generated by transmission of a command from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 executes a reception process (command reception interrupt process) for receiving the command. The analysis processing of the command received in the reception processing (reception command analysis processing) is executed separately in a predetermined cycle separately from the reception processing, and the normality of whether the value of the received command is within a predetermined range The sex determination is performed at least in the reception process (step D54 and the like). For this reason, the load of the analysis processing can be reduced, and command reception and analysis can be realized efficiently.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine comprising: a game control device for controlling the progress of a game; and a presentation control device for controlling a presentation means based on a command transmitted from the gaming control device,
The effect control device is
When there is a command reception interrupt generated when the command is transmitted from the game control device, the reception process for receiving the command is executed, and the analysis process of the command received in the reception process is received The processing is executed at a predetermined cycle separately from the processing,
A game machine characterized by executing normality determination as to whether or not the value of the command is within a predetermined range in the reception process.

"Invention concept I2"
In the first embodiment, when the normality determination result does not fall within the predetermined range, processing for controlling the rendering means according to the command is not executed, thereby preventing a malfunction.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized in that the normality determination result being within the predetermined range is a condition for executing a process for controlling the effect means according to the command.

"Invention concept I3"
In the first embodiment, in the effect control device 300, the value of the command is the reception processing (command reception interrupt processing) of the command transmitted from the game control device 100 and the analysis processing of the command (reception command analysis processing). The normality determination as to whether or not it is within the predetermined range is executed.
For this reason, the load of normality determination of the command can be appropriately shared between the reception process and the analysis process, and an effect such as speeding up of the entire process can be realized while avoiding a drop in the command.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game machine characterized by performing the normality determination in each of the reception process and the analysis process.

"Invention concept I4"
In the first embodiment, the predetermined range serving as a reference for determining the normality is wider in the receiving process than in the analysis process, so that the one receiving process is completed earlier, and the command is dropped. Effects such as ensuring that the problem is avoided.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined range which is a reference of the normality determination is wider in the reception process than in the analysis process.

"Invention concept I5"
In the first embodiment, the predetermined range serving as the reference of the normality determination is the entire set of values that the command can take in the reception process, and in the analysis process, the normal type of the received command is applicable. As a configuration in which the command is a set of possible values, an effect is realized such that the one reception process is terminated earlier to surely prevent the command from being missed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In the reception process, the predetermined range that is the basis of the normality determination is the entire set of possible values of the command, and in the analysis process, the received normal command of the type to which the received command corresponds is taken. A gaming machine characterized by being a set of values to be obtained.

"Invention concept I6"
In the first embodiment, in the command reception interrupt process in the effect control device 300, when it is determined in step D54 (step D61) that the reception MODE is not within the predetermined range and the determination result is NO, the received command is commanded. Since the process of step D56 of storing in the buffer is not executed and the process returns through step D55, the command is not adopted (that is, invalidated), and as a result, the command is discarded. Also, if it is determined that MODE is not within the predetermined range in steps D93 and D99 in the received command analysis processing and all the determination results are NO, ExMode is not set and the command returns because it returns through step D147. It is not adopted (i.e. invalidated) and as a result, the command will be discarded.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized by discarding or invalidating the command when the normality determination result is out of the predetermined range.

"Invention concept L1"
In the first embodiment, as described in the description of the control process of the effect control device 300 (the description of the flowchart), the steps such as steps D703 to 705 and step D725 in the advance notice information update determination process (FIG. 132) by the effect control device 300 The following control (delay control for delaying the start of the rendering operation) can be performed by the processing. That is, when it is desired to send the reflection of the notice effect from the reference time, the notice display start delay timer (delay timer) is set, and the notice effect is started when the notice display start delay timer is up. When this delay timer is not set (at the time of 0), effects are performed according to the reference time. As a result, effects such as fine adjustment of the presentation start time can be obtained. For example, the timing at which the rendering is performed, such as the first step of the step-up notice, is basically determined substantially for each model. This is to prevent curtailment of curiosity falling as it is not possible to predict at each broken timing. However, even with the same SU1 effect, the type of characters appearing by distribution is changed, the reliability is changed, and the interest of the game is enhanced, and even if the effect at the same basic timing is different the effect time depending on the effect content In such a case, according to the notice display start delay timer, the start time of the effect can be finely adjusted, and the timing of the end of the effect can be matched.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine provided with a presentation control device that performs presentation by controlling the presentation operation of presentation means,
The effect control device is
When there is the rendering operation to be executed for a predetermined basic timing, a delay timer is set for the rendering operation, and the rendering operation is performed at a timing delayed from the basic timing by the set value of the delay timer. A game machine characterized by having a startable configuration.

"Invention concept L2"
In the first embodiment, it is possible to set the basic timing separately for each of the rendering operations by setting the symbol variation table and the advance notice control table used in the control process of the rendering control device 300. In this case, the delay time by the delay timer may be relatively short, and a period during which the control process for the rendering operation is being performed even though the rendering operation (display of the preview rendering image, etc.) is not actually performed. It can be relatively short.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized in that the basic timing separately exists for each of the plurality of effect operations with respect to each of the effect operations.

"Invention concept L3"
In the first embodiment, the basic timing is made the same for a plurality of rendering operations by setting of the symbol variation table and the advance notice control table used in the control processing of the rendering control device 300, and each control of each rendering operation It is possible to set it up to start processing. In this case, it is not necessary to constantly manage the advance notice occurrence timing linked with the progress of the symbol variation, the program structure can be simplified, and the development efficiency is improved. The reason is that, for example, a program can be created with a simple idea of starting all the notices at the start of fluctuation and starting the rendering operation from the time-up. In addition, even when changing the specifications of the timing of advance notice occurrence, it is only necessary to change the delay timer value, and the troublesome work of reviewing the contents of the symbol variation table and performing alignment with the movement of symbols becomes unnecessary. It is.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A plurality of the rendering operations having the same basic timing exist for a plurality of the rendering operations,
A game machine characterized in that the effect control device is configured to start control processing of a plurality of the effect operations from the same basic timing.

"Invention concept L4"
In the first embodiment, the screen 41a of the display device 41 is configured to produce the variation display game of the decorative symbol of the special drawing, and the display operation of the presentation image (for example, the notice image) on the screen 41a The above delay control can be executed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It has a display device as the effect means,
The effect control device is configured to perform an effect of a variable display game in which symbols are variably displayed on the screen of the display device and stopped.
A game machine characterized in that the effect operation includes an operation of displaying an effect image on the screen in the variable display game.

"Invention concept L5"
In the first embodiment, the basic timing includes at least a start time point of the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game machine characterized in that the basic timing includes at least a start time of the variable display of the symbol.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 front frame 5 glass frame 20 game board 25 first starting winning opening 26 second starting winning opening 2 (normal electric winning combination: common electric power) (normal fluctuation winning a prize device)
27 Fluctuation Winning Device (Special Fluctuation Winning Device)
32 General drawing start gate 35 Collective display 41 Display (special view display) (Normal symbol variable display) (rendering means)
54 card unit connection board 55 external information terminal board 100 gaming control device 101 gaming microcomputer (processing processor for gaming)
101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 1st starting opening switch 121 2nd starting opening switch 122 gate switch 123 winning opening switch 124 count switch 125 magnetic sensor switch 126 vibration sensor switch 140 management device 200 dispensing control device 201 dispensing microcomputer 211 glass frame opening detection switch 212 front frame Open detection switch 213 Overflow switch 214 Electric wave detection sensor 215 Payout ball detection switch 216 Shoot ball out switch 300 Presentation control device (communication means, effect control means, effect number counting means, execution judgment means)
311 Main control microcomputer (1st CPU)
311a RAM
360 wireless module (communication method)
371 Setting switch 500 Power supply 551 Card unit

Claims (1)

Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A game control device for producing a variable display game based on a command transmitted from the game control means;
The effect control means is
In the effect of the variable display game, it is possible to execute at least a predetermined advance effect by a combination of video and audio,
The preliminary announcement effect is constituted by a plurality of sections,
As a clocking means for managing the execution of the advance presentation,
A first clocking means comprising a counter that counts the remaining time of the time value of each section of the preliminary rendering effect;
The second clocking means comprising a counter for clocking a delay time for delaying the start of the audio output corresponding to each section of the preliminary presentation effect ;
Updating the second clock means prior to the first clock means;
When the time of the second time counting means is up, it becomes possible to start voice output corresponding to each section of the notice effect,
A game machine characterized in that the second clock means is shared by a video and an audio constituting the notice effect.

Images